Former Fort Ord, Monterey California
FORMER FORT ORD • MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA MILITARY MUNITIONS RESPONSE PROGRAM
PROGRAMMATIC WORK PLAN
VOLUME 1 OF 2
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS PREPARED FOR: SACRAMENTO DISTRICT
PARSONS PREPARED BY: FORMER FORT ORD PROJECT OFFICE
CONTRACT NUMBER: DACA05-00-D-0003
MAY 2001 – ORIGINAL EDITION DATE
MAY 2004 – SECOND EDITION WITH UPDATES
FORMER FORT ORD • MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA MILITARY MUNITIONS RESPONSE PROGRAM
PROGRAMMATIC WORK PLAN
VOLUME 2 OF 2
MAY 2004
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS PREPARED FOR: SACRAMENTO DISTRICT
PARSONS PREPARED BY: FORMER FORT ORD PROJECT OFFICE
CONTRACT NUMBER: DACA05-00-D-0003 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page TABLE OF CONTENTS...... i LIST OF APPENDICES...... xii LIST OF FIGURES ...... xiii LIST OF TABLES ...... xiv LIST OF ACRONYMS...... xv REFERENCES...... xxiv GLOSSARY...... xxvi CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION...... 1-1 1.1 Introduction...... 1-1 1.2 Purpose...... 1-1 1.3 Scope...... 1-1 1.4 Work Plan Content...... 1-1 1.5 Changes to the Work Plan...... 1-2 1.6 Site Location ...... 1-4 1.7 Former Fort Ord History ...... 1-4 1.8 Topography/Geology ...... 1-4 1.8.1 Topography ...... 1-4 1.8.2 Geology...... 1-5 1.9 Climate...... 1-5
CHAPTER 2 TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT PLAN...... 2-1 2.1 Introduction...... 2-1 2.1.1 General ...... 2-1 2.1.1.1 Definitions...... 2-1 2.1.2 Coordinate with Local Agencies...... 2-2 2.1.3 Organize Support Facilities and Test Communications Equipment ...... 2-2 2.1.4 Hire and Assemble Work Force...... 2-3 2.1.5 Public Awareness Activities...... 2-4 2.2 Field Operations...... 2-4 2.2.1 General Site Practices...... 2-7 2.2.2 Work Hours...... 2-7 2.2.3 Site Access ...... 2-7 2.2.4 Handling of MEC...... 2-7 2.2.5 Safety Training/Briefing ...... 2-7 2.2.6 Environmental Awareness...... 2-8 2.2.7 Safety and Environmental Violations ...... 2-8 2.2.8 Work Clothing and Field Sanitation...... 2-8 2.2.9 Compliance with Plans and Procedures ...... 2-9 2.2.10 Preparation of Work Areas...... 2-9 2.2.11 Field Sanitation and Wash Point ...... 2-11
i Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 2.3 Site Operations in Sequential Order...... 2-11 2.3.1 Preparatory Inspection and Environmental Survey...... 2-11 2.3.2 Placement of Border Markers ...... 2-11 2.3.3 Vegetation Removal...... 2-13 2.3.4 MEC Operations Construction Support ...... 2-14 2.3.5 Divide the Operating Area into Individual Grids...... 2-14 2.3.6 Surface Searches ...... 2-15 2.3.7 Geophysical Sampling Procedures...... 2-17 2.3.8 MEC Investigation Operations...... 2-17 2.4 Demolition Operations...... 2-19 2.4.1 Demolition of MEC...... 2-19 2.5 Records...... 2-22 2.6 Treatment of Small Arms Ammunition ...... 2-22 2.7 Removal and Treatment of Scrap Metal ...... 2-23 2.8 Restoration ...... 2-23 2.9 Quality Control Inspections ...... 2-23 2.9.1...... 2-23 2.10 After Action Report...... 2-24 2.10.1 Composition ...... 2-24
CHAPTER 3 EXPLOSIVES MANAGEMENT PLAN...... 3-1 3.1 Introduction...... 3-1 3.2 Regulatory References ...... 3-1 3.3 Responsibilities ...... 3-1 3.3.1 Field Operations Manager...... 3-1 3.3.2 UXOQCS ...... 3-1 3.3.3 UXOSO...... 3-2 3.3.4 Vehicle Driver...... 3-2 3.4 Acquisition...... 3-2 3.4.1 Requisitions...... 3-2 3.5 Receipt ...... 3-2 3.5.1 Receipt Discrepancies ...... 3-2 3.6 Storage ...... 3-2 3.7 Security ...... 3-6 3.7.1 Exterior Construction...... 3-6 3.7.2 Hinges and Hasps...... 3-6 3.7.3 Locks...... 3-6 3.7.4 Signage/Placarding...... 3-6 3.7.5 Lightning Protection...... 3-6 3.7.6 Emergency Notification List ...... 3-6 3.7.7 Compatibility...... 3-7 3.7.8 Key Control...... 3-7 3.7.9 Inspection ...... 3-7 3.8 Inventory ...... 3-7 3.8.1 Usage Inventory ...... 3-15 3.8.2 Monthly Inventory ...... 3-15 3.8.3 Discrepancies ...... 3-15 3.8.4 Procedures for Return to Storage of Explosives Not Expended3-15 3.8.5 Disposal of Remaining Explosives ...... 3-15 3.9 Transportation ...... 3-15
ii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 3.9.1 General Highway Transport...... 3-16 3.9.2 Federal Installations/On-Site...... 3-21 3.9.3 Off-Site Transportation of Explosives Over Public Highway...3-21 3.9.4 General Placarding Requirements...... 3-22 3.9.5 Documentation ...... 3-22 Attachment 1 - Material Data Sheets
CHAPTER 4 EXPLOSIVES SITING PLAN...... 4-1 4.1 Introduction...... 4-1 4.2 Explosives Storage Magazines...... 4-1 4.2.1 Types(s) of Magazines ...... 4-1 4.2.2 Net Explosives Weight (NEW) and Hazard Division...... 4-1 4.2.3 Quantity Distance Criteria for Siting ...... 4-2 4.3 Ordnance and Explosives Areas...... 4-3 4.3.1 Minimum Separation Distances ...... 4-3 4.3.2 Demolition Areas (Intentional Detonations) ...... 4-3 4.4 Foot Print Areas ...... 4-3 4.4.1 Engineering Controls ...... 4-3 4.4.2 Blow-in Place...... 4-4 4.4.3 Collection Points ...... 4-4 4.4.4 Consolidated Shots...... 4-4 4.4.5 Confirmatory Methods...... 4-4
CHAPTER 5 GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION PLAN...... 5-1 5.1 Objectives...... 5-1 5.2 Site Description...... 5-1 5.2.1 Topography ...... 5-1 5.2.2 Vegetation ...... 5-2 5.2.3 Geologic Conditions...... 5-2 5.2.4 Soil Conditions...... 5-3 5.2.5 Groundwater Conditions ...... 5-3 5.2.6 Geophysical Conditions ...... 5-4 5.2.7 Site Utilities...... 5-4 5.2.8 Man-Made Features Potentially Affecting Geophysical Investigations ...... 5-4 5.2.9 Site-Specific Dynamic Events Affecting Geophysical Investigations ...... 5-4 5.2.10 Overall Site Accessibility and Impediments ...... 5-5 5.2.11 Potential Worker Hazards ...... 5-5 5.3 Geodetic Surveying...... 5-5 5.4 Brush Clearing ...... 5-6 5.5 Geophysical Investigation Performance Goals ...... 5-6 5.5.1 MEC Detection...... 5-6 5.5.2 Performance Goal Modification...... 5-6 5.5.3 Horizontal Accuracy ...... 5-6 5.5.4 False Positives...... 5-6 5.5.5 False Negatives ...... 5-6 5.6 Geophysical Investigation Methods...... 5-7 5.6.1 Equipment ...... 5-7
iii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 5.6.2 Test Plot (Site-Specific Geophysical Prove-Out)...... 5-9 5.6.3 Geophysical Navigation Methods ...... 5-9 5.6.4 Survey Procedures...... 5-15 5.7 Personnel...... 5-18 5.7.1 Project Geophysicist...... 5-18 5.7.2 Field Geophysicist/Geophysical Technicians ...... 5-19 5.7.3 QC Geophysicist ...... 5-19 5.7.4 Data Processors ...... 5-19 5.7.5 Geophysical Team Structure and Management...... 5-20 5.8 Production Rates ...... 5-20 5.9 Data Resolution and Data Density ...... 5-20 5.10 Geophysical Data Processing and Records Management ...... 5-21 5.10.1 Field Records Management...... 5-21 5.10.2 Field Data Storage...... 5-21 5.10.3 Processing of Geophysical Data...... 5-21 5.10.4 Methodology for Picking Anomalies ...... 5-22 5.11 Data Delivery ...... 5-23 5.12 Instrument Standardization ...... 5-23 5.12.1 Positioning Equipment Checks ...... 5-23 5.12.2 Geophysical Sensor Checks ...... 5-24 5.12.3 Six-line Test ...... 5.24 5.12.4 Instrument Drift Checks...... 5.25 5.13 Anomaly Reacquisition...... 5-25 5.14 Dig Sheet Development ...... 5-25 5.15 Feed-Back Process (Comparison of dig-sheet predictions with ground truth)...... 5-26 5.16 Final Report and Maps...... 5-26
CHAPTER 6 SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN ...... 6-1 6.1 Purpose...... 6-1 6.2 Applicability...... 6-1 6.3 Unknown Filler ...... 6-1 6.4 Staff Organizational Structure and Responsibilities ...... 6-2 6.4.1 General ...... 6-2 6.4.2 Responsible Parsons Safety and Health Personnel...... 6-2 6.4.3 Employee Safety Responsibilities...... 6-2 6.6 Hazard Analysis and Risk Assessment ...... 6-5 6.6.1 Safety Hazards ...... 6-5 6.6.2 Biological Hazards...... 6-9 6.6.3 Physical Hazards ...... 6-20 6.6.4 Chemical Hazards ...... 6-32 6.6.5 Chemical Warfare Munitions...... 6-32 6.6.6 Task Hazard Analysis ...... 6-33 6.7 Medical Monitoring ...... 6-33 6.8 Training...... 6-44 6.8.1 Site Specific Training...... 6-44 6.8.2 Tailgate Safety Meetings...... 6-45 6.8.3 Supervisor Meetings...... 6-45 6.8.4 Training Documentation ...... 6-45
iv Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 6.8.5 Hazard Communication Training...... 6-45 6.8.6 Blood borne Pathogen Training ...... 6-46 6.8.7 Visitor Training...... 6-46 6.8.8 Ergonomic Training ...... 6-46 6.9 Personal Protective Equipment ...... 6-46 6.9.1 Level D Protective Ensemble...... 6-46 6.9.2 Upgrading PPE...... 6-47 6.10 Site Control ...... 6-47 6.11 Decontamination and Personnel Hygiene ...... 6-48 6.11.1 Potable Water...... 6-48 6.11.2 Toilet Facilities...... 6-48 6.11.3 Washing Facilities...... 6-48 6.12 Environmental and Personal Monitoring ...... 6-49 6.13 Emergency Response and Contingency Procedures ...... 6-49 6.13.1 Identifying Potential Emergencies ...... 6-49 6.13.2 Emergency Response Responsibilities...... 6-49 6.13.3 On-Site Emergency Response Services ...... 6-50 6.13.4 Off-Site Emergency Response Services...... 6-50 6.13.5 Route to Hospital...... 6-50 6.13.6 Emergency Response Training...... 6-52 6.13.7 Emergency Equipment ...... 6-52 6.13.8 Communication Devices ...... 6-53 6.13.9 General Emergency Procedures ...... 6-53 6.13.10 Contingency Plans...... 6-56 6.13.11 Chemical Spills ...... 6-63 6.14 Logs, Reports and Record Keeping...... 6-58 6.14.1 Logbook ...... 6-58 6.14.2 Safety Log...... 6-58 6.14.3 Training Log...... 6-59 6.14.4 Equipment Maintenance...... 6-59 6.14.5 Record Keeping...... 6-59 6.14.6 Accident Reporting ...... 6-59 6.15 Standard Operating Procedures, Engineering Controls, and Safe Work Practices ...... 6-60 6.15.1 General Safety...... 6-60
CHAPTER 7 LOCATION SURVEYS AND MAPPING PLAN...... 7-1 7.1 General...... 7-1 7.2 Location Surveys...... 7-3 7.2.1 Control Points...... 7-3 7.2.2 MRS Site Boundaries...... 7-4 7.2.3 Operating Grids...... 7-4 7.2.4 MM Items Encountered...... 7-5 7.2.5 Other Items as Required...... 7-6 7.2.6 Safety...... 7-6 7.2.7 Equipment ...... 7-6 7.2.8 Accuracy ...... 7-6 7.2.9 Quality Control...... 7-6 7.3 Geographical Information System (GIS) ...... 7-6 7.3.1 GIS Hardware...... 7-6
v Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 7.3.2 Software ...... 7-7 7.3.3 File Formats and Requirements...... 7-7 7.3.4 Metadata Requirements...... 7-7 7.3.5 GIS Data Directory Structure...... 7-8 7.3.6 Data Distribution...... 7-8 7.3.7 General Map Requirements...... 7-8 7.3.8 Documentation ...... 7-8 7.3.9 Staffing...... 7-9 7.3.10 Quality Control...... 7-9 7.4 Database Management ...... 7-9 7.4.1 Hardware...... 7-9 7.4.2 Software ...... 7-10 7.4.3 Structure and Design ...... 7-10 7.4.4 Data Capture Methods...... 7-11 7.4.5 Data Distribution...... 7-11 7.4.6 Staffing...... 7-11 7.4.7 Database User Administration ...... 7-12 7.4.8 Database Backup Routines ...... 7-12 7.4.9 Database Users Manual ...... 7-12 7.4.10 Digital Image Catalog...... 7-12 7.4.11 Quality Control ...... 7-12
CHAPTER 8 WORK, DATA AND COST MANAGEMENT PLAN...... 8-1 8.1 Purpose and Approach ...... 8-1 8.1.1 Earned Value Management System ...... 8-1 8.1.2 Baseline Development...... 8-2 8.1.3 Project Execution and Reporting...... 8-5 8.1.4 Material and Subcontract Management...... 8-6 8.1.5 Change Control ...... 8-7 8.1.6 System Surveillance...... 8-7 8.1.7 Procedures...... 8-8 8.2 System Concepts and Use ...... 8-8 8.2.1 Overview...... 8-8 8.2.2 Data Update...... 8-9 8.2.3 Monthly Reporting Cycles ...... 8-10 8.2.4 Variance Analysis Thresholds...... 8-10 8.2.5 Variance Analysis ...... 8-11 8.2.6 Cost Variance...... 8-11 8.2.7 Schedule Variance...... 8-11 8.2.8 At-Completion Variance ...... 8-11 8.2.9 Monitoring Corrective Action...... 8-11 8.2.10 Variance Reporting ...... 8-11 8.2.11 Trend Analysis ...... 8-12 8.2.12 Estimate at Completion (EAC) ...... 8-12 8.3 Project Organization...... 8-13 8.3.1 Subcontractors...... 8-13 8.4 Work Schedule...... 8-13 8.5 Manpower Requirements ...... 8-14 8.5.1 Travel and Per Diem ...... 8-14 8.5.2 Equipment, Materials and Supplies...... 8-15
vi Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 8.5.3 Meetings...... 8-15
CHAPTER 9 PROPERTY MANAGEMENT PLAN...... 9-1 9.1 Policy ...... 9-1 9.2 Scope...... 9-1 9.3 Responsibility...... 9-1 9.3.1 Corporate Manager of Procurement...... 9-1 9.3.2 Program Manager...... 9-1 9.3.3 Logistician...... 9-2 9.3.4 Supervisors...... 9-2 9.3.5 Individuals...... 9-2 9.4 Property Types and Classification...... 9-2 9.5 Equipment Lease or Purchase ...... 9-4 9.6 Property Management ...... 9-4 9.7 Loss, Damage and Destruction of Government Property...... 9-4 9.8 Internal Audit and Compliance Review...... 9-5 9.9 Acquisition...... 9-5 9.10 Receiving ...... 9-6 9.11 Identification of Government Property ...... 9-6 9.12 Tagging ...... 9-7 9.13 Records...... 9-7 9.13.1 Records for Material ...... 9-8 9.14 Storage ...... 9-8 9.15 Movement ...... 9-8 9.16 Maintenance of Government Property...... 9-8 9.17 Consumption ...... 9-8 9.18 Utilization & Scrap ...... 9-9 9.19 Physical Inventories ...... 9-9 9.20 Reports ...... 9-10 9.21 Subcontractor Control ...... 9-10 9.22 Disposition of Government Property ...... 9-11 9.22.1 Screening for Excess/Internal Transfer...... 9-11 9.22.2 Transfer to Government ...... 9-11 9.23 Contract Property Close-Out...... 9-11 9.24 Government Property Transferred to Parsons...... 9-12
CHAPTER 10 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS PLAN...... 10-1
CHAPTER 11 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN ...... 11-1 11.1 Introduction...... 11-1 11.2 Organization...... 11-1 11.2.1 General ...... 11-1 11.2.2 Authority and Responsibility ...... 11-2 11.2.3 Personnel Selection, Indoctrination, and Training...... 11-4 11.2.4 Evaluation of QCP Implementation ...... 11-4 11.3 Quality Program...... 11-4 11.3.1 Preparation, Review, and Acceptance of QCP...... 11-4 11.3.2 Preparation, Review, and Approval of Project Procedures...... 11-4 11.3.3 Control of QCP and Project Procedures...... 11-5
vii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 11.3.4 Geophysical Survey QC...... 11-5 11.3.5 Geophysical Survey QA...... 11-10 11.4 Contract Review...... 11-10 11.4.1 Contract Administration...... 11-10 11.4.2 Subcontract/Supplier Administration...... 11-10 11.5 Design Control ...... 11-11 11.5.1 General ...... 11-11 11.5.2 Design and/or Technical Documentation Verification...... 11-11 11.5.3 Technical Baseline Control ...... 11-11 11.5.4 Review of Subcontractor Submittals...... 11-11 11.6 Document Control...... 11-12 11.6.1 General ...... 11-12 11.6.2 Document Distribution and Retrieval ...... 11-12 11.6.3 Field Records Management...... 11-12 11.6.4 Field Data Storage...... 11.13 11.7 Procurement Control ...... 11-13 11.7.1 Preparation of a Subcontract or a Purchase Order ...... 11-13 11.7.2 Reviews...... 11-13 11.7.3 Subcontractor/Supplier Evaluation ...... 11-13 11.7.4 Verification of Supplier Products and Services ...... 11-14 11.8 Government/Contractor Furnished Equipment ...... 11-14 11.8.1 General ...... 11-14 11.8.2 Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) ...... 11-14 11.8.3 Contractor Furnished Equipment (CFE) ...... 11-14 11.9 Inspection and Test Control ...... 11-14 11.9.1 Engineering Review...... 11-14 11.9.2 Inspection and Test Plan ...... 11-14 11.9.3 Qualification of Test Laboratory...... 11-15 11.9.4 Final Inspection and Tests...... 11-15 11.9.5 Records...... 11-15 11.9.6 Equipment Maintenance and Tests ...... 11.16 11.10 Measuring and Test Equipment...... 11-17 11.10.1 Control of Measuring and Test Equipment...... 11-17 11.10.2 Equipment Control...... 11-17 11.10.3 Instrument Calibration ...... 11-18 11.10.4 UXOQC Inspections/Surveys ...... 11-18 11.10.5 QC Seeded Items...... 11-18 11.10.6 Equipment Maintenance and Tests ...... 11-18 11.10.7 Preventive Maintenance ...... 11-19 11.10.8 Equipment Spare Parts ...... 11-18 11.11 Nonconforming Items or Activities and Corrective Actions...... 11-19 11.11.1 Identification ...... 11-19 11.11.2 Resolution, Corrective Action, and Verification...... 11-19 11.11.3 Material and Item Nonconformances...... 11-20 11.11.4 Review and Disposition of Nonconformances...... 11-20 11.11.5 Trend Analysis and Preventive Action...... 11-21 11.11.6 Lessons Learned...... 11-21 11.12 Handling, Storage, and Preservation...... 11-22 11.12.1 General ...... 11-22 11.12.2 Handling of Design Documents ...... 11-22 11.12.3 Handling of Materials and Items...... 11-22
viii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 11.12.4 Handling...... 11-22 11.12.5 Storage...... 11-22 11.12.6 Preservation...... 11-23 11.13 Records and Publications ...... 11-23 11.13.1 Identification ...... 11-23 11.13.2 Authentication...... 11-23 11.13.3 Storage...... 11-23 11.13.4 Logs and Records...... 11-23 11.13.5 Publications...... 11-24 11.14 Audits and Surveillances...... 11-26 11.14.1 Audit Planning ...... 11-26 11.14.2 Audit Personnel...... 11-26 11.14.3 Audit Execution ...... 11-27 11.14.4 Audit Reporting...... 11-27 11.14.5 Review and Approval of Recommended Action Response .... 11-27 11.14.6 Verification of Closeout Action ...... 11-27 11.14.7 Surveillances/QC Audits...... 11-28 11.14.8 Stop Work ...... 11-28 11.14.9 Records...... 11-28 11.15 Training...... 11-28 11.15.1 General ...... 11-28 11.15.2 Qualification Requirements...... 11-29 11.15.3 Training for UXO Personnel...... 11-29 11.15.4 Training for Non-UXO Personnel...... 11-30 11.15.5 Training Requirements...... 11-30 11.16 Statistical Techniques...... 11-31 11.16.1 General ...... 11-31 11.17 Quality Improvement ...... 11-32 11.17.1 General ...... 11-32 11.17.2 Goal and Objectives ...... 11-32 11.17.3 Customer Feedback...... 11-32 11.17.4 Improvements...... 11-32 11.17.5 Servicing ...... 11-32
CHAPTER 12 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN...... 12-1 12.1 Introduction...... 12-1 12.2 Goals ...... 12-1 12.3 Environmental Coordination...... 12-1 12.4 Protection and Conservation of Natural Resources...... 12-1 12.4.1 Threatened and Endangered Species...... 12-2 12.4.2 Protection and Conservation of T&E Species...... 12-3 12.4.3 Protection of T&E Species...... 12-3 12.5 Vegetation Clearance ...... 12-4 12.6 Sensitive Communities...... 12-4 12.7 Wetlands...... 12-4 12.8 Protection and Conservation of Cultural and Archaeological Resources ..12-5 12.9 Pollution Prevention and Waste Minimization ...... 12-5 12.9.1 Hazardous Materials Management...... 12-5 12.9.2 Hazardous Waste Management...... 12-5 12.9.3 Wastewater Generation ...... 12-7
ix Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 12.9.4 Air Emissions...... 12-7 12.9.5 Solid Waste ...... 12-8 12.10 Protection and Restoration of UXO Work Areas...... 12-8 12.10.1 Protection of Personnel and Work Areas ...... 12-8 12.10.2 Restoration of Work Areas...... 12-9
CHAPTER 13 INVESTIGATIVE DERIVED WASTE PLAN...... 13-1 13.1 Introduction...... 13-1 13.2 Waste Segregation and Containerization ...... 13-1 13.3 Sampling and Analytical Strategy...... 13-2 13.4 Storage of IDW ...... 13-3 13.5 Manifesting and Transportation of IDW...... 13-3 13.6 Disposal of IDW ...... 13-3
x Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 LIST OF APPENDICES
Appendix A Task Order Scope of Work
Appendix B Site Maps
Appendix C Local Points of Contact
Appendix D Contractor Forms
Appendix E Critical Staff Resumes
Appendix F Basic Safety Concepts and Considerations for MEC Treatment Operations
Appendix G Standard Operating Procedures
Appendix H Data Item Descriptions
Appendix I Material Safety Data Sheets
Appendix J Lead Management Plan
Appendix K Respiratory Protection Program
xi Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 LIST OF FIGURES
No. Title Page
2-1 Project Organization Chart...... 2-6 2-2 The Former Fort Ord Clean-up Process Flow Diagram...... 2-12
3-1 OE Sector Explosive Purchase/Receipt/Transportation Authorization List...... 3-4 3-2 OE Sector Magazine Data Card ...... 3-5 3-3 Explosives Usage Form...... 3-17 3-4 Emergency Response Information ...... 3-18 3-5 Motor Vehicle Inspection...... 3-20
6-1 Poison Ivy/Poison Oak/Poison Sumac ...... 6-10 6-2 Photograph of Tick...... 6-11 6-3 Decision Diagram for Stings from Insects ...... 6-15 6-4 Photograph of Western Rattlesnake ...... 6-16 6-5 Photograph of Black Widow Spider...... 6-18 6-6 Photograph of Brown Recluse Spider ...... 6-18 6-7 Directions to Community Hospital of Monterey Pennisula ...... 6-51 6-8 Emergency Contacts...... 6-52
7-1 Removal Action Grid Layout...... 7-5
8-1 Work Breakdown Structure...... 8-3 8-2 Parsons Integrated Control System (PICS) Flow Chart ...... 8-9
xii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 LIST OF TABLES
No. Title Page
3-1 General Placarding Requirements...... 3-8 3-2 General Placarding Requirements...... 3-8 3-3 Storage Compatibility Groups for Explosives and Ammunition ...... 3-9 3-4 Storage Compatibility Chart...... 3-14
4-1 Net Explosives Weight (NEW) and Hazard Division...... 4-2
5-1 Commercially Available and Industry Accepted Geophysical Detection Technologies ...... 5-12
6-1 Responsibilities of Parsons Team Members, Ft. Ord, California...... 6-3 6-2 Snake Identification Features...... 6-17 6-3 Suggested Frequency of Psychological Monitoring for Fit and Acclimatized Workers ...... 6-26 6-4 Work/Rest Schedule Based on WBGT Reading ...... 6-27 6-5 Progressive Clinical Symptoms of Hypothermia ...... 6-29 6-6 Hazard Analysis by Site Activity...... 6-34 6-7 Minimum Number of Facilities...... 6-49
7-1 Database QC Action and Responsibilities ...... 7-13
8-1 Daily Activity Schedule ...... 8-15
11-1 The Structure of Project Procedures...... 11-5 11-2 Geophysical QC Steps...... 11-6 11-3 Parsons Design Validation Engineering Procedures...... 11-11 11-4 List of Document Types for the Document Control Log ...... 11-12
12-1 List of Threatened and Endangered Species at the Former Ft. Ord ...... 12-2
xiii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 LIST OF ACRONYMS
GENERAL This appendix contains a list of acronyms used in this Programmatic Work Plan.
ACGIH American Congress of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
ACWP Actual Cost of Work Performed
AR Army Regulation
ASP Ammunition Supply Point
ASR Archives Search Report
BAC Budget at Completion
BATF Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms
BCWS Budgeted Cost of Work Scheduled
BCWP Budgeted Cost of Work Performed
BGS Below Ground Surface
BIP Blow In Place
BIL Bill of Lading
BLM Bureau of Land Management
BRAC Base Realignment and Closure Commission
C Centigrade
CA Control Accounts
CAM Control Account Managers
CAP Contractor Acquired Property
CAR Corrective Action Request
CBB Contract Budget Base
CDC Centers for Disease Control
CDL Commercial Drivers License
xiv Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 CEHNC U.S. Army Engineering and Support Center, Huntsville Division, Huntsville, Alabama
CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act
CESPK U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Sacramento District Office
CETC Comprehensive Estimate to Complete
CFE Contractor Furnished Equipment
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CHOMP Community Hospital of the Monterey Peninsula
CIH Certified Industrial Hygienist
CMV Commercial Motor Vehicle
COC Chain-of-Custody
COR Contracting Officer’s Representative
CPI Cost Performance Index
CPM Critical Path Method
CPR Cardio-Pulmonary Resuscitation
CSHP Corporate Safety and Health Program
C/SSR Cost and Schedule Status Report
CV Cost Variance
CWM Chemical Warfare Munitions
DCAA Defense Contract Audit Agency
DCMA Defense Contracting Management Agency
DENR Directorate of Environmental and Natural Resources
DFAR Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation
DID Data Item Description
DMCS Document and Material Control System
xv Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 DOD/DD Department of Defense
DOT Department of Transportation
DQO Data Quality Objective
DRMO Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office
DRO Del Ray Oaks
DS Demolition Supervisor
EAC Estimate at Completion
EE/CA Engineering Evaluation/Cost Analysis
EM Engineer Manual
EMM Earth Moving Machinery
EOD Explosive Ordnance Disposal
EPA (USEPA) Environmental Protection Agency
EPP Environmental Protection Plan
ESL Explosive Storage Location
ETC Estimate to Complete
EVMS Earned Value Management System
EZ Exclusion Zone
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAR Federal Acquisition Regulation
FEIS Final Environmental Impact Statement
FG Field Geophysicist
FGCC Federal Generic Control Committee
FIFO First In First Out
FM Formations
FOM Field Operations Manager
xvi Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 FORA Fort Ord Reuse Authority
GFE Government Furnished Equipment
GFM Government Furnished Material
GIP Geophysical Investigation Plan
GIS Geographic Information System
GP Government Property
GPI Government Property Identification Number
GPS Global Positioning System
GS/SS Grid Stats/Site Stats
GT Geophysical Technicians
HAZWOPER Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
HE High Explosive
HH Hand Held
HIV Human Immunodeficiency Virus
HMP Habitat Management Plan
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HTW Hazardous Toxic Waste
IA Impact Area
ID Identification
IDW Investigative Derived Waste
IMP Information Management Plan
IMS Integrated Master Schedule
JSIDS Joint Service Intrusion Detection System
JTR Joint Travel Regulation
Kg Kilograms
xvii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 KO Contracting Officer
LCL Laboratory Control Samples
M&TE Measuring & Test Equipment
MEC Munitions Explosive Concern
MDL Method Detection Limit mm Millimeter
MM Military Munitions
MOFB Miniature Open Front Barricade
MPM Most Probable Munition
MR Management Reserve
MRA Multi-Range Area
MRD Missouri River District
MSD Minimum Safe Distance
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets
MS/MSD Matrix Spikes/Matrix Spike Duplicate
MSL Mean Sea Level
NAD North American Datum
NAS Network Analysis System
NEW Net Explosive Weight
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIDA National Institute of Drug Manufacturers Association
NIST National Institute of Standards & Technology
OBS Organizational Breakdown Structure
OE Ordnance and Explosives
ODDS Ordnance Detection and Discrimination Study
xviii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSIC On-Scene Incident Commander
PAO Public Affairs Office
PARCC Precision, Accuracy, Representativeness, Completeness, Comparability
PC Personnel Commuter
PDOP Position Dilution of Precision
PDN Project Design Notes
PHSO Project Health & Safety Officer
PICS Parsons Integrated Control System
PM Program Manager
PMB Performance Measurement Baseline
POC Point of Contact
POM Presidio of Monterey
POM-A Presidio of Monterey Annex
POM-PAO Presidio of Monterey Public Affairs Office
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PQL Practical Quantitation Limit
PWP Programmatic Work Plan
QA Quality Assurance
QCP Quality Control Plan
QC Quality Control
QCM Quality Control Manager
RAM Responsibility Assignment Matrix
RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
RFP Request for Proposal
xix Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 RFQ Request for Quotation
RMSF Rocky Mountain Spotted Fever
RT/DGPS Real Time/Differential Global Positioning System
RPD Relative Percent Difference
SAP Sampling & Analysis Plan
SHM Safety and Health Manager
SHP Safety and Health Program
SOW Scope of Work
SR Site Reconnaissance
SHP Safety and Health Program
SSHP Site Specific Health and Safety Plan
SSOP Site Specific Prove-Out
SSWP Site Specific Work Plan
SUXOS Senior UXO Supervisor
SV Schedule Variance
SWP Safe Work Practices
SZ Support Zone
T&E Threatened & Endangered
TCPI To Complete Performance Index
TCRA Time Critical Removal Action
TEU Technical Escort Unit
TLV Threshold Limit Values
TM Technical Manuals
TO Task Order
TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act
xx Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 TPP Technical Project Planning
UB Undistributed Budget
USACE United States Army Corps of Engineers
USEASCH U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Huntsville Office
USNAVSCLEOD U.S. Naval School Explosive Ordnance Disposal
UXOSO Unexploded Ordnance Safety Officer
UXQCS Unexploded Ordnance Quality Control Specialist
VAC Variance at Completion
VAR Variance Analysis Report
WAD Work Authorization Document
WBGT Wet Bulb Global Temperature
WBS Work Breakdown Structure
WDCMP Work, Data and Cost Management Plan
WO Work Orders
WP White Phosphorus or Work Plan, depending upon context
xxi Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 LIST OF REFERENCES
AR 190-11 Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition and Explosives AR 200-1 Environmental Protection and Enhancement AR-200-2 Environmental Effects of Army Actions AR 385-10 Army Safety Program AR 385-16 System Safety Engineering and Management AR 385-40 Accident Reporting and Records w/CESPK supplement AR 385-64 Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction DA PAM 385-64 Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards DOD 4145.26-M Contractors Safety Manual for Ammunition and Explosives DOD 4160.21-M Defense Reutilization and Marketing Manual DOD 6055.9-STD DOD Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards TM9-1300-200 Ammunition General TM9-1300-206 Ammunition and Explosives Standards TM9-1300-214 Military Explosives TM60A-1-1-31 EOD Disposal Procedures DD Form 1149 Shipment of Government Property DD Form 1662 Government Property DFARS 245 Government Property DOD 4161.2-M Government Property EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual EP 1110-1-18 OE Response EM 1110-1-4009 Ordnance and Explosives Response ER 385-1-92 Safety and Occupational Health Document Requirements for Hazardous Waste Remedial Actions ER 1110-1-12 Engineering and Design, Quality Management FAR Part 45 Government Property ATFP 5400.7 Alcohol Tobacco and Firearms Explosives Laws and Regulations 27 CFR Part 55 Commerce in Explosives 29 CFR 1910 OSHA General Industry Standards 29 CFR 1926 OSHA Construction Standards 40 CFR Parts 260-300 EPA Protection of Environment
xxii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 49 CFR Parts 100-199 Dept. of Transportation 49 CFR Part 383.5 Dept. of Transportation HNC-ED-CS-S-97-3 Safety Submission for On-Site Demolition Container for UXO HNC-ED-CS-S-98-1 Appropriate Safety Distances HNC-ED-CS-S-98-7 Use of Sandbags for Mitigation of Fragmentation and Blast Effects Due to Intentional Detonation of Munitions U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Sacramento District,. April 1997. Installation-wide Multi-species Habitat Management Plan for Former Fort Ord, California. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Sacramento District,. May 1997. Wetland Restoration Plan for Unexploded Ordnance Removal Activities at Former Fort Ord. HNC-IGD 02-03 Procedures for Assessing Munitions with Unknown Fillers, Ordnance and Explosives Center of Expertise (OE-CX) Interim Guidance Document 02-03 FAR 7.401 Acquisition considerations SF 364 Report of Discrepancy
xxiii Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 GLOSSARY
Construction Support - Support provided by qualified UXO personnel during construction activities at potential MEC sites to reduce the potential for exposure to MEC. When a determination is made that the probability of encountering MEC is low (i.e., current or previous land use leads to an initial determination that MEC may be present), only MEC safety support is required. When a determination is made that the probability of encountering MEC is moderate to high (current or previous land use leads to an initial determination that MEC was employed or disposed of in the area of concern), UXO teams are required to conduct subsurface MEC clearance of the known construction footprint either in conjunction with the construction contractor or prior to construction intrusive activities. The level of effort will be determined on a case-by-case basis in coordination with the OE MCX and EP 75-1-2.
Exclusion Zone - A safety zone established around an MEC work area. Only project personnel and authorized, escorted visitors are allowed within the exclusion zone. Examples of exclusion zones are safety zones around MEC intrusive activities and safety zones where MEC is intentionally detonated. (DDESB-KO, 27 January 1990)
Explosive - Includes items designed to cause damage to personnel or material through explosive force that may be accomplished by bombs, warheads, missiles, projectiles, rockets, antipersonnel and antitank mines, demolition and spotting charges, grenades, torpedoes and depth charges, high explosives and propellants, fuses from practice items, and all similar and related items or components explosive in nature.
Geophysical Reacquire - The Geophysical Reacquire method involves utilizing both a positioning method (i.e., GPS, ultrasonic, or tape from corners) and geophysical instruments to reacquire and pinpoint anomaly locations selected by the geophysical processors. The geophysical instruments include the original instrument used for the digital survey of the grid and the analog instrument being utilized by the UXO teams for intrusive activities. The intended result of this method is to pinpoint the location where the intrusive teams will find the subsurface item causing the anomaly.
GPS Relocation – GPS Relocation involves reacquiring anomaly locations selected by the geophysical processors, using a GPS instrument to find the selected location. An RTK (sub-centimeter accuracy) GPS is used for the relocation. Geophysical instruments are not used to pinpoint the anomaly using this method. The GPS relocation method will be used in areas that have a large number of anomalies (>250 per 100 x 199 ft, area). The intended result of this method is to place a flag as close to the anomaly as possible with the intrusive team pinpointing the anomaly location with an analog geophysical instrument.
xxiv Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 Military Munitions - Ammunition products and components produced/used by armed forces for defense and security.
Military Munitions Response Department of Defense-established program that manages the Program - environmental, health and safety issues presented by munitions of explosives concern.
Minimum Separation The distance greater than the hazard distance for the Most Probable Distance - Munitions from intentional (K50)/unintentional (K328) detonations.
Most Probable Munition - The MEC item that has the greatest hazard distance based on calculations of the explosion effects of the MEC item anticipated to be found on the site. Typically, the Most Probable Munition is the MEC item with the greatest fragmentation or overpressure distance based on the type of MEC items that were historically used at the site.
Munitions and Explosives of MEC consists of either (1) or (2) below: Concern (MEC) - (1) Ammunition, ammunition components, chemical or biological warfare materiel or explosives that have been abandoned, expelled from demolition pits or burning pads, lost, discarded, buried, or fired. Such ammunition, ammunition components and explosives are no longer under accountable record control of any DOD organization or activity. (HQDA Policy Memorandum “Explosives Safety Policy for Real Property Containing Conventional OE”) (2) Explosive Soil. See definition under “Explosive Soil.” (ER 1110- 1-8153).
Munitions Debris - Remnants of munitions.
Munitions Response Area Defense site area known to or suspected of containing UXO, DMM (MRA) - or MC that consists of one or more MRSs.
Munitions Response Site - Location(s) in MRA requiring munitions response.
Munitions and Explosives of Performing MEC searches within portions of a site to determine the Concern Sampling - presence of MEC.
Range-related Debris - All other scrap that is not munitions debris.
Reconnaissance - An activity conducted to determine whether areas identified as potential OE areas (suspected OE sites or other areas of concern such as areas in between OE sites) will require sampling for OE. The data gathered during reconnaissance activities will be used to evaluate the need for further OE-related investigations (e.g., OE sampling). In general, reconnaissance will include conducting a site walk to identify visual evidence of OE. Some intrusive investigation may be performed during reconnaissance based on results of the visual search.
Safety Zone - Normally a 200-foot wide area extending from the boundary and running the length of an OE clearance site that borders other OE sites. The buffer zone is a “safe” zone in the event personnel or
xxv Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 EMM inadvertently enter the adjacent OE site.
Small Arms Ammunition Replaces Small Arms. (SAA) -
Unexploded Ordnance (UXO) Military munitions that have been primed, fuzed, armed, or - otherwise prepared for action, and have been fired, dropped, launched, projected or placed in such a manner as to constitute a hazard to operations, installation, personnel, or material and remain unexploded either by malfunction, design, or any other cause. (40 CFR 266.201)
UXO Operations The clearance of structures, pads, and roads prior to and during Construction Support - destruction and removal.
xxvi Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This Programmatic Work Plan (PWP) describes the procedures, methods, and resources Parsons and its subcontractors will use while performing Military Munitions Response Program (MMRP) at the former Fort Ord (Fort Ord), California. Authorization for performance of this work is contained in Task Order 0001 under contract DACA05-00-D-0003, which was issued by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Sacramento District (CESPK) 14 July 2000.
1.2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this PWP is to define management, operations, safety and environmental protection procedures/methods that Parsons will use to perform work associated with subsequent Task Orders. This PWP is the basic document with site specific work plan(s) (SSWP) being implemented as addendums to the PWP.
1.3 SCOPE
This PWP is intended to be an all-inclusive document that has been specifically tailored to the requirements of the anticipated Task Orders under this contract. All site operations will be executed in accordance with this plan and the applicable SSWP. Any deviation from this plan requires the prior approval of both Parsons and the CESPK Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR), as well as completion of the Field Work Variance Form (FVF) (Appendix D).
1.4 WORK PLAN CONTENT
This PWP consists of the below listed sub-plans:
• Technical Management Plan: Describes the approach, methods and procedures employed in the performance of MMRP operations at Fort Ord.
• Explosives Management Plan: Provides details for the management of explosives, acquisition, receipt, storage, security, inventory and transportation.
• Explosive Siting Plan: Includes explosive safety criteria for planning and siting explosives operations.
• Geophysical Investigation Plan: Provides details of the approach, methods and operational procedures to be documented and employed in the performance of geophysical investigations.
• Site Safety and Health Plan: Provides requirements for medical monitoring and training, personal protective equipment, site control and emergency response, and incorporates Parsons’ Safety and Health Program including Hazard Analysis and Risk assessments.
• Location Surveys, Mapping and GIS Plan: Describes the methods, equipment and accuracy required for location surveys, mapping and the elements of a GIS plan.
1-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Work, Data and Cost Management Plan: Describes procedures for the management and control of work and cost.
• Property Management Plan: Describes how property will be requisitioned, received, managed and inventoried.
• Sampling and Analysis Plan: Provides guidance for evaluating and characterizing sites where MMRP may potentially be present.
• Quality Control Plan: Describes the approach, methods and operational procedures to be employed in the performance of quality control (QC). These procedures include: design, document and procurement control, Government Furnished Equipment, non-conformance, audits, training and quality improvement.
• Environmental Protection Plan: Provides the approach, methods and operational procedures employed in the protection of the environment.
• Investigative Derived Waste Plan: Provides approach, methods and operational procedures used in handling the various non-chemical weapons materials (CWM) derived waste.
1.5 CHANGES TO THE WORK PLAN
This PWP was prepared after careful study and evaluation and is based on the best available information at the time. During execution of this plan, unforeseen circumstances or events may require modification of this plan.
This PWP is submitted as a "Primary Document" as defined in the Fort Ord Federal Facility Agreement (FFA), dated June 1990. The Fort Ord FFA contains specific requirements for document submission and review. The PWP, although submitted as a primary document, will implement a modified document review process defined below:
• Under no circumstances will any change to this plan be executed unless specifically approved by both the Parsons Program Manager (PM) and the CESPK COR.
• FVFs (see Appendix D), as specified in the CESPK-Parsons contract, will be used for changes or modifications to the PWP. The PM will provide a complete description of the circumstances and factors surrounding the need to change/modify, recommend a course of action, and identify the impact the change or modification will have on the project.
• Draft FVFs will be prepared by Parsons and distributed to CESPK for review and approval. Following approval Parsons will distribute the signed FVF to Base Realignment and Closure/Department of Environmental Resources (BRAC/DENR), U.S. Environmental Projection Agency (EPA) and the Department of Toxic Substance Control (DTSC) for discussion at the next Base Closure Team (BCT) meeting. Following approval of the provisions in the draft FVF by the BCT, Parsons will prepare the final FVF and incorporate the change/modification into the PWP.
• Approved changes/modifications will be published as slip changes to this document with an amendment cover letter. Changes/modifications to the PWP will be provided to the agencies.
1-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• When seven (7) FVFs are issued for a specific chapter of the PWP, the entire chapter will be rewritten to incorporate the provisions of all the FVFs issued and the updated chapter will be provided to the agencies for review. At this time, additional changes/modifications to the specific chapter may also be considered for incorporation. The BCT may also request that a chapter or the entire PWP be modified to address significant changes.
• Approved changes will be communicated to site personnel prior to implementation.
Note If the circumstances requiring the change involve safety or quality, the PM will suspend all work affected by the unforeseen condition or activity until the cause is investigated and approved written procedures are in place.
1.6 SITE LOCATION
Fort Ord is an Army installation located along the Pacific Ocean in northern Monterey County, approximately 100 miles south of San Francisco (Appendix B, Map 1). The facility occupies approximately 28,000 acres, or 43 square miles, adjacent to Monterey Bay (a national marine sanctuary) and the cities of Marina, Seaside, Sand City, Del Rey Oaks and Monterey (Appendix B, Map 2). The Southern Pacific Railroad and State Highway 1 cross the western section of Fort Ord, separating the beachfront from the majority of the installation. Fort Ord is bound on the east by undeveloped land.
Of the total Fort Ord acreage, 73% (approximately 20,000 acres) is in unincorporated Monterey County, 15% (approximately 4,100 acres) is within the Seaside city limits, 12% (approximately 3,400 acres) is within the Marina city limits and 1.3% (approximately 357 acres) is within the Del Rey Oaks city limits.
1.7 FORMER FORT ORD HISTORY
Fort Ord was established as a training and staging facility for infantry troops in 1917 when the U.S. Government purchased 15,809 acres near what is now East Garrison (U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Huntsville Division, 1993). Fort Ord was used as a maneuver area and field target range for the 11th Cavalry and the 76th Field Artillery, which were then stationed at the Presidio of Monterey (POM). In 1933, the installation was designated Camp Ord and only minor improvements were made prior to 1938. By August 1940, Camp Ord was designated Fort Ord, and the post was expanded to more than 20,000 acres. During World War II, the post served as a staging area for many fighting divisions and units, including a permanent training center for several amphibious units. Following World War II, Fort Ord became the home of the 4th Infantry Division and, in 1957, was designated the United States Army Training Center, Infantry. In 1974, the training center was deactivated and the 7th Infantry Division (converted to a light infantry division in 1983) occupied the installation until 1993, when the division was deactivated. Fort Ord was officially closed in September 1994. Map 3 (Appendix B) provides boundaries for sites of confirmed and suspected MMRP use.
1.8 TOPOGRAPHY/GEOLOGY
1.8.1 Topography
The terrain along the west/coastal boundary of Fort Ord is beach and coastal dunes. The eastern portion of the installation is hilly with slopes in excess of 15 to 30 percent. Wildcat Ridge is the highest
1-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
point within Fort Ord at approximately 900 feet above mean sea level. The most developed part of the installation can be found in the northwest where it is much flatter with slopes of only 0 to 10 percent.
1.8.2 Geology
The geology of Fort Ord is characterized by older, consolidated rock exposed at the ground surface near the southern base boundary, and poorly consolidated deposits overlying the consolidated material near the northern base boundary. Mesozoic granite and metamorphic rocks, Miocene sedimentary rocks of the Monterey Formation and upper Miocene to lower Pliocene marine sandstone of the Santa Margarita Formation make up the consolidated base material found underneath Fort Ord. The overlying unconsolidated deposits include Plio-Pleistocene alluvial fan, lake, and fluvial deposits of the Paso Robles Formation; Pleistocene eolian and fluvial sands of the Aromas Sand; Pleistocene to Holocene valley fill deposits consisting of poorly consolidated gravel, sand, silt, and clay; Pleistocene and Holocene dune sands; Recent beach sand; and Recent alluvium (U.S. Army Engineering and Support Center, Huntsville, 1997a).
Throughout the entire site of Fort Ord are iron-cemented, magnetized nodules that have most likely originated from the Santa Margarita formations. These nodules give off a magnetic signature and are recorded as magnetic rocks.
Many minor earthquake faults exist in the region around Fort Ord. Although these faults have been inactive during the past 10,000 years, the potential exists for future activity. The active San Andreas Fault is within 25 miles of the installation. Running the entire length of California, the San Andreas can be considered a major fault and is capable of triggering devastating earthquakes. At Fort Ord, the potential for earthquake damage to occur is moderate to very high. Having the potential for liquefaction, the coastal dune zone is most susceptible to damage. Additionally, landslides could occur along the shoreline dune cliffs and along the steep slope found in the eastern part of the base.
1.9 CLIMATE
The climate in the Monterey Bay region is mild. Summers are usually cool, with fog and low clouds forming overnight, and then dissipating during the day. Fog may cause delays when conducting removal actions at Fort Ord because explosive detonations may have to be postponed until there is adequate visibility.
The mean summer temperature of the area ranges from 52 to 65 degrees (º) Fahrenheit (F). During the winter, mean temperatures range from 43º F to59º F.
Precipitation in the region averages about 17 inches annually and gradually increases near the inland mountain ranges. The heaviest rainfall occurs from November through February.
Winds are generally less than 16 miles per hour and even under extreme conditions, such as during winter storms, winds rarely exceed 30 miles per hour. Typically, winds blow onshore, although during the spring and summer, it is not unusual for an offshore flow to develop, which produces a strong easterly breeze.
1-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 2 TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This plan outlines the procedures Parsons and its subcontractors will use to perform MMRP activities such as: site preparation, geophysical mapping and MEC cleanup operations at Fort Ord, California. This plan is based on information obtained during Parsons’ operations at Fort Ord, U.S. Army guidance and Data Item Descriptions (DIDs). Work will be performed within the following regulatory framework:
1. These actions are in accordance with the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA), Section 120 and the National Contingency Plan, Sections 40CFR Part 300 and these response actions are being taken to address threat to public health or welfare or the environment.
2. DOD is the removal response authority with respect to incidents involving DOD military weapons and munitions or weapons and munitions under the jurisdiction, custody or control of DOD as identified by 40 CFR Section 300.120(c) and (d) and 175(b)(4).
3. In compliance with the above, no Federal, State or Local permits are required nor need to be obtained for the detonation of MEC on-site per 40CFR300.400(e).
4. The provisions of 29 CFR 1910.120 (OSHA Hazardous Waste and Emergency Operation) applies to this site.
2.1.1 General
Parsons will perform operations at the Fort Ord site in a systematic manner using proven operating techniques, methods and procedures. This plan describes the methods Parsons will use to accomplish these activities.
2.1.1.1 Definitions
The following definitions were used in developing this plan and are applicable to its execution:
• Accuracy: Accuracy is the degree of agreement of a measurement or the average of several measurements with an accepted reference or "true" value; it is a measure of bias in the system.
• Precision: Precision is the degree of mutual agreement among individual measurements of a given parameter under the same conditions.
• Completeness: Completeness is a measure of the amount of valid data obtained from a measurement system compared to the amount that could be expected to be obtained under normal conditions.
2-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Representativeness: Representativeness expresses the degree to which data accurately and precisely represents a characteristic of a population, parameter variations at a sampling point, a process condition or an environmental condition. Careful choice and use of appropriate methods in the field ensure that samples are representative. This is relatively easy with water or air samples, given that the components of these media are homogeneously dispersed. In contrast, soil and sediment contaminants are unlikely to be evenly distributed, hence it is important for the sampler and analyst to exercise good judgment when collecting and analyzing a sample.
• Comparability: Comparability expresses the confidence with which one data set can be compared to another.
2.1.2 Coordinate with Local Agencies
All coordination with the Government is through the CESPK. The PM coordinates with the following agencies:
• Local utility companies, vendors and suppliers to coordinate for goods and services required for supporting operations
• Local Employment Office to coordinate screening and hiring of any local labor
• When directed by CESPK, The BRAC/DENR Environmental Coordinator (coordinated with CESPK counterpart).
2.1.3 Organize Support Facilities and Test Communications Equipment
Parsons will use existing facilities provided by CESPK and the installation for its program and field offices and the storage of operating equipment and explosives. These facilities are adequate for the anticipated performance of the task orders, however may need to be expanded on subsequent task orders.
2.1.3.1 Field Office and Storage Facilities
Parsons will maintain its program and field office and equipment storage in facilities located on Fort Ord. These facilities consist of permanent structures under the control of Fort Ord and contain running water, sanitary sewers, telephone service and electrical power. Temporary structures (trailers) for field office personnel can also be utilized.
2.1.3.2 Explosive Storage
Parsons will store explosives in existing approved above-ground magazines located in the Explosive Storage Location (ESL). Bulk explosives and initiating explosives will be stored in separate magazines with high security padlocks securing each magazine. The magazine containing the bulk high explosives is additionally secured by Joint Service Intrusion Detection System (JSIDS) monitored by the Federal Police unit located on Fort Ord.
2-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.1.3.3 Communications Equipment
Parsons maintains, inspects and tests all required site communications equipment, which consists of landlines, radio net and cellular telephones. On-site personnel perform daily operational checks of communications equipment and emergency notification procedures. These inspections and tests ensure that the equipment is serviceable and provides reliable communications during operational activities. Equipment inspected includes:
• Hard-wire telephones • Microwave telephones • Internet access • Radio communication equipment • Cellular telephones
2.1.4 Hire and Assemble Work Force
Parsons will subcontract and/or hire local personnel to schedule and perform maintenance on equipment and perform routine clerical and administrative duties. The laborers perform duties on- site and work with a UXO Technician for MEC avoidance. As part of its hiring practices, Parsons requires all personnel to undergo a substance abuse test. All employees, regardless of position, must successfully pass the substance abuse screening to be or to remain employed by Parsons.
Parsons schedules the arrival of personnel in a manner that is consistent with cost management principals. Arrival is timed to ensure that upon deployment personnel immediately become productively and continuously engaged in training and operations.
2.1.4.1 Site Specific Training for Personnel
As part of the mobilization process Parsons performs site-specific training for all new personnel assigned to this project upon arrival. The purpose of this training is to ensure that all supervisors and site personnel fully understand: 1) the procedures and methods Parsons uses to perform operations at the Fort Ord site; 2) their individual duties and responsibilities and 3) any and all safety and environmental practices/procedures associated with operations. Lesson Plans will be forwarded to CESPK for review. Training topics/issues and training responsibilities are as follows:
• Supervisors receive detailed training on this PWP, associated sub-plans and their individual responsibilities.
• Site personnel receive training on the Site Specific Health and Safety Plan (SSHP) (SUXOS) and the Installation-Wide Multi-species Habitat Management Plan for Former Fort Ord (HMP) from the UXOSO and Project Biologist respectively.
• The UXO Technicians receive the above training along with quality control standards/Schonstedt/EM61/GPS training from the QCM and Project Geophysicist. The SUXOS provides in-processing, operational briefings on policies, duties and responsibilities to the UXO Technicians and, the UXO Supervisors monitor all field work to ensure the SSWP is adhered to.
2-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• All non-UXO qualified personnel will receive a MEC Recognition Course presented by the UXOSO.
• All UXO personnel will receive a MEC refresher course covering the ordnance known and suspected to be present at the site. This training is given by the UXOSO.
2.1.5 Public Awareness Activities
Parsons may be required to participate in public awareness activities such as public meetings and media events. Parsons is fully cognizant of the requirement that all public announcements and requests for information be forwarded through the COR, the BRAC/DENR MMRP PM. Parsons will not make available or publicly disclose any data generated or reviewed under this contract or any subcontract unless specifically authorized by the COR and the BRAC/DENR MMRP PM. When approached by any person or entity requesting information about the subject of the contract, Parsons will refer the requester to the COR for response.
2.2 FIELD OPERATIONS
Parsons and its subcontractors perform the following activities in the order listed unless operational necessity or the SSWP dictates otherwise:
1. Preparatory Inspection of the project site to determine the presence of environmental sensitive areas as detailed in DID OT-FTO-12, (see Appendix H), degree and type of vegetation cover, MEC and scrap contamination, the best geophysical instrument to be used and where, construction support and restoration;
2. Conduct site border survey marker installation; (Chapter 7)
3. Removing vegetation by a combination of manual and mechanical cutting or prescribed burning to gain access into the site; which may include fence removal and MEC construction support; (Chapter 2)
4. Grid Survey; (Chapter 7)
5. Conduct surface removal of MEC or analog removal as directed by the SSWP or TCRA, which will include demolition operations and Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) seeding; (Chapter 2)
6. Conduct a digital geophysical survey. This may also be performed as an analog survey; (Chapter 5)
7. Process geophysical data and create pick/dig list; (Chapter 5)
8. Geographic reacquire or GPS relocation of anomalies; (Chapter 5)
9. Conduct MEC removal and demolition; (Chapter 2)
10. QC-1- digitally check excavations and re-excavate and digitally recheck excavations (QC- 1a) if necessary;
2-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11. QC-2 – digital step down and data processing. Reacquire anomalies and re-excavate if necessary;
12. QC-3 – Analog, re-excavate if necessary;
13. Analog and digital QA and re-excavate if necessary;
14. Site Restoration; which may include fence replacement and MEC removal boundary survey (Chapter 2)
15. Preparation of an After Action Report. (Chapter 2)
An organization chart for Parsons is provided as Figure 2-1 on the following page. The following subparagraphs describe the general work practices that Parsons follows during all operations and the specific procedures and methods Parsons uses to perform the activities listed above.
2-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
USA CE S. Damle Sacramento QA Manager District
QC Brad Olson Andreas Kothleitner, QC Manager Gary W. Griffith, PM Arnold Marks Ralph Vahle, UXO Evelyn Rudek, TTL SSHO Mike Coon, UXO TBD, Geophysics
GIS/Data Administration Field Operations Sciences Subcontractors Project Controls Procurement Management and Support
USA David Brow n Craig Murray David Bonino Andrew Hands Environmental Jennifer Brow n* OE Field Project Project Controls GIS Manager OE Location and Administrator Operations Geophysicist Spec ialis t Removal
Timberline Mark Buell Bill Stohler Tina Ma Jonathan Duval Vegetation Project Control Field Ops Support SQL Server Tec hnic al Writer Removal Engineer
Antonelis, K. Lieng Pham CCS Jennifer Brow n* Holly Hegler GIS Systems Surveying and Document Control Data Entry Clerk Analyst Mapping Clerk Chris Duymich Environmental Engineer GIS Data A nalyst FA CT Ben Patague David Johnston Range Residue Logistician TBD - Open Management Shirley Tudor Mactec Biologist RI/FS Vincent Chubbs Malc om Pirnie Data Entry Clerk Small Engine RI/FS Quynh Pham Mechanic Fire Stop R43-48 Prescribed Burn Sharon Troutman First A larm Geo Database MRA -IA Security Analyst
2-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.2.1 General Site Practices
All operational activities at Fort Ord are performed under the supervision and direction of qualified UXO Technicians. Non-UXO qualified personnel are prohibited from entering exclusion zones or performing operations unless they are physically accompanied and supervised by an UXO Technician. Non-UXO teams consisting of at least two personnel, i.e. geophysical, biological survey, etc., conducting non-intrusive operations in areas that have been surface swept, do not need a UXO Escort at the discretion of the UXOSO. Throughout operations, Parsons will adhere to the following general practices:
2.2.2 Work Hours
Operations are conducted during daylight hours only. Parsons works four 10-hour days with five 8-hour days as an option. In no case will hourly personnel work more than ten hours in any one day, or more than forty hours in any one week unless specifically authorized by the COR.
2.2.3 Site Access
Parsons strictly controls access into operating areas and limits access to only those personnel necessary to accomplish the specific operations or those who have a specific purpose and authorization to be on the site. During MEC operations Parsons works with BRAC and the CESPK Safety Specialist when working outside the Impact Area to control access when public access roads cannot be closed.
2.2.4 Handling of MEC
Only qualified UXO Technicians handle MEC items. Laborers and other non-UXO qualified site personnel are emphatically instructed and carefully supervised to ensure that they do not handle any MEC item. Ordnance scrap is not handled or touched unless a UXO Technician has checked it first and declared it free of hazardous explosive components.
2.2.5 Safety Training/Briefing
Three distinct safety meetings and briefings are conducted daily: the general briefing, the tailgate safety briefing and the supervisor meeting. All visitors to the site also receive a safety briefing and orientation. Additionally, if at any time degradation of safety or a safety issue warrants review, the Field Operations Manager (FOM), UXOSO or SUXOS may hold a safety stand-down.
• Daily General Briefings: The UXOSO and SUXOS conduct the daily general briefing for all personnel at the support compound prior to beginning work. The briefing covers general hazards for the project and any new safety issues or hazards identified since the last briefing. A written record of this briefing is kept by the UXOSO with each individual in attendance signing the training record.
• Daily Tailgate Safety Briefings: The supervisor in charge of each operating team conducts a tailgate safety briefing with his team prior to commencing work. A written record of this training and the signatures of personnel attending the training are maintained. The training focuses on the specific hazards anticipated at the team’s work
2-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
site during that day’s operations and the safety measures used to eliminate or mitigate those hazards. It also refers to other teams and operations within the area whose proximity may have safety ramifications. If during the workday the team’s location changes within a site or from site-to-site, corresponding changes in ingress/egress routes and emergency evacuation routes will also be reviewed during a tailgate safety briefing. The UXOSO and UXO Quality Control Specialist (UXOQCS) randomly monitor these sessions.
• Daily Supervisors Safety Meetings: The FOM and UXOSO will hold a weekly safety briefing for all supervisors. This meeting focuses on safety and operational issues and any needed/required safety or operational refresher training. Although scheduled weekly, these meetings may be held anytime there is a significant change in site hazards or upon modification of site safety procedures.
• Visitor(s) Safety Briefings: Site visitors must receive a safety briefing prior to entering the operating area and must be escorted at all times by an UXO Technician, UXOSO, UXOQC, SUXOS or the CESPK Site Safety Representative. The Visitor’s Site Safety Briefing is documented and maintained by the UXOSO.
2.2.6 Environmental Awareness
There are numerous species of flora and fauna at Fort Ord that are endangered, threatened or protected. These species are reviewed during site-specific training, which covers recognition features and correct procedures to follow when these species are encountered. Protective measures and procedures are reviewed to ensure all personnel remain current as the remediation effort progresses and the work teams change locations and encounter these species. The primary means of minimizing impact on any of these species is avoidance. When avoidance is not possible MEC operations will be conducted giving as much consideration to non-disturbance as is consistent with safely accomplishing the objectives of the remediation project. The PM coordinates through the CESPK Safety Specialist and the BRAC/DENR MMRP PM whenever the cutting of trees or vegetation is required or intrusive work is necessary in or near pools, ponds or wetlands. Safety and operational briefs will promote environmental awareness for supervisory personnel throughout the duration of Parson’s operations.
2.2.7 Safety and Environmental Violations
Safety violations or unsafe acts will be immediately reported to the UXOSO. Failure to comply with safety rules/regulations or failure to report violations may result in immediate termination of employment. Reckless interference with sensitive species or disregard for environmental issues is likewise not tolerated and may lead to termination of employment. Any and all environmental violations/issues will be reported to the PM and the FOM and be documented by the on site Biologist. Any restoration required will be performed under the supervision of the on-site Biologist and BRAC/DENR.
2.2.8 Work Clothing and Field Sanitation
Personnel will wear work clothing appropriate for the conditions encountered on the particular site. In most cases this is Level D Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), which consists of:
2-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Coveralls are supplied by Parsons. When personnel is exposed to high concentrations of poison oak or at the discretion of the UXO Supervisor, SUXOS or the UXOSO, personnel must wear coveralls taped at the ankles. Should excessive contamination occur, coveralls may be changed during the course of the workday.
• Footwear will consist of sturdy leather laced (for ankle support) work boots with lug soles and eight inches in height for protection from stakes and snakes Brush team personnel will wear steel toed boots when using chain saws.
• Hand protection will consist of leather or canvas work gloves when appropriate. Rubber inner or outer gloves may be required when dealing with poison oak or during other activities where increased protection is required.
• Safety glasses, face shields, respirators, hearing protection, hard hats and protective chaps or aprons are available and will be worn when engaged in activities where their use is prudent or required.
Each team is outfitted with field decontamination equipment consisting of portable eyewash kits, containers of wash water, paper towels, soap, rubbing alcohol and poison oak anti-irritants; containers for contaminated clothing and trash collection and a ground cloth. Prior to beginning operations each day, these items must be in place and ready for use in the vicinity of the team’s work area as needed. Good housekeeping and decontamination measures will be practiced. Equipment cleaning/decontamination will be performed by the individual operators on a daily and/or weekly basis as required.
There will be shower facilities located at the field support office compound. Those teams engaged in operations where significant encounters with poison oak occur must shower before departing the support compound. This requirement changes from site to site and is used on an as- needed basis. Soap and towels are provided and towels used for this purpose will only be used one time before laundering.
2.2.9 Compliance with Plans and Procedures
Parsons conducts operations at the Fort Ord site in a systematic manner using proven operating methods, techniques and procedures. Operations are anticipated to be on going simultaneously at multiple sites. All of these activities are conducted under the direction, supervision and observation of qualified supervisory and safety personnel and in compliance with approved plans and established procedures. When operational parameters change, with a corresponding requirement to change procedures or routines, careful evaluation of such changes are conducted by on-site supervisory personnel in close liaison with the CESPK Safety Specialist prior to implementation. Parsons submits the recommended change to the CESPK Safety Specialist who approves/disapproves any new course of action or desired change in procedures, with justification for it. Such changes are implemented in a manner that ensures safety and uniformity of procedures and end-product quality on the part of the various teams.
2.2.10 Preparation of Work Areas
Procedures for preparation of the work areas vary from site to site. Prior to initiating work on a new site a Preparatory Inspection is conducted. The persons attending this inspection will be the
2-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
FOM, SUXOS, UXOSO, UXOQC, on-site Biologist and CESPK Safety Specialist. This inspection will be documented by the UXOQC or the Field Office Administrator. The purpose of this inspection is to determine what preparatory measures are needed.
• This Preparatory inspection is used to identify any environmental sensitive areas, degree of vegetation present, MEC/scrap levels and restoration requirements.
• Clearance of Access Routes. In some cases, dirt roads and tracks and potential lead issues into a site may require repair or fill. This is accomplished after approval from BRAC through CESPK. If additional equipment is required it is obtained through a contractor or from other organizations on the installation. It is anticipated that the requirements of EM 385-1-1 paragraph 21.I will not apply to this contract as an adequate road system is already in place and the construction of additional access and haul roads will not be required.
• Access routes and firebreaks are searched and cleared of all surface and near surface (six inches below ground surface {bgs}) MEC prior to the commencement of grid activities to ensure safe ingress/egress routes for all authorized personnel and emergency vehicles that may be needed on site.
• Requests for additional fencing, gates or sign postings at site entranceways are submitted through the CESPK Safety Specialist. Requests for closure of recreational pathways or off-road trails where public passage into or around a site might be of concern during hazardous remediation activities are also submitted through the CESPK Safety Specialist.
• The determination of Appropriate Safety Distances on MRS Project Sites will be in accordance with (IAW) HNC-ED-CS-S-98-1, DOD 6055.9-STD and EM 1110-1-4009. The UXOSO will establish the Most Probable Munition (MPM) for each site. The MPM will be determined by reviewing the ASR and other prior investigation reports. The maximum fragmentation distance for the MPM will become the minimum separation distance (MSD) for non-project personnel at the site. The MSD will be requested through the CESPK Site Safety Specialist from HNC-ED-CS-S personnel.
• Area Burning. Parsons will subcontract prescribed area burns in accordance with the Installation Burn Plan, after approval by DENR and CESPK.
• Site Preparation activities will be planned and executed before field operations can begin, i.e., survey of individual operating grids, vegetation removal, removal of asphalt roads, range residue or other material that would interfere with geophysical survey operations.
2.2.11 Field Sanitation and Wash Point
Portable field toilets will be placed at appropriate locations within the work area. These portable toilets are equipped with hand washing facilities and/or other alternative hand washing facilities and will meet the requirements of EM 385-1-1 and CFR 29 1910.120. They will be supplied and serviced by a local vendor and moved about the area as work progresses.
2-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.3 SITE OPERATIONS IN SEQUENTIAL ORDER
A flow chart of the general cleanup process is presented as Figure 2-2. The following sections discuss details related to the process unless operational necessity or the SSWP dictates otherwise:
2.3.1 Preparatory Inspection and Environmental Survey
An inspection of a new site is accomplished prior to any operations beginning as discussed above. As part of the survey an environmental survey is conducted prior to the start of any other activity. The purpose of this survey is to ascertain and document the existing environmental condition of the area, identify any previously unforeseen or unique environmental issues and ensure that the protection actions outlined in the Environmental Protection Plan are adequate. During this survey the on site Biologist documents the environmental condition by recording the location of environmental concerns on planimetric maps, taking photographs of the area and/or recording videotape of the area(s) of concern. Additionally, the areas of concern are marked with bright colored engineer tape. This survey is also used by the Project Geophysicist to determine which digital geophysical equipment can be used in that particular area (Chapter 5). The survey may also include soil sampling to identify lead hazards present at the site.
2.3.2 Placement of Border Markers
Once the above surveys are completed the Location, Survey and Mapping subcontractor puts in the site border markers. In all cases the surveyor is accompanied by a UXO Technician who ensures the route is clear of MEC. In addition, the UXO Technician checks the area, using a Schonstedt GA52Cx, prior to any intrusive activities being conducted.
2-11 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Check Excavations Excavations QC-1/Digital Re-excavate (If necessary) (If UXO Removal Check Excavations (If necesary) (If QC-1A/Digital QC-2 Reacquire Reacquire Anomalies Relocation Step Down Geographic 100-30-20-10 (If necessary) Anomalies or GPS Anomalies or QA/QC Data Processing Data Processing Data (10%) Analog May also be Geophysical Re-excavate QC-3 Analog QC-3 (If necessary) (If Survey Digital (Mag and Dig) and (Mag QA/QC Re-excavate (If necessary) (If "Seeding" (6 in.) (6 Digital QA Analog and Analog (by CESPK) (by Surface Sweep Surface UXO Blow in Place Blow Re-excavate (If necessary) Survey (LS&M*) Boundary Grid Survey Site Restoration Fence Support Replacement (If necessary) (If Figure 2-2 - The Former Fort Ord Cleanup Process Flow Diagram Construction (If necessary) (If Site Preparation Site Report Removal Vegetation After Action (If necessary) (If Fence Removal Main Flow Path Flow Main Auxiliary Flow Path Auxiliary Flow (LS&M*) *LS&M = Location Survey & Mapping Survey Location = *LS&M Border Survey Border
2-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.3.3 Vegetation Removal
Parsons removes vegetation from the work sites to enable the analog or digital sweep teams to thoroughly search the work areas. The FOM identifies the grids and areas that require vegetation removal to provide access for the analog or digital sweep teams. Subcontracted brush teams working with a UXO Escort accomplish manual brush cutting. The use of large scale motorized clearing equipment is coordinated with the CESPK Safety Specialist. In environmentally sensitive areas, the preferred method of removing the vegetation is by controlled burning.
2.3.3.1 Manual Brush Cutting
Manual Brush Cutting is necessary when a prescribed burn cannot be accomplished was incomplete or when terrain or environmental concerns make mechanical vegetation removal undesirable or impossible. Manual brush teams working under the direction of the FOM accomplish vegetation removal. Each brush crew (normally consisting of five laborers), has a UXO Specialist for MEC avoidance purposes. A magnetometer is used to aid in searching the vegetation for surface MEC prior to cutting or removing brush. The amount of brush removal required depends on the terrain and the efficiency of the burn (if utilized). Any surface MEC encountered by the brush team is marked with a red pin flag and left in place and notification to the SUXOS is made.
2.3.3.2 Equipment
The manual brush cutting team is equipped with power chippers, powered weed cutters, chainsaws and a variety of hand tools. The Brush Foreman of each brush cutting team ensures that personnel engaged in brush cutting activities wear protective clothing and accessories appropriate for the equipment being operated (i.e. chainsaw chaps).
2.3.3.3 Tree Trimming
Trees are trimmed only to the extent necessary to allow access for sweep teams. Tree trimming is performed in a manner that minimizes damage to the tree and usually does not exceed a height greater than six feet above the ground surface.
2.3.3.4 Brush Cutting
Brush is cut to a level that enables reliable MEC detection without disturbing or destroying the root structure. The preferred distance from ground level is 6 inches for both manual and mechanical brush cutting.
2.3.3.5 Mechanical Brush Cutting
Mechanical vegetation removal is accomplished when environmental concerns and terrain permit. A brush team comprised of the equipment operator and a UXO Specialist, who assist in MEC avoidance, conduct the operation under the supervision of a Brush Foreman.
2-13 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.3.3.6 Equipment
Mechanical brush removal may be accomplished using a Bobcat, with a rotary brush-clearing machine or a large-scale removal machine such as the TAZ, Hydro-Ax and Brontosaurus, or any newly developed equipment, once it has been approved for use by CESPK.
2.3.3.7 Prescribed Burns
In environmentally sensitive areas where the removal of vegetation is significantly limited, the preferred method of removing the vegetation is by prescribed burning. The subcontractor establishes the Burn Plan for prescribed burns in cooperation with BRAC/DENR and CESPK.
2.3.3.8 Disposal of Brush Cutting Debris
When significant vegetation is removed by manual cutting in habitat areas the debris may be chipped on site. This ensures that the maximum amount of native seed is returned to the local environment and aids in reestablishment of plant growth and reduces soil erosion. However if large amounts of chipped debris are likely to impede rare plant growth, it will be removed off-site. When cut vegetation contains poison oak, the feasibility of chipping the vegetation will be done on a case-by-case basis. Any significant quantities of poison oak will not be chipped. In some instances it will be necessary to remove the cut brush from the grid and placed in a location to minimize interference with operations. In this instance a Bobcat with a claw attachment will be used.
2.3.4 MEC Operations Construction Support
If directed by the SSWP or TCRA, Parsons will plan and coordinate activities for a subcontractor to remove asphalt roads, pads, structures, range residue, concertina wire, cyclone fencing or other material that would interfere with geophysical survey operations. Additionally, when necessary, a subcontractor will repair roads, fire breaks and install culverts.
2.3.5 Divide the Operating Area into Individual Grids
Using the data contained in the Geographic Information System (GIS) the GIS Manager sub- divides each work area into operating grids and the surveyor places wooden stakes at the corners of each grid displaying its unique identification number which is assigned by the CESPK master grid system. When the area is the subject of MEC removal or grid sampling operations, these divisions are made in a manner that typically yields individual grids 100' by 100’ on a side. Some grid sizes will vary due to site boundaries. Once the area has been sub-divided, the GIS Manager prepares a detailed area drawing depicting the boundaries of the work area and the proposed sub-division. This drawing is submitted to the PM, FOM and CESPK COR for review and comment. Comments are incorporated into subsequent revisions awaiting approval.
2.3.5.1 Procedures
Parsons site layout procedures provide an efficient and effective method to establish the location of each operating grid and correlate this data with information contained in the Fort Ord GIS. These procedures maximize the use of existing data to plan the site layout and to expeditiously transfer the data to individual ground locations. The procedures Parsons will use to lay out the individual operating grids include:
2-14 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Using the digital cartographic products in the GIS to subdivide the work area into logical operating grids
• Electronically transferring the corner coordinates for each grid from the GIS to RTK- GPS receivers
• Transferring the digital coordinates to their actual ground locations
This method creates a valuable link between the information contained in the GIS and the ground locations where the work will be performed. Once this link is established, it ensures that data collected during operations is efficiently and effectively integrated into the GIS and provides a historic and realistic record of the location, densities and types of MEC encountered/removed.
2.3.5.2 Site Base Map
Parsons will use Fort Ord’s current digital data to update the site base map. This data is composed of digitized drawings of the installation, which contain the terrain feature data for the installation and each of the work areas. The GIS Manager imports this data into ArcInfo GIS. The imported data provides Parsons with the capability to determine the spatial coordinates of the boundaries of each work area.
2.3.5.3 Electronically Transfer Coordinates To GPS Receivers
Once the sub-division is approved, the GIS Manager electronically transfers the spatial coordinates for each operating grid to a GPS receiver. The GIS Manager accomplishes this action by:
• Exporting the spatial coordinates for each corner location to an ASCII file
• Importing the ASCII file into the GPS software package
• Uploading the map coordinates into the GPS Receiver as waypoints. This is accomplished using the transfer utility program contained in the GPS software package.
2.3.5.4 Transfer Coordinates to Ground Locations
The final procedure for establishing the operating grids is transferring the digitally produced spatial coordinates to their actual ground locations. To accomplish this action the surveyors’ team navigates to each point using GPS receivers and the uploaded waypoints. At each corner of the operating grids the team installs painted surveyor lath approximately 4 feet in length, which identifies the grid.
2.3.6 Surface Searches
The purpose of a surface sweep of a grid is twofold: to locate, mark, and record the location of the surface MEC contamination contained in each grid and to consolidate and remove the scrap metal contamination within each grid. Non-UXO personnel under the direct supervision of UXO Technicians may perform surface sweeps. The typical span of supervision for one UXO Technician is three to five sweepers, which ensures positive control and safety.
2-15 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.3.6.1 Sweep Team Structure
The sweep team may consist of either all UXO Technicians or a mix of UXO and non-UXO personnel. The following is the structure and composition of a typical Sweep Team:
• One UXO Supervisor (Tech III) who directs and supervises all team activities, confirms the identification of all MEC encountered, and maintains the sweep team journal.
• One UXO Specialist (Tech II) who assists the UXO Supervisor, identifies all MEC encountered, and records the location of the items located
• Four additional UXO Specialists, UXO Assistants or UXO Sweepers who visually search the area for MEC. These personnel perform their duties under the direction and supervision of the UXO Supervisor.
2.3.6.2 Visual Surface Sweep Team Procedures
All surface sweep operations are performed under the direct supervision of a qualified UXO Supervisor. The UXO Supervisor assembles the sweepers into a sweep line and directs their movement across the survey grid.
• Sweepers are spaced approximately 5 feet apart and, at the direction of the UXO Supervisor, move through the grid on line and abreast
• Whenever an item is encountered, the individual calls out "hold the line," and holds up their hand. The line stops while the UXO Specialist inspects the object to determine if it is MEC or scrap and marks the item with the appropriate colored pin flag. The line will not move again until directed by the UXO Supervisor
• As the team moves forward using the grid stakes as the sweep lane boundary, the person on the opposite end of the line marks the limit of the sweep lane with pin flags. These flags become the guide for the return sweep and define the limits of the previously cleared lane. This procedure is continued until the grid is completely swept
• The UXO Supervisor follows behind the sweep line inspecting and verifying the identification of the flagged items and recording data on the type, nomenclature and location of the MEC
• Upon completion of the grid sweep the sweep team, under the direct supervision of the UXO Supervisor, recovers and stockpiles metal scrap at a designated location. Items marked with red pin flags are left in place for the MEC removal team
2.3.6.3 Near Surface Sweep Team Procedures
Clearance of surface debris for digital geophysical survey operations may require a 6 inch subsurface sweep with a magnetometer to remove all metallic objects. The team composition would be identical to normal MEC sweep operations. The procedures to be utilized by the team are identical to those listed in section 2.3.8.2.
2-16 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.3.7 Geophysical Sampling Procedures
Establishing Data Quality Objectives (DQO) will be undertaken in each Task Order for all geophysical sampling operations. During the Technical Project Planning (TPP) process, personnel representing each data user will define the data needed to satisfy the project objectives. Sampling operations consist of those activities identified in the TPP process to “document data needs” required to thoroughly investigate each site to locate and/or sample both surface and sub-surface MEC. The OESAP (Chapter 10 of the PWP) provides additional details of geophysical sampling procedures. Selected sites will be sampled, in coordination with CESPK and BRAC, using either or both analog and digital geophysical survey instruments incorporating procedures outlined in the OESAP.
2.3.8 MEC Investigation Operations
Search operations consist of those activities required to thoroughly investigate each operating grid to locate and/or sample both surface and sub-surface MEC.
UXO Teams are normally composed of a UXO Supervisor and up to five UXO Specialists (maximum six). UXO teams perform all search operations and operate under the direct supervision of a SUXOS. A UXOSO closely monitors the safety of the UXO Teams. The following subparagraphs describe the equipment and procedures the individual UXO Teams use to search the individual grids and to excavate sub-surface anomalies.
2.3.8.1 Equipment
The equipment requirements for this activity include:
• Various digital geophysical instruments, e.g., EM61, EM61 HH, G858 or other appropriate instruments tested and evaluated by the Ordnance Detection and Discrimination Study (ODDS);
• Schonstedt (Model GA-52/CX) magnetometers or other appropriate instruments tested and evaluated by ODDS;
• Pre-marked baselines that are used to subdivide the grid into individual search lanes;
• Rope reels containing nylon rope/twine (used to mark individual search lanes);
• Assorted colored pin flags that are used to mark MEC items and anomalies;
• Miscellaneous common hand tools (i.e. shovels, trowels etc.);
• Forms and logbooks to record activities and MEC encountered;
• Laptop computer;
• X-Ray; and
• Personal Data Assistants (PDAs).
2-17 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Other equipment as authorized by Parsons may be utilized to search for MEC or to excavate the subsurface anomalies during MEC removal or sampling. Should additional or new equipment and procedures not addressed in this PWP be added to the Fort Ord MMRP. An SOP pertaining to the use of the new equipment will be developed and submitted for approval prior to use.
2.3.8.2 Analog Magnetometer Searches
Schonstedt magnetometer sweeps, i.e., mag and dig, is particularly effective in areas where vegetation and terrain limit the use of larger digital systems. Mag and dig approaches should also be used when there is insufficient difference between MEC at the site and other metallic fragments and debris such that digital discrimination is ineffective.
The UXO Supervisor directs personnel to establish individual search lanes approximately 3 feet wide and to begin searching each lane using a Schonstedt Model GA-52/CX magnetometer. UXO Technicians start at one end of each lane and move forward toward the opposing base line. During the forward movement, the technician moves the magnetometer back and forth from one side of the lane to the other. Both forward movement and the swing of the magnetometer is performed at a pace, which ensures the entire lane is searched and that the instrument is able to appropriately respond to sub-surface anomalies. Whenever a subsurface anomaly or metallic surface object is encountered, the technician halts and investigates the anomaly. Only in MRS sites where the team is performing less than a four-foot removal and with approval of the CESPK OE Safety Specialist, will the anomaly be flagged and left in place if below the removal depth. Throughout this operation the UXO Supervisor closely monitors individual’s performance to ensure these procedures are being performed with due diligence and attention to detail.
2.3.8.3 Excavation of Digitally Acquired Anomalies
The intrusive investigation teams will be provided with the PDAs and appropriate digital forms to fill in relevant data related to their intrusive investigation and excavate all anomalies. Annotations for MEC and MD that can be positively identified will include site name, instrument used, etc., and will list easting, northing (in local NAD 1983 State Plane Coordinates, California Zone IV, Feet coordinates), grid number, instrument response and units, source type of response, description, weight, depth, and have a space for subsequent action taken. If distance from flag, orientation or inclination is required, it will be specified in the SSWP.
If the anomaly yields a non-MEC item or fragments or pieces of MEC items that are not intact and cannot be positively identified, the approximate weight and depth will be recorded, but the type of MEC associated with, the distance and direction away from the flag and the inclination and declination will not be recorded. In the event the anomaly is not at the point marked on the ground, the search team will search a three-foot radius around the flag. All anomalies that cannot be reacquired (false-positives) will be reported. The flag will be left in place and removed by the Geophysical QC Requisition Team.
2.3.8.4 Near Surface Anomalies
Near surface anomalies are those sub-surface anomalies, which can be excavated using hand tools and are within six inches of the surface. Throughout the excavation the UXO Technician uses a magnetometer to check and verify the location of the anomaly. When the overburden has been
2-18 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
removed to within six inches of the anomaly the UXO Technician removes the remaining earth using a trowel or other small digging implement.
2.3.8.5 Backhoe Excavations
Some anomalies are more deeply buried and require excavation using heavy equipment (i.e. backhoe). For these excavations, the UXO Supervisor coordinates equipment requirements with the SUXOS and FOM. Prior to the arrival of the heavy equipment, the UXO Supervisor ensures that a cleared entrance and egress path is available for the heavy equipment. Once on site the heavy equipment is used to excavate the earth overburden to a depth not closer than 12 inches from the suspect anomaly. The distance to the anomaly will be checked during the excavation with a hand-held magnetometer. A UXO Technician using hand tools removes the final one-foot of overburden. Refer to Appendix G, Backhoe Operations SOP.
2.3.8.6 Excavations in Suspected Hantavirus Areas
Prior to excavating any area suspected of containing Hantavirus (i.e. rodent nest areas) the UXO Supervisor has these areas properly treated with a solution of bleach and water. During application of this solution and operations performance personnel strictly adhere to the procedures listed in the SSHP.
2.3.8.7 Excavations Using the Miniature Open Front Barricade (MOFB)
In areas where the MSD for intrusive work cannot be met due to close proximity of the anomaly to the site boundary the miniature open-front barricade (MOFB) will be used. The use of the MOFB applies to those excavation operations required to decide if the MEC is to be detonated in place or moved to another location. Refer to Appendix G, MOFB SOP. Note: The largest munition the MOFB was designed for is the 81mm M374 mortar.
2.3.8.8 Analysis of Ordnance Items with X-Ray
When appropriate, the UXOSO or SUXOS will use an x-ray technique to analyze “light skinned” munitions, i.e., rifle grenades and anti-tank rockets, to determine if the item is ordnance related scrap or MEC. This reduces the number of demolition operations required which in turn reduces the exposure of site personnel, the public and the environment to demolition operations.
An x-ray log will be maintained on all x-rayed items. This log will include nomenclature of item, date, time, location and pulses. See Appendix G for log. The UXOSO will maintain the log.
2.4 DEMOLITION OPERATIONS
Parsons treats materials and debris generated and/or recovered during operations on-site at Fort Ord using established and approved procedures.
2.4.1 Demolition of MEC
All MEC containing explosives or hazardous material determined to be too hazardous to move are treated in-place by detonation utilizing standard electric firing procedures as outlined in Technical Manual (TM) 60A-1-1-31, Demolition Procedures. If these methods of treatment are determined to be impractical, the CESPK Safety Specialist will request local military Explosive
2-19 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Ordnance Disposal (EOD) support. The following paragraphs describe the procedures Parsons uses to detonate MEC at the Fort Ord site.
2.4.1.1 Frequency
Parsons conducts treatment of MEC as required and with the concurrence of the on-site CESPK Safety Specialist. Demolition operations begin in the work site when all non-essential and non-UXO personnel are out of the fragmentation zone of the ordnance being detonated. MEC that is safe to move may be consolidated to reduce the number of demolition operations.
2.4.1.2 Supervision and Control
Parsons’ organization for the Fort Ord site includes the UXOSO and the subcontractors SUXOS, who are on site at all-times during demolition operations. All roads/trails that provide access to demolition sites will have roadblocks established during operations. The operation is performed under the direction and supervision of the SUXOS who is charged with the responsibility of ensuring that the procedures contained in this work plan and referenced documents are followed. The UXOSO monitors compliance with the safety measures contained in the work plan and associated documents and in the event of non-compliance, is vested with the authority to stop or suspend operations.
2.4.1.3 Safe Separation Distances
Prior to the start of demolition activities the SUXOS and UXOSO verify that the area around the demolition site is clear of all non-UXO personnel and verify with the field office administrative office that all required notifications have been made. Default Separation Distances will be based on the most recent version of DOD 6055.9. Depending on the type of munition(s) being destroyed and with approval of the CESPK Safety Specialist, the fragmentation distance may be increased or decreased based on data obtained from HND-ED-CS-S personnel. Personnel remaining on-site are limited to those personnel needed to safely and efficiently prepare the item(s) for destruction.
2.4.1.4 Engineering Controls
Parsons will comply with the installations desires to reduce noise, blast and possible fragmentation effects from demolition operations. Engineering controls or other measures to suppress the blast and/or fragments effects will be used to reduce the required separation distance. Engineering controls will be determined on a site-specific, munition-specific basis. In the event a MEC item is in proximity to the installation boundary/residential area, a decision on the type of engineering control will be made using the guidance and checklist in EM 1110-1-4009, Section 11- 10 and with the input from the FOM, SUXOS, UXOSO and CESPK Safety Specialist.
2.4.1.5 Equipment
Standard electric and non-electric demolition equipment will be used. As improvements to ignition sources are introduced to the market they will be tested, with prior approval from the CESPK Safety Specialist, for possible use on this project.
2-20 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.4.1.6 Evacuation and Site Control
Prior to initiation of demolition operations all non-essential personnel are evacuated from the demolition site. Prior to priming the demolition charges all avenues of ingress are physically blocked by guard personnel. Radio communications are maintained between the demolition team, road guards, supervisory personnel and the field office administrative office. Avenues of ingress are not opened without the express permission of the UXOSO. A constant state of vigilance is maintained by all personnel to detect any intrusion into the MSD zone or over-flights of aircraft. While preparing MEC for detonation the SUXOS and UXOSO ensure that the number of personnel on-site is kept to the minimum required to safely accomplish the mission. Authority to initiate demolition operations rests solely with the FOM. The FOM can authorize the SUXOS to conduct routine demolition operations. This individual is responsible for ensuring that all personnel have been evacuated from the area, that all personnel have been accounted for, that all pertinent parties have been notified of an impending demolition shot and that the area is secure prior to authorizing the detonation of explosive charges. Prior to priming demolition shots the Demolition Team’s UXO Supervisor directs all non-essential personnel except the UXOSO and CESPK Safety Specialist to leave the area.
2.4.1.7 Explosive Accountability, Storage & Transportation
Parsons uses government-furnished explosives and explosive storage facilities. Storage of explosives is in strict compliance with DOD 6055.9-STD, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards. Detailed procedures for the issue, turn-in and transportation of explosives are contained in Chapter 3 of this work plan. In addition to these procedures, Parsons strictly enforces the following:
• Issue of explosives is limited to those quantities needed to perform a specific operation.
• Strict accountability of explosives is maintained at all times.
• Only UXO Technicians are issued and transport explosive materials.
• All vehicles transporting ammunition and explosives are properly inspected prior to loading explosives onto the vehicle.
• Vehicle engine is not running when loading or unloading explosives.
• The vehicle is chocked.
• Beds of vehicles have either a plastic bed liner, dunnage or sandbags to protect the explosives from contact with the metal bed and fittings.
• Vehicles transporting explosives have a first aid kit, two- (2) ea. 10 BC fire extinguishers and communications capability.
• Compatibility requirements when transporting explosives and MEC are observed.
• Vehicle operators have valid operator permits.
2-21 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Maximum speed for vehicles transporting explosives is the posted speed limit or less if the situation so dictates.
• Personnel do not ride in the cargo compartment with explosives or MEC.
2.4.1.8 Demolition Procedures
Parsons uses the procedures contained in TM 60A-1-1-31 to treat MEC. MEC will be treated by detonation in place whenever necessary. Items that can be, will be moved for consolidated shots. Engineering controls such as soil cover, sand bags, blast attenuation devices and on-site ordnance demolition container (ODC) will be utilized as necessary. More detailed procedures for preparation of demolition firing trains, firing of demolition charges, and post operation procedures are contained in the Demolition Operations SOP.
When multiple UXO items are encountered that preclude individual detonation (i.e. the items are so close together that one shot would interfere with the others), when feasible, they will be explosively linked using detonating cord.
NOTE In the event that a MEC item is located, which cannot be treated in place due to its location, is too hazardous to move to another location or cannot be identified, the UXOSO will notify the CESPK Safety Specialist. The CESPK Safety Specialist will review the situation and make a recommendation or notify U.S. Army EOD and request their assistance.
2.4.1.9 Post Demolition Inspection
Upon completion of demolition operations two UXO Technicians selected by the UXO Supervisor will vsually inspect each shot location. One of these personnel performs a visual inspection of the demolition site(s) while the second person stands by at a safe distance prepared to render assistance in the event of an emergency. Upon completion of this inspection and providing that there are no residual hazards the SUXOS and UXOSO can then authorize the resumption of site operations.
2.5 QUALITY CONTROL SEQUENCE
Parsons and its subcontractors perform the QC sequence (including QC-1, QC Analog, QC Seeded Items and QA Analog) as referenced in Chapter 11 unless operational necessity, the SSWP or Time Critical Removal (TCRA) dictates otherwise.
2.6 TREATMENT OF SMALL ARMS AMMUNITION
All small arms ammunition recovered during the project is stored in an explosive storage magazine within the ESL and allowed to accumulate until sufficient quantity is obtained to ensure transportation off site is economically feasible. At that time Parsons will subcontract the appropriate agency to burn the small arms to ensure all explosives are removed from the cartridge casings, at that point the expended brass casings will be recycled.
2-22 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2.7 REMOVAL AND TREATMENT OF SCRAP METAL
Within or adjacent to each operating grid the UXO Supervisor establishes temporary ordnance scrap and other scrap collection points. During operations ordnance scrap and other scrap that are free of explosives (i.e. fragments, parachutes, etc) are placed at these collection points. Upon completion of operations the materials in these temporary collection points are loaded onto a vehicle for transfer to the central collection/segregation point located in the ammunition supply point. For other IDW scrap see Chapter 13.
2.7.1 Inspection and Segregation
A UXO Specialist and the UXO Supervisor inspect each questionable piece of scrap prior to its being placed in the grid collection pile. The scrap is then inspected a second time by the UXO Technician loading the scrap collection vehicle; and then a third time by the UXO Technician.
The scrap is segregated according to metal type and ordnance type and placed in “Lock Boxes.” These boxes remain locked at all times and the keys are controlled by the UXOQCS. Once a container, (ranging in size from 4 x 6 foot bins to 40-yard roll-off boxes) is full, it is ready for shipment. Venting of questionable scrap will be performed to expose filler and verify ordnance type.
2.7.2 Chain of Custody
Once a container is full a seal is placed on the container and the seal number recorded on a seal register. The seal register contains the date, box/container number, material type, date of shipment and shipping document number and a “load Number”. FACT International then picks-up the load and the driver signs the chain of custody form and delivers the load to the subcontractors melting/ shredding facility. The unprocessed scrap is not sold to brokers or other scrap dealers, thereby ensuring control from cradle to grave.
2.8 RESTORATION
Upon completion of all site operations the site will be returned as close as possible to its original configuration. It may be necessary to perform erosion control measures as needed depending on the recommendations in the initial environmental assessment. The level of site restoration will be dependent upon site-specific reuse and HMP guidelines. Specific guidelines will be included in the Site Specific Work Plan for each individual site.
2.9 QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTIONS
Parsons utilizes procedures for controlling and measuring quality of all work performed during site activities. All QC activities are performed and documented in accordance with applicable professional and technical standards, Parson’s requirements and specific project goals and objectives. All site activities are monitored and documented for precision, accuracy and completeness. Definitive procedures are listed in Chapter 11.
2.9.1 Records
Parsons QC personnel maintain a daily journal of activities and formal written reports of inspections and re-inspections. The UXOQCS reports to the Quality Control Manager (QCM) on
2-23 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
quality matters. As the key QC person on-site the UXOQCS has responsibility for the overall quality of work performed on site; responsibilities include, but are not limited to:
• Developing QC procedures to implement the QC Plan.
• Verifying implementation of corrective actions.
• Initiating actions to identify and prevent the occurrence of nonconformance relating to the services and QCP.
• Discontinuing nonconforming work if necessary.
• Coordinating with District’s QA representative for daily activities.
• Coordinating with the QCM to ensure that QC procedures are being followed and are appropriate in demonstrating data validity sufficient to meet DQOs.
• Recommending actions to be taken in the event of QC failures, to the PM and QCM.
• Reporting non-compliance with QC criteria to the PM and QCM.
• Conducting inspections of UXO portions of GIS database.
• Preparing and submitting a daily QC report, see report at end of chapter. (This report is due to CESPK the following workday.)
• Conducting daily QC audits/inspections.
Additionally, the UXOQCS has the authority to suspend project activities when a condition adverse to quality is identified. The PM and FOM will be notified when such action is required.
2.10 AFTER ACTION REPORT
Parsons submits an after action report upon the completion of each job site. These reports contain a compilation of all data pertaining to a specific work area. Due to the large number of job sites encompassed by this contract, it is imperative that a separate after action report be submitted after completion of each site. The requirements for the after action reports are listed in Appendix H, DID OT-FTO-30 and the applicable Task Order.
2.10.1 Composition
Each after action report includes a description of the site location, authorization for work performed and information regarding the work accomplished on the site including summary of MEC encountered and a summary of QC results. These after action reports contain, at a minimum, the following information:
• All original survey and mapping data.
• Detailed accounting of all disposed MEC and MEC related materials.
2-24 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• A description by grid or larger geographic area that either.
− All potential MEC items located by magnetometer were excavated.
− Whether some potential MEC items located by magnetometer were, upon direction by the CESPK Safety Specialist, not removed, in this instance the grid number, coordinates and circumstances will be documented.
• Daily journals of all activities associated with the job site.
• A recapitulation of exposure data. (This shall include total number of man-hours worked on-site.)
• All scrap turn-in documentation.
• All Quality Control documentation.
• Color photographs depicting major action items and MEC discoveries.
• A financial breakdown of all labor hours expended and associated costs.
In addition, the final version of each after action report will be submitted, uncompressed, on a CD ROM in a portable document format (PDF) along with a linked table of contents; tables; photographs; graphs and figures included and suitable for viewing on the Internet.
2-25 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 3 EXPLOSIVE MANAGEMENT PLAN
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this plan is to provide the minimum procedures and safety and health requirements applicable to the acquisition, storage, accountability and transportation of demolition material and MEC.
3.2 REGULATORY REFERENCES
Procedures and information contained in this document were obtained from the below-listed references:
• CEHNC Safety Concepts and Basic Considerations for UXO • ATF P 5400.7, ATF-Explosives Law and Regulations • USACE EM 385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manual • DOD 4145.26-M, Contractors’ Safety Manual for Ammunition and Explosives • DOD 6055.9-STD, DOD Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards • DA PAM 385-64, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards • AR 385-64, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards • AR 385-10, The Army Safety Program • AR 385-16, System Safety Engineering and Management • EM 1110-4009, Ordnance and Explosives Response 3.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
3.3.1 Field Operations Manager
The FOM is responsible for determining the specific site requirements for licensing, permitting and placarding. Additionally, he is responsible for acquiring the initial quantity and type of demolition material, approve all subsequent requests for demolition material, and conduct periodic inspections of the magazine storage areas and their contents.
3.3.2 UXOQCS
The UXOQCS is responsible for the inspection and auditing of the entire operation and reporting any findings to the PM and FOM. These inspections will include the acquisition procedure, documentation, storage, and transport.
3-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
3.3.3 UXOSO
The UXOSO is responsible for ensuring the handling, storage, transport and use of demolition material is in accordance with the approved work plan, SOPs, and federal and state regulations.
3.3.4 Vehicle Driver
The vehicle driver will at a minimum be a UXO Technician II qualified and have a valid driver’s license. This is to ensure that the driver is both experienced with and knowledgeable of demolition material. For additional transportation requirements see section 3.9.
3.4 ACQUISITION
3.4.1 Requisitions
Requisitions will be made by the FOM described above in a timely manner. The initial acquisition must be in place prior to beginning intrusive activities and all subsequent shipments must be on site in order to ensure there is no break in operations. Prior to ordering demolition materials, the Parsons OE Sector Purchase/Receipt Authorization List (Figure 3-1) must be completed and forwarded to the explosive distributor(s), along with a copy of the Parsons and UXO subcontractor’s Bureau of Alcohol and Tobacco (BATF) License.
3.5 RECEIPT
Only those individuals named on the authorization list may sign for explosives from the shipper. In order to ensure that the quantity shipped is the same as the quantity listed on the shipping documents, the FOM will inventory the shipment prior to signing for it. If the FOM is unavailable a designee from the OE Sector Purchase/Receipt Authorization list will sign for the shipment.
3.5.1 Receipt Discrepancies
Upon receipt, the type, quantity and lot number of each item will be checked against the manifest and entered on the Magazine Data Card (Figure 3-2). In the event there is a discrepancy between the amount shipped and the amount received, the FOM will immediately contact the explosive supplier and inform them of the discrepancy. It then is the responsibility of the supplier to rectify the situation and inform Parsons of the results. The supplier must then correct their documents and forward them to the site. In any event, only the amount received will be entered on the Magazine Data Card, which will be kept in the magazine and annotated for each transaction.
3.6 STORAGE
CESPK currently has explosive magazines in the Fort Ord Explosive Storage Location (ESL) (Map 4, Appendix B). Parsons will use the existing magazines for explosive storage and comply with local storage and compatibility criteria and procedures when using government facilities. If Parsons is required to establish additional explosive storage and no magazines are available in the Fort Ord ESL, Parsons will:
• Use portable approved BATF Type 2 structures.
3-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Locate, install and maintain the magazines to comply with the magazine criteria and quantity distance requirements established in DOD 6055.9-STD, DOD Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards.
• Install sufficient magazines to comply with the explosive compatibility requirements, (i.e., bulk explosives, initiating explosives).
• Establish security, such as fencing and/or guards, to prevent unauthorized access and/or theft, as required.
• Submit amendment to Explosives Safety Submission IAW DOD Explosives Safety Board Memorandum dated 27 January 1998, Subject: Guidance for Clearance Plans.
3-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 3-1: OE Sector Explosives Purchase/Receipt/Transportation Authorization List
Address and County: (Home Office)
Address and County: (Home Office)
Federal License #: Expiration Date:
The following individuals are agents, employees, or representatives of the undersigned, and are authorized to order or acquire explosive materials on behalf of Parsons Name and Home Address Driver’s License No. Soc. Sec. Number Place of Birth
The undersigned certifies the foregoing information to be true and correct to the best of his knowledge and belief, and that he will communicate any additions or deletions to the foregoing list to Parsons
Parsons OE Sector Manager Date
3-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 3-2: OE Sector Magazine Data Card
3-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
3.7 SECURITY
Physical security of the Fort Ord ESL is provided by the installation.
3.7.1 Exterior Construction
The exterior and doors are to be of not less than 1/4-inch steel and lined with at least two inches of hardwood. Magazines with top openings will have lids with water-resistant seals, or which overlap the sides by at least one inch when in a closed position.
3.7.2 Hinges and Hasps
Hinges and hasps will be attached to doors by welding, riveting, or bolting (nuts on inside of door). Hinges and hasps will be installed so they cannot be removed when the doors are closed and locked.
3.7.3 Locks
Each door will be equipped with appropriate padlocks fastened in separate hasps and staples. Padlocks must have at least five tumblers or five blades, and a case-hardened shackle of at least 3/8-inch diameter. Padlocks will be protected with not less than 1/4-inch steel hoods constructed so as to prevent sawing or lever action on the locks, hasps, and staples.
3.7.4 Signage/Placarding
ATF and DOD require that all magazines be appropriately posted for content hazard class, fire fighting hazard, and an emergency notification list. Magazines will be placarded in accordance with DOD 4145.26M and DA PAM 385-64. In most instances, this will require a Fire Division Class 1 for the recovered MEC magazines and a Fire Division Class 3 for the demolition material, excluding detonators, which are Fire Division Class 4. If in doubt and unable to obtain guidance from a reputable source, label the contents with the next highest hazard. In the event there are two fire division or hazard class items in the same magazine, the higher hazard division/class placard should be used.
3.7.5 Lightning Protection
Appropriate lightning protection will be installed in accordance with EM 1110-1-4009, Chapter 11.
3.7.6 Emergency Notification List
An emergency notification list containing the names, telephone numbers and local addresses of the individuals to be notified in the event of an emergency will be posted on the outside and inside of the magazine door. These individuals should be the same individuals authorized to sign for explosives.
3-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
3.7.7 Compatibility
Explosive compatibility will be maintained in accordance with DA PAM 385-64. Table 3-3 lists the various storage compatibility groups and Table 3-4 is the storage compatibility chart. In certain instances, it may be necessary to store incompatible items in the same magazine. If this should occur, a waiver will be requested, and the incompatible items will be physically separated by a barricade, such as sandbags, within the magazine. This situation should be an interim occurrence and avoided if at all possible.
3.7.8 Key Control
Magazines will remain locked except when receipts and issues are being made. Keys will be kept by the FOM and the UXOCQS.
3.7.9 Inspection
At the start of each workday, a physical check will be made of the magazine storage area to ensure security has not been compromised.
3.8 INVENTORY
Upon receipt and verification of explosive demolition material, the Magazine Data Card is filled out and kept in the magazine on top of the listed item. A duplicate copy is maintained by the UXOQCS.
3-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 3-1: General Placarding Requirements
Category of material (Hazard class or division number Placard Design and additional description, as appropriate) Placard name Section Ref. (§) 1.1 Explosives 1.1 172.523 1.2 Explosives 1.2 172.524 1.3 Explosives 1.3 172.525 2.3 Poison Gas 172.532 4.3 Dangerous When Wet 172.528 6.1 (PG I, inhalation hazard only) Poison 172.542 7 (Radioactive Yellow III label only) Radioactive 172.544
Table 3-2: General Placarding Requirements
Category of material (Hazard class or division number Placard Design and additional description, as appropriate) Placard name Section Ref. (§) 1.4 Explosives 1.4 172.523 1.5 Explosives 1.5 172.524 1.6 Explosives 1.6 172.525 2.1 Flammable Gas 172.532 2.2 Non-Flammable Gas 172.528 3 Flammable 172.542 Combustible liquid Combustible 172.544 4.1 Flammable Solid 172.546 4.2 Spontaneously 172.547 Combustible 5.1 Oxidizer 172.550 5.2 (Other than organic peroxide, Type B, liquid or Organic peroxide 172.552 solid, temperature controlled). 6.1 (PG I or II, other than Zone A or B inhalation Poison 172.554 hazard). 6.1 (PG III) Keep Away from Food 172.553 6.2 (None) 8 Corrosive 172.558 9 Class 9 172.560 ORM-D (None)
3-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 3-3
3-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 3-3 (Continued)
3-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 3-3 (Continued)
3-11 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 3-3 (Continued)
3-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 3-3 (Continued)
3-13 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 3-4: Storage Compatibility Chart
Groups A B C D E F G H J K L N S
A X Z
B Z X Z Z Z Z Z X X
C Z X X X Z Z X X
D Z X X X Z Z X X
E Z X X X Z Z X X
F Z Z Z Z X Z Z X
G Z Z Z Z Z X Z X
H X X
J X X
K Z
L
N X X X X Z Z X X
S X X X X X X X X X X
Notes:
1. The marking “X” at the intersection of the above chart indicates that these groups may be combined in storage. Otherwise, mixing is either prohibited or restricted per Note 2 below. 2. The marking “Z” at an intersection of the above chart indicates that, when warranted by operational considerations or magazine non-availability, and when safety is not sacrificed, these groups may be combined in storage. 3. The marking “U” on the above chart indicates that leaking toxic chemical munitions of one agent type, i.e., GB, with or without explosive components, may be stored together in one magazine specifically designated for storage of leakers of that agent type. 4. Equal numbers of separately packaged components of complete rounds of any single type of ammunition may be stored together. When so stored, compatibility is that of the assembled rounds; i.e., WP Filler in Group H, HE Filler in Groups D, E, or F, as appropriate. 5. Group K required not only separate storage from other groups, but also requires that munitions having different toxic chemical agent fillers be stored separately from each other. 6. Ammunition designated “PRACTICE: by NSN and nomenclature may be stored with the fully loaded ammunition it stimulates.
3-14 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
3.8.1 Usage Inventory
Following each occurrence of a receipt or issue of explosive material, the FOM will conduct a joint inventory in conjunction with the demo team leader, drawing out or returning the explosives. Only those items issued/returned will be inventoried. The two sets of Magazine Data Cards will be appropriately annotated.
3.8.2 Monthly Inventory
Monthly, the FOM, UXOQCS and the CESPK Safety Specialist will conduct an inventory and record results on the two sets of Magazine Data Cards.
3.8.3 Discrepancies
In the event there is a discrepancy during any inventory, the item will be recounted a minimum of two additional times. If a discrepancy still exists, the PM, CESPK COR, and BATF will be notified. A written report will be prepared and submitted within 24 hours of the discovery.
3.8.4 Procedures for Return to Storage of Explosives Not Expended
Explosives that were issued for use but were not needed will be returned daily to the magazines at the completion of disposal operations. The Demolition Team Leader will return the unused explosives to the storage magazine and revise the Magazine Data Card and Explosives Use Record (Figure 3-3).
3.8.5 Disposal of Remaining Explosives
Parsons is required by BATF to account for all explosives purchased and used. At project completion, all unused explosives will either be disposed of by detonation, or custody and accountability transferred to an incoming contractor or the government. If required, an economic analysis for different alternatives will be made.
3.9 TRANSPORTATION
Transportation of explosives or MEC will comply with all Federal, state, and local regulations. Permits are not required under CERCLA for on-site or on Federal installation transportation of explosives or MEC. Off-site transportation of explosives or MEC will not be done until coordination and approval has been received from the PM, CESPK COR and DENR. Off-site shipment of explosives or MEC will be made using commercial carriers approved to transport ammunition and explosives. For off-site shipment:
• Explosives will be packaged in accordance with 49 CFR parts 172 and 173, if possible; if not possible the explosives will be transported in such a manner as to not move or touch other explosive items.
• Drivers will be provided with Special Instructions for Vehicle Drivers (Figure 3-4).
• Vehicles will be inspected using Motor Vehicle Inspection (Figure 3-5) and, if applicable, be properly placarded
3-15 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Compatibility requirements will be observed.
• The load shall be well braced and, except when in closed vans, covered with a fire resistant tarpaulin.
3.9.1 General Highway Transport
In most instances, the following data is sufficient to meet the requirements for explosive transport.
3.9.1.1 Commercial Motor Vehicle Definition and Requirements (CFR49 Part 383.5)
Commercial motor vehicle (CMV) means a motor vehicle, or a combination of motor vehicles, used in commerce to transport passengers or property if the motor vehicle and including one or more of the following:
• Has a gross combination weight rating of 11,794 or more kilograms (26,001 pounds or more), inclusive with a towed unit with a gross vehicle weight rating of more than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds).
• Has a gross vehicle weight rating of 11,794 or more kilograms (26,001 pounds or more).
• Is designed to transport 16 or more passengers including the driver.
• Is of any size and is used in the transportation of materials found to be hazardous for the purpose of the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, and which requires the motor vehicle to be placarded under the Hazardous Materials Regulations (49 CFR part 172, subpart E.)
3-16 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 3-3: Explosive Usage Form
Team Number: Date: Project Name:
Work Areas & Grid Numbers: Team Leader:
Explosives Issued Signature of Team Leader: Item Quantity Lot Number Checkers Initials
Explosives Expended Signature of Team Leader Item Quantity Lot Number Checkers Initials
Explosives Returned Signature of SUXOS: Item Quantity Lot Number Checkers Initials
The signatures in each section of this document indicate that the items listed in that section were in fact issued, expended, or returned to storage and that the quantities listed were verified through a physical count.
3-17 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 3-4: Emergency Response Information
3-18 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 3-4: Emergency Response Information (Continued)
3-19 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 3-5: Motor Vehicle Inspection
This form must be filled out for any vehicle carrying explosives, prior to loading. This form is for use on site only, if traveling on public highways use DD Form 626
DRIVERS NAME LICENSE NUMBER COMPANY TYPE OF VEHICLE VEHICLE NUMBER INSPECTION DATE/TIME INSPECTOR
PART INSPECTED SAT. UNSAT. COMMENT HORN STEERING SYSTEM WIPERS MIRRORS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (10 ABC, 2 EACH) REFLECTORS EMERGENCY FLASHERS LIGHTS ELECTRIC WIRING FUEL SYSTEM EXHAUST SYSTEM BRAKE SYSTEM SUSPENSION CARGO SPACE TIRES, WHEELS, RIMS TAILGATE TARPAULIN
INSPECTION RESULTS (INSPECTOR INITIAL) ACCEPTED: REJECTED:
REMARKS
DRIVERS SIGNATURE/DATE INSPECTORS SIGNATURE/DATE
3-20 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
3.9.2 Federal Installations/On-Site
Transportation of explosives and MEC on-site and on Federal installations will comply with the following: • Vehicles will be inspected per occurrence and will be properly placarded.
• Explosives will be transported in closed vehicles whenever possible. When using an open vehicle, explosives will be covered with a flame resistant tarpaulin (except when loading/unloading).
• Vehicle engine will not be running. Wheel chocks and brakes set when loading/unloading explosives.
• Beds of vehicles will have either dunnage, plastic bed liner or sandbags to protect the explosives from contact with the metal bed and fittings.
• Vehicles transporting explosives will have a first aid kit, two 10 ABC rated fire extinguishers, and communications capabilities.
• Initiating explosives, such as detonators, will remain separated from other high explosives during loading, unloading, and while on vehicles.
• Compatibility requirements will be observed.
• Operators transporting explosives will have a valid drivers’ license.
• Drivers will comply with posted speed limits, but will not exceed a safe and reasonable speed for conditions. Vehicles transporting explosives off-road will not exceed 25 mph.
3.9.3 Off-Site Transportation of Explosives over Public Highway
3.9.3.1 DOT Certificate of Registration
As long as only 1.4 explosives or less than 55 net explosive weight (NEW) of 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 explosives are transported by personnel, DOT certificates of registration for individuals involved in the transportation of demolition materials are not required.
3.9.3.2 CDL Requirements
As long as site personnel are not using vehicles that weigh more than 26,000 pounds and are not transporting any materials that must be placarded under the DOT Hazardous Materials Regulations (i.e., they are only transporting 1.4 explosives), then the vehicle being used need not be classified as a CMV and the operator of the vehicle need not have a Commercial Driver’s License (CDL). This is the typical situation for site personnel since they usually transport relatively small quantities of 1.4 demolition materials. However, if a CDL is required, the FOM will ensure that the requisite license/permits are obtained.
3-21 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
3.9.3.3 Mixed Packaging Requirements
Explosives of compatibility Group S may be packed with explosives of all other explosive compatibility groups except A and L. To determine the compatibility of the materials typically transported by site personnel, refer to the Material Safety Data Sheets. A currently listing of all Material Safety Data Sheets is maintained by the UXOSO.
3.9.4 General Placarding Requirements
Fort Ord is designated a CERCLA site, however should placarding ever be required it will be done according to 49 CFR 172.504. The placard requirements listed below will apply to explosives transportation if applicable:
(a) Except as otherwise provided, each bulk packaging, freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle or rail car containing any quantity of a hazardous material must be placarded on each side and each end with the type of placards specified in Tables 3-1 and 3-2, in accordance with other requirements and exceptions.”
(c) Exceptions for less than 454 kg (1,001 pounds). Except for bulk packaging and hazardous materials subject to § 172.505, when hazardous materials covered by Table 3-2 of this section are transported by highway or rail, placards are not required on:
(1) A transport vehicle or freight container which contains less than 454 kg (1,001 lbs.) aggregate gross weight of hazardous materials covered by Table 3-2 of paragraph (e) of this section; or
(2) A rail car loaded with transport vehicles or freight containers, none of which is required to be placarded.”
The exceptions provided in paragraph (c) provided above do not prohibit the display of placards in the manner prescribed in this subpart, if not otherwise prohibited (see § 172.502), on transport vehicles for freight containers that are not required to be placarded.
3.9.5 Documentation
Any time explosives are being transported completed copies of documents described below, will be in the vehicle.
Instructions for Motor Vehicle owners (Emergency Response Information) Figure 3-4
Only those items that are being transported will be entered in the form with the applicable qty/units and weight columns completed. It is imperative that the NEW limitations of 55 lbs. not be exceeded. All required data will be entered on the front and the Guide 50 block should be checked on the back of the form.
Explosives Purchase/Receipt/Transport Authorization List - Figure 3-1
The form will be completed ensuring the pertinent data for all those transporting explosives is included on the form. As with the other required forms, this one will be part of the transport
3-22 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
paperwork. Only the route shown will be used unless there is an emergency or the route is blocked.
Any deviation from the planned route will be reported to and coordinated with the FOM.
Motor Vehicle Inspection Checklist - Figure 3-4
The form is to be completed prior to placing any explosives in the vehicle and will accompany the shipment.
BATF Permit/License - A copy of the current BATF license will accompany the vehicle and be readily available.
3-23 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 4 EXPLOSIVE SITING PLAN
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This plan outlines the procedures Parsons will use to perform MEC identification and treatment operations at Fort Ord, California and describes the safety criteria to be employed.
4.2 EXPLOSIVES STORAGE MAGAZINES
Parsons will use government-supplied explosives storage facilities at Fort Ord. If the storage magazines are not available or Parsons is required to install additional magazines, commercial Type 2 magazines will be leased.
4.2.1 Types(s) of Magazines
The ESL has standard earth covered and above ground magazines for storage of explosives. If commercial magazines are required, Parsons will use a portable apparatus approved by the BATF Type 2, outdoor, box magazines. Parsons will:
• Locate, install, and maintain the magazines to comply with the magazine criteria and quantity distance requirements established in DOD 6055.9-STD, Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards.
• Install three magazines in order to comply with explosive compatibility requirements (i.e., bulk explosives, initiating explosives, and MEC waiting demilitarization).
• Establish security, such as fencing and/or guards, to prevent unauthorized access and/or theft.
• Establish magazines that are bullet-resistant, fire-resistant, weather-resistant, theft- resistant, and ventilated. These will be supported to prevent direct contact with the ground. The ground around them will slope away for drainage or other adequate drainage will be provided.
• Attach hinges and hasps to doors by welding, riveting, or bolting (nuts on inside of door). Hinges and hasps will be installed so they cannot be removed when the doors are closed and locked. Doors will also be equipped with appropriate padlocks.
4.2.2 NEW and Hazard Division The typical contents of the ESL, including the NEW and Hazard Division of stored explosives are presented in Table 4-1 below.
4-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 4-1: NEW and Hazard Division of Stored Explosives
Distance (in feet) From Hazard Net Exp. Mag. Type Contents Amount Div. Wt. (Lbs) Inhabited Public Traffic Bldgs.* Rt.* High Explosive Demolition 1.1 1,536 ea. 1,920 Charge, M112 Demolition 1.1 6,843 ft. 3,422 Charge, M186
Detonating Cord 1.1 43,715 ft. 350 Perforator 1.1 234 ea. 29 Total 5,721 1,250 750 NEW OE Storage OE Items 1.1 NA 50 1,250 750 Initiating Explosives Blasting Cap, 1.1 400 ea. 1.2 Elect. Blasting Cap, 1.1 195 ea. 10 Non Elect. Detonator, Non 1.1 2 ea. N/A Elect. Blasting Time 1.4 20,450 ft. 55.2 Fuse Time Fuse 1.4 1,203 ea. 0.1 Igniter Shotgun Primer, 1.4 92 ea. 0.5 #209 Total 67 1,250 750 NEW * From DoD 6055.9-STD, Table 9-1
4.2.3 Quantity Distance Criteria for Siting
The quantity distance criteria for siting of building and public traffic routes relative to the ESL is included in Table 4-1 and illustrated on Map 4 located in Appendix B. DOD 6055.9-STD will be used to establish any additional magazines. Quantity distance maps will be provided in site- specific work plans for particular MRS sites.
4-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
4.3 MEC AREAS
MEC areas will change as locations for investigation change. The work plan will be updated and designate new areas prior to beginning any intrusive operations.
4.3.1 Minimum Separation Distances The MSD for the public during intrusive operations will be the default distances if the type of MEC is unknown; the maximum fragmentation distance for the MPM, as calculated by CEHNC’s Engineering Directorate, Structural Branch; or, when conditions and MEC hazards permit, the MSD may be reduced to fit the situation; but in no case will the distance for that density be less than 1/600 ft2, K50 overpressure, or 200 feet, whichever is greater. These standards are as listed in DOD 6055.9-STD dated 5 July 2000.
If the MSD for unintentional detonations cannot be maintained as an exclusion zone, either engineering controls will be used to reduce the distance required or an area-specific approval will be obtained to use a smaller distance based on the 1/600 ft2 fragmentation distance. In the event that the MSD cannot be maintained even after engineering controls have been implemented the UXOSO/FOM will notify the CESPK Safety Specialist immediately.
4.3.2 Demolition Areas (Intentional Detonations)
MEC will be treated in the areas where the item(s) are encountered. A safe separation distance for all personnel will be established. If the MEC is unknown the distances will be a minimum of 1,250 feet or the maximum fragment range provided in Table C5.T1 of DOD 6055.9-STD based on the item diameters. If the MEC is known the distance will be the maximum fragmentation distance for the MPM, as calculated by CEHNC’s Engineering Directorate, Structural Branch, the K328 overpressure distance, or 200 whichever is greater.
4.4 FOOT PRINT AREAS
Foot print areas for intrusive and demolition operations will be established and the work plan updated on a task order by task order basis.
4.4.1 Engineering Controls
In areas where an acceptable fragmentation distance cannot be achieved, items safe to move may be moved to another area as long as the movement does not require transportation on public roads. If movement to another area is not possible, other methods of mitigation, such as berms, tamping, or sandbag barricades (in accordance with HNC-ED-CS-S-98-7) will be employed to reduce the fragmentation hazard. If these methods of disposal are determined to be impractical, Parsons will notify the on-site CESPK Safety Specialist.
4.4.2 Blow-in Place
Prior to initiation of demolition operations all non-essential personnel are evacuated from the exclusion zone. Prior to priming the demolition charges all avenues of ingress will be physically blocked by guard personnel. Radio communications are maintained between all involved parties at all times. Avenues of ingress are not to be opened without the express permission of the FOM. A constant state of vigilance will be maintained by all personnel to detect any intrusion into the
4-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
fragmentation zone or over flights of aircraft. Upon completion of disposal operations, the Disposal Team’s UXO Technician III and the UXOSO will visually inspect each disposal shot. The Technician III will perform a visual inspection of the disposal site(s). The UXOSO will standby at a safe distance and be prepared to render assistance in the event of an emergency. Upon completion of this inspection and providing that there are no residual hazards, the SUXOS will authorize the resumption of site operations.
4.4.3 Collection Points Items that are unsafe to move will be disposed of in the location where they are encountered. Items containing residues and items requiring demilitarization may be stored in the MEC explosive magazine and added to future-planned demolition shots.
4.4.4 Consolidated Shots Items that are safe to move (unfuzed or unfired) may be consolidated to one location within that day’s survey area to reduce the number of demolition shots and fragmentation contamination. MEC that is safe to move may be consolidated to reduce the number of shots. All movement of MEC will be coordinated with and approved by the on-site CESPK Safety Specialist. Consolidated shots will be in accordance with the CEHNC report “Procedures for demolition of Multiple Rounds (Consolidated Shots) on Ordnance and Explosives (OE) Sites.” A copy of the report will be available on-site for reference.
4.4.5 Confirmatory Methods
In order to reduce the number of shots one of the following methods may be used:
• X-Ray – thin-skinned items will be x-rayed in accordance with the x-ray SOP to determine if they are live or inert.
• Shaped Charge – small conical charges will be used to determine if the item is completely inert.
4-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 5 GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION PLAN
The following subsections detail the Geophysical Investigation Plan (GIP) for MEC identification and treatment operations at Fort Ord. The plan has been developed in accordance with CESPK Data Item Description OT-FTO-05.
5.1 OBJECTIVES
The objective of the geophysical investigation is to accurately locate and record the locations of geophysical anomalies that potentially represent MEC in the subsurface. The geophysical investigation will be conducted in accordance with this document, the findings of the Parsons/USA Ordnance Detection and Discrimination Study (ODDS) (USA Environmental, 2000), SSWP, and if performed, results of site-specific prove-outs (SSPOs).
5.2 SITE DESCRIPTION
The following subsections describe general site description characteristics applicable to the geophysical operations at Fort Ord. A more detailed description of individual sites will be included in SSWPs prepared prior to work at each site. Topics not addressed below that will be included in each SSWP will include:
• Specific Area to Be Investigated;
• Past, Current and Future Use of Specific Sites;
• Anticipated UXO Type, Composition and Quantity; and
• Actual Depth of Ordnance Distribution at Fort Ord.
5.2.1 Topography
The predominant topography of Fort Ord reflects morphology typical of the dune sand deposits that underlie the western and northern portions of the base. In these areas, the ground surface slopes gently west and northwest, draining toward Monterey Bay. Elevations at Fort Ord range from approximately 900 feet above mean sea level (MSL) near Impossible Ridge on the east side of the base, to sea level at the beach. The topography in the southeastern third of the base is notably different from the rest of the base. This area has relatively well-defined, eastward-flowing drainage channels within narrow, moderately-to-steeply sloping canyons. In general, all types of grade can be expected including relatively flat areas, shallow grades, moderate slopes and steep slopes.
5.2.2 Vegetation
Central maritime chaparral is the most extensive natural community of vegetation at Fort Ord, occupying approximately 12,500 acres in the south-central portion of the base. Oak woodlands are
5-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
also widespread and occupy the next largest area, about 5,000 acres. Grasslands, primarily in the southeastern and northern portions of the base, occupy approximately 4,500 acres.
5.2.3 Geologic Conditions
Fort Ord lies within the coast-ranges geomorphic province, and generally reflects the transitional condition characterized by the coast-ranges; older, consolidated rock is exposed at the ground surface near the southern base boundary and becomes buried under a northward-thickening sequence of poorly consolidated deposits to the north. Fort Ord and the adjacent areas are underlain by one or more of the following units:
• Mesozoic granitic and metamorphic rocks
• Miocene marine sedimentary rocks of the Monterey Formation
• Upper Miocene to lower Pliocene marine sandstone of the Santa Margarita Formation (and possibly the Pancho Rico and/or Purisima Formations)
Locally, these units are overlain and obscured by geologically younger sediments, including:
• Plio-Pleistocene alluvial fan, lake, and fluvial deposits of the Paso Robles Formation
• Pleistocene eolian and fluvial sands of the Aromas Sand
• Pleistocene to Holocene valley fill deposits consisting of poorly consolidated gravel, sand, silt, and clay
• Pleistocene and Holocene dune sands
• Recent beach sand
• Recent alluvium
The most significant effects of the geologic conditions at Fort Ord are associated with the Santa Margarita Formation. This formation includes units containing significant amounts of iron matrix mineralization that manifest as magnetic concretions. These magnetic concretions are spherical, range from 1 to 3 cm in diameter, and are present throughout Fort Ord. The effect of the Santa Margarita Formation on the geophysical sensors is based on the local condition of the concretion-bearing units. At Fort Ord, depending on the specific site, the unit can be exposed to the surface, be present beneath the surface, or be eroded away.
While poorly documented throughout the facility, the condition of the Santa Margarita Formation affects the geophysical mapping process in three ways:
1. When exposed to the surface, magnetic concretions cause anomalies in the geophysical data. It is anticipated that EM methods are less significantly affected as compared to magnetic methods.
5-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
2. When buried, the effects of concretions are anticipated to range from minor to severe, depending on the depth of burial (soil overburden thickness) and the concentration of items. 3. When the Santa Margarita formation is eroded away the effects of the concretions can be severe. As the concretions are resistant to erosion, the erosion of the formation can leave large accumulations of these items in the remaining soil that can result in large anomalies in the data.
5.2.4 Soil Conditions
At Fort Ord, the soil is sandy and prone to movement under the influences of water and wind, potentially causing MEC to either migrate off site or to be buried deeper than would normally be expected for the MEC type. Post-range development also may have occurred in certain areas, potentially resulting in cuts and/or fills which would also alter the depth at which MEC is present.
5.2.5 Groundwater Conditions
Fort Ord straddles two distinct groundwater basins, the Salinas and Seaside basins. Fort Ord includes the southwestern edge of the Salinas basin and the eastern portion of the smaller Seaside basin. The Salinas basin underlies the northern and southeastern portions of the base, and the Seaside basin underlies the southern and southwestern areas.
The Salinas groundwater basin is relatively large and extends well beyond the boundaries of Fort Ord. At Fort Ord, the Salinas basin is composed of relatively flat-lying to gently dipping poorly consolidated sediments. Although relatively simple structurally, the sediments are stratigraphically complex, reflecting a variety of depositional environments. Aquifers within the Salinas basin at Fort Ord, from top to bottom, include the unconfined A-aquifer, the confined Upper 180-foot aquifer, the confined and unconfined Lower 180-foot aquifer, and the confined 400-foot and 900-foot aquifers. These aquifer names reflect local historical water levels and are not directly correlated to present water levels at Fort Ord.
Groundwater extractions by the City of Marina, Fort Ord; and by irrigation wells in the Salinas Valley, have historically induced seawater intrusion into the Lower 180-foot and the 400- foot aquifers. Seawater intrusion continues to affect these aquifers. Intrusion into the Upper 180- foot aquifer appears to be limited to the vicinity of the beach at Fort Ord. The extraction (by the City of Marina) of drinking water from the lower 180 and 400-foot aquifers has been terminated. Drinking water for the Marina area is now extracted from the 900-foot and 1,500-foot aquifers.
5.2.6 Geophysical Conditions
The geophysical conditions at Fort Ord are affected by factors described above such as geology, vegetation and topography as well as the distribution of MEC and MEC related scrap across the site. Parsons’ experience at the site indicates that background geophysical signals/gradients vary depending on specific site conditions. In general, background noise during electromagnetic surveys has been in the range of 1-3 millivolts. Background magnetic gradients have been in the range of 1-3 nanoTeslas.
5-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
5.2.7 Site Utilities
Surface and subsurface utilities related to prior military operations are present across the Fort Ord site. Utilities anticipated at various sites primarily include underground and overhead communication and power cables and wires, but may also include other infrastructure such as sewer and drainage pipes. The presence and possible impact of known utilities at each site and mitigation procedures will be described in the SSWPs.
5.2.8 Man-Made Features Potentially Affecting Geophysical Investigations
Man-made features at the Fort Ord site include but are not limited to buildings, fences, roads, range targets and utilities. The presence and possible impact of man-made features will be assessed and mitigation procedures developed for each site in the SSWPs. The primary mitigation procedure will be to remove the features from the survey area. In cases where this is not an option, an alternative plan will be developed.
5.2.9 Site-Specific Dynamic Events Affecting Geophysical Investigations
Dynamic events such as rain, lightning and solar flares may affect geophysical data collection. Procedures for geophysical survey operations when these events occur are as follows:
5.2.9.1 Rain
The effect of rain on geophysical operations is primarily dependent on the instrument/technology being utilized and the physical site conditions (terrain and vegetation).
Instrument/Technology - Most of the instruments commercially available are relatively water resistant. Additional measures will be taken by the survey teams (such as covering connections with plastic sheeting) to reduce the possibility of moisture impacting the instrument’s electronics. When possible, survey teams will operate the instruments under very light rain conditions (drizzling). If the rain persists and the survey team leader determines that there is a potential for an impact to the data quality or that moisture could be getting into the instrument, field operations will cease and the Project Geophysicist will be notified. Operations will continue once the rain has ceased or has reduced to a drizzle.
Site Conditions – At sites where footing for the operators becomes difficult because of wet terrain or vegetation, operations will cease until the area is deemed safe by the SSHO. The determination to stop will be made by the field team leader or the SSHO and the Project Geophysicist will be notified.
5.2.9.2 Lightning
Because all geophysical instruments can serve as conduits for lighting, any observed lightning in the area will be considered a safety hazard and survey activities will be stopped until all lightning activity has ceased. Site personnel and equipment will be taken to a safe area. The determination of the presence of lighting can be made by any site personnel who will then immediately contact the SSHO. The SSHO will make the determination as to when geophysical operations are stopped and when they can resume.
5-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
5.2.9.3 Solar Flares
Solar flares are sun-generated atmospheric phenomena, typically occurring in the afternoon, which may temporarily generate sufficient high magnitude magnetic noise so as to make magnetometers, often gradiometers, and occasionally electromagnetic sensors unusable for the duration of the event. Solar flares are typically readily observable by the instrument operators (throughout the area) as rapidly fluctuating signal readings with no apparent cultural or survey source. The Project Geophysicist will be alert to solar flares and temporarily cease data collection until static testing shows a cessation of the solar activity. The Project Geophysicist will log the time intervals when solar flare activity is observed to help determine whether any data have been affected.
5.2.10 Overall Site Accessibility and Impediments
Site accessibility across Fort Ord varies from easy to very difficult. Site accessibility will be assessed individually for each area and discussed in the SSWPs. Conditions likely to affect accessibility include the proximity to roads, terrain, vegetation and sensitive environmental habitats. Procedures for obtaining access to sites will also be presented in the SSWPs.
5.2.11 Potential Worker Hazards
The primary hazards associated with geophysical operations at the site include slips, trips and falls, UXO, vegetation (poison oak) and wildlife (Western Rattlesnakes, Mountain Lions, Bobcats). Site personnel will follow all aspects of the SSHP. The SSHP is presented as Chapter 6. Potential hazards and proposed safety measures particular to each site will be discussed in the SSWPs.
5.3 GEODETIC SURVEYING
Geodetic surveying of the site will be performed by a Parsons subcontractor prior to Parsons’ initiation of geophysical mapping operations. The sites will be surveyed with grids usually 100 foot by 100 foot, depending on the goals of the survey and type of instrument being used. The corners of the grids will be placed on or near even NAD 83 California State Plane Zone IV coordinates. Each grid will be identified by its southwestern corner stake. Additional mapping and surveying information is provided in Chapter 7 of this Work Plan.
5.4 BRUSH CLEARING
Brush clearing will be performed by a subcontractor to Parsons. The method of brush clearing will vary from manual clearance using chainsaws, brush cutters, and other handheld tools to heavy machinery or controlled burns. Protocols and methods for brush clearing are referenced in Appendix G Vegetation Removal SOP. These protocols and methods will take into account the following:
• Goals of the geophysical survey;
• Vegetation;
• Terrain;
5-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Instrument(s) being used for the survey; and
• Threatened species present on the site (wildlife and plants).
5.5 GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION PERFORMANCE GOALS
5.5.1 MEC Detection
The performance goal for Fort Ord geophysical investigations will be to detect all items in the subsurface that can be detected given the particular instrument and the site-specific conditions (terrain, vegetation, cultural). There will be no “data gaps” between survey lines unless previously mutually agreed upon or resulting from unmovable obstacles. Section 5.9 addresses the maximum allowable distance between sequential survey lines.
5.5.2 Performance Goal Modification
If Parsons believes that the specified performance goals cannot be met for a specific site on Fort Ord, alternative goals will be proposed in the SSWP for that site for the Contracting Officer’s consideration.
5.5.3 Horizontal Accuracy
The accuracy goal for locating geophysical anomalies within the survey grids is ± 0.5 feet in the along track direction (i.e. in the direction that the data were collected) and ± 1.0 feet in the across track (x, y) direction (i.e. in the between-lane direction).
5.5.4 False Positives
“False Positives” result when an anomaly is detected at a given location, declared as MEC or otherwise posted to a “dig sheet,” and no basis for the anomaly is found upon excavation. False positives can be a result of low threshold selection of anomalies (i.e. extremely conservative anomaly picking), spikes in the data not successfully removed during processing, instrument jolts resulting from terrain, and inhomogeneities in the sub-surface. False positives are unavoidable and do not affect the data quality in terms of removing MEC items from the subsurface. The performance goal with respect to false positives is to minimize their occurrences while maintaining the same MEC identification rates. The project geophysicists will use professional judgment to minimize the possibility that potentially dangerous MEC items are left in the subsurface. In this regard, he or she will tend to err on the conservative side by selecting anomalies having amplitudes close to the range of background “noise,” but which have the potential to be associated with MEC.
5.5.5 False Negatives
A false negative is defined for this project as a location where a buried metallic item is found which was within the detection capability of the geophysical survey instrument but whose location was not selected for intrusive investigation. False negatives can be a result of instrument failure, operator error or data processing error. The performance goal with respect to false negatives is to have zero occurrences over the course of the project.
False negatives are often difficult to identify. Typically, a false negative will be found during the reacquisition phase, where a reacquisition team notices an anomalous response from their
5-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
equipment at a location that was not previously identified. Other means of finding false negatives include returning to the site and re-surveying the area (such as during a QA check), or by excavating the area and exposing the soil for visual inspection.
5.6 GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION METHODS
For each particular site, Parsons will determine the appropriate instrument configurations and survey techniques for the geophysical mapping, including the reacquisition of geophysical anomalies, based on:
• Results from prior geophysical investigations by Parsons at Fort Ord and other project locations;
• Results from the Parsons/USA Ordnance Detection and Discrimination Study (ODDS); and
• Site-specific prove-outs.
5.6.1 Equipment
Table 5-1, created as part of the process for selecting instruments for testing during the ODDS project (USA Environmental, 2000), shows commercially available and industry accepted geophysical technologies and instruments. Instruments that were tested during the ODDS project are shown italicized and underlined. Only those instruments that have been tested will be implemented at the site. New technologies or instruments will be tested (on approval by the government) at the ODDS site as they become available. Instruments to be used for site surveys must have well documented technologies, have been demonstrated on the ODDS site, have peer reviewed results and technology documentation and have been determined to be as good or equal to existing technologies/instruments through comparison of the results obtained in the ODDS plots. This determination will be made in conjunction with CESPK.
Parsons intends to utilize the best available technologies particular to each site to perform the geophysical investigations. In most cases, the results of the ODDS project will be used to determine the most applicable instruments and technologies for specific sites. The instruments may also be tested at site-specific geophysical prove-outs to validate the ODDS results. Instrument selection for specific sites will be performed by the Parsons Project Geophysicist and CESPK Geophysicist and selection criteria described in the SSWPs.
The descriptions of several of the geophysical instruments already tested at the ODDS site, the Geometrics G-858, the Geophex GEM-3, and the Schonstedt 52cx, and two anticipated to be used the EM61 (1 meter x 0.5 meter) and the Foerster Minex 2FD, are included below.
5.6.1.1 G-858 Gradiometer
The Geometrics® G-858 cesium vapor magnetometer uses cesium vapor magnetometer sensors (self-oscillating split-beam Cesium vapor [non-radioactive Cs133] with automatic hemisphere switching). The operating range of the instrument is between 17,000 nanoTesla (nT) and 100,000 nT. The sensitivity of the instrument is 0.01 nT at one reading per second and 0.05 nT at 10 readings per second (the sample rate to be used at the site). The device will be operated as a
5-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
gradiometer with two sensors collecting magnetic field intensity data separated by a vertical distance of 24 inches. The difference between the two sensor-readings divided by the distance between the sensors in feet is recorded as the magnetic gradient (per foot) at the measurement location. A G-856 proton-precession magnetometer will be used in combination with the G-858 to record diurnal variations of the magnetic field for post processing corrections and will log data at five second intervals.
5.6.1.2 GEM-3
The GEM-3 sensor is a monostatic broadband, electromagnetic induction (EMI) sensor that is designed for detecting and characterizing unexploded ordnance. The handheld or cart-mounted GEM-3 sensor can transmit and record multiple frequencies (stepped or simultaneous) over a bandwidth of 300 Hz to 24 kHz. The GEM-3 employs co-axial coils in a transmitter-bucking configuration. This means that the bucking coil is tied to the transmit coil, creating a magnetic null at the coil center wherein the receiver coil is placed. The result is a much smaller area of spatial sensitivity, which is ideal for the high spatial resolution required for small or compact objects, such as MEC and landmines.
The GEM-3 transmits a continuous, wideband, digital, electromagnetic (EM) waveform. The resulting field induces a secondary current in the earth as well as in any buried metallic objects. The set of two transmitter coils, with precisely computed dimensions and placement, creates a zone of magnetic cavity (i.e., an area with a vanishing primary magnetic flux) at the center of the two coils. A third receiving coil is placed within this magnetic cavity so that it senses only the weak, secondary field returned from the earth and buried targets. All coils are molded into a single, light, circular disk in a fixed geometry, rendering a very portable, monostatic sensor head. The removable electronics package controls system operations and stores the digital data.
5.6.1.3 Schonstedt Gradiometers
Schonstedt GA-52/CX gradiometers are flux-gate magnetic gradiometers, which detect materials with ferrous iron content. The GA-52CX uses an audible tone to indicate the intensity of the magnetic signal. The Schonstedts do not digitally record geophysical or global positioning data and are thus called “analog” geophysical instruments.
Schonstedt magnetometers will be used to perform “mag and flag” type surveys in areas that cannot be surveyed using the digital techniques. They will also be used to assist in anomaly reacquisition and analog quality control surveys.
5.6.1.4 EM61 (1 meter x 0.5 meter)
The EM61 generates a pulsed primary magnetic field that induces eddy currents in the subsurface. When the signal is shut off, the eddy currents decay and induce a secondary magnetic field that is monitored by one or more receiving coils. The measurement is collected at a relatively long time after the start of the decay so that the current induced in the ground has fully dissipated and only the current in the metal is still producing a secondary magnetic field. The information recorded is the time-integrated voltage induced in the receiving coil(s) by the secondary field. The time integrated voltage is recorded on a portable data logger connected to the instrument.
5-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
The EM61 system uses a single transmitter coil and two concentric offset receiver coils and makes a single measurement at one time gate. When mounted on a wheel assembly for standard deployment, the transmitter coil and one receiver coil are located approximately 1.5 feet above the ground, and the second receiver coil is located approximately 2.8 feet above the ground. The coil dimensions are 3.28 feet (one meter) by 1.64 feet (1/2 meter). A single integrated voltage response is recorded from both coils simultaneously.
The EM61 has the capability of detecting both buried ferrous and non-ferrous metals while being relatively insensitive to nearby cultural interferences such as fences, buildings and power lines. The instrument can be pulled around as a trailer with an odometer mounted on the axle to trigger the data logger, or it can be carried by a single operator with a shoulder harness.
5.6.1.5 Foerster Minex 2FD
The Minex 2FD is a frequency domain electromagnetic analog instrument used for “mag and flag” or “mag and dig” type surveys. The detector utilizes two different operating frequencies simultaneously and is microprocessor controlled in operation for ground exclusion balance, sensitivity adjustment, detection, and false alarm signals. The instrument will be tested at the ODDS site prior to use for clearing/reacquisition at the site. 5.6.1.6 White 6000 XL Pro
The White 6000 XL Pro is an analog, frequency domain electromagnetic instrument used for clearing excavation locations. It has automatic ground cancellation, ground tracking and variable signal balance features. The 6000 XL Pro with a 9.5 inch Blue Max 950 Loop transmitter was tested at the ODDS seeded site and was successful in locating buried items to a depth of 12 inches, but not deeper. The instrument can therefore be used by the UXO Technicians as a detection tool in conjunction with the Schonstedt magnetometers already in use in order to detect near surface, non-ferrous metal items.
5.6.2 Test Plot (Site-Specific Geophysical Prove-Out)
Because the ODDS was intended to be a prove-out for the Fort Ord site, site-specific geophysical prove-outs will not generally be performed. If required because of the proposed use of technologies/instruments that were not tested at ODDS, a prove-out will be performed for a particular site. The prove-out will be used to demonstrate and document the capabilities of the proposed sensors, navigation equipment, and data analysis, data management and associated equipment and personnel to operate as an integrated system capable of meeting project performance goals. A site-specific geophysical prove-out work plan, including the test plot design, will be prepared and after review and approval by CESPK, shall be implemented.
5.6.3 Geophysical Navigation Methods
A variety of positioning systems are available for use with the acquisition of geophysical data. The types of location equipment available include:
• Global Positioning System (GPS)
• Ultrasonic Positioning Systems
5-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Laser Positioning Systems
• Robotic Total Station
5-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 5-1 COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE AND INDUSTRY ACCEPTED GEOPHYSICAL DETECTION TECHNOLOGIES1
As of January 2000 Technology Effectiveness Implementability Cost Representative Notes Instruments
Flux-Gate Magnetometers Medium: High: Less than Schonstedt 52-CX The analog output is not usually average in Schonstedt 72-CX co-registered with navigational Flux-gate magnetometers have been used Flux-gate magnetometers are light and typical terrain. data. as the primary detector in some highly compact. They can be used in any ranked systems. traversable terrain. Instruments are widely available from a variety of sources.
Cesium Vapor (CV) High: Medium: Average in Geometrics G-858 Magnetometers typical terrain. Geometrics G-822 Digital signal should be co- CV Magnetometers has been the detector CV Magnetometers are relatively light and Much below registered with navigational data used in several highly ranked geophysical compact and can be easily used in open average when for best results. systems. Detects ferrous objects only. areas. In areas of difficult terrain or towed arrays Scintrex Smart vegetation it is difficult to maintain a can be used. Mag correct navigational fix. CV magnetometers are widely available from a variety of sources.
Time-Domain (TD) High: Medium: Average in Digital signal should be co- Electromagnetic Metal typical terrain. Geonics EM 61 registered with navigational data Detectors TD electromagnetics have been the These instruments typically utilize a Below average Geonics EM 61-hh for best results. detector used in several highly ranked transceiver coil 1-meter square but small when towed Geometrics systems. Detects both ferrous and non- versions are also available. It is easy to use arrays can be GTEM ferrous metallic objects. the instrument in open areas but difficult to used. MetalMapper use it in areas of difficult vegetation or terrain. The most commonly used instrument is widely available.
5-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Frequency-Domain (FD) Medium: High: Higher than Schiebel The analog output is not usually Electromagnetic Metal average cost in co-registered with navigational Detectors FD electromagnetics have NOT been the Mine/coin detectors are light and compact. typical terrain. ANPSS- 12 data. primary detector in any highly ranked They can be used in any traversable terrain. Instruments are systems. However, other experience Instruments are widely available from a slow and can White All Metals shows that they are very good at detecting variety of sources. detect very small items. small items. They are not good detectors Detector for deeply buried, single items. Detects both ferrous and non-ferrous metallic Fisher 1266X objects. Garrett
Multifrequency Medium: Medium: Average in GEM 2 Digital signal should be co- electromagnetic metal typical terrain. registered with navigational data detectors The GEM 2/3 was a primary detector in These instruments are relatively light and GEM 3 for best results. two highly ranked systems. However, compact and can be easily used in open they were never the highest ranked areas. In areas of difficult terrain or systems. Detects both ferrous and non- vegetation it is difficult to maintain a ferrous metallic objects. correct navigational fix. Only a limited number of instruments are available.
Ground Penetrating Radar Low: Low: Much higher GSSI SIR2, SIR3, The data output is usually viewed than average. SIR8, SIR10 in transects, not maps. Although a number of systems utilized These instruments are large, bulky, and Systems are ground penetrating radar as a detector, slow. They are difficult to use in any but slow and Software & GPR was never successful as a stand- the easiest terrain. Instruments are widely expensive. Sensors alone system. Detects both metallic and available from a variety of sources. non-metallic objects.
1This table is based on Table 7.1, Ordnance and Explosives Response, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (Headquarters) Engineer Manual 1110-1-4009, HQUSACE, 2000.
Italicized instruments were tested during the 1999-2000 ODDS project (USA Environmental, 2000).
5-13 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
5.6.3.1 Global Positioning System
The GPS consists of 24 DOD satellites that travel approximately 11,000 miles above the earth’s surface and complete full orbits twice a day. The satellites broadcast radio wavelengths containing data that is collected by GPS receivers. A computer and the proper software allow GPS receivers to determine extremely accurate positions on earth.
Two different GPS systems may be utilized during the subject site investigations, the Trimble GPS Total Station 4700 and the Trimble ProXRS (or comparable) systems. These GPS units are small and lightweight with an integrated GPS receiver and radio modem. A Trimble 4000 base station receiver situated at a known location will be used to communicate via radio signals with the rover receivers set to the same frequency, some attached to the geophysical instruments. The accuracy of the GPS point collected will be within 0.5 feet for the 4700 and approximately one meter for the ProXRS.
The ProXRS system can also be operated without a base station, receiving differential GPS corrections from a satellite service or from Coast Guard beacons. The accuracy of the ProXRS, although less than the 4700, has been found to be sufficient for some geophysical surveys such as those performed for sampling purposes because actual anomaly locations are pinpointed during reacquisition.
The system controller/data recorder used with both systems is the Trimble TSC1. The TSC1 is a rugged handheld unit for system control and data logging. The internal memory of the TSC1 will be supplemented by PCMCIA cards when large amounts of data needed to be stored (i.e. for GPS/EM61 surveys). Software used to download and convert the data for analysis with the geophysical data includes Trimble Survey Office and Trimble Geomatics Office.
5.6.3.2 Ultrasonic Positioning Systems
Ultrasonic positioning systems, such as the USRADS® or ULTRA® relate a detector's precise physical location using ultrasonic, radio frequency (RF) transmission, and microcomputers. The ultrasonic transmission fixes the location of the detector, while the RF transmissions provide data telemetry and system synchronization. Portable or laptop computers store the collected data and calculate the precise location of the instrument, displaying the information on the computer screen along with the readings of the instruments. Up to 3600 readings per hour of survey time can be acquired.
5.6.3.3 Laser Positioning Systems
Laser positioning systems utilize lasers to determine distances and relative angles to maintain contact with a roving prism. Similar to the ultrasonic systems, the data are stored on a laptop computer. These types of systems are available but unlikely to be used, as most areas that are suitable for laser positioning are also suitable for GPS, a system that does not require line of site to the base instrument.
5.6.3.4 Robotic Total Station Systems
Robotic Total Station (RTS) systems also utilize lasers to determine distances and relative angles to maintain contact with a roving prism. These types of systems are also available but again
5-14 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
are unlikely to be used, as most areas that are suitable for RTS positioning are also suitable for GPS, the preferable methodology.
The global positioning system requires a relatively clear view from the instrument’s receiver to the orbiting satellite system. In areas of thick canopy, where satellite signals cannot easily be received, ultrasonic positioning systems are useful, however; these systems have a limited range and must be repositioned frequently. The Laser Positioning and Robotic Total Station systems depend on keeping a line-of-sight between the transmitter and receiver to accurately determine the position of the receiver. Positioning systems will be selected on a site-specific basis and justified in the SSWPs.
5.6.4 Survey Procedures
Geophysical survey procedures will vary from site to site and may include full or only partial coverage of the area. The type of survey to be performed at each site will be determined through the following factors:
• Goal of site investigation (removal, risk assessment, footprint reduction);
• Vegetation;
• Terrain;
• Ordnance used on the site (electric vs. non-electric fusing, ferrous vs. non-ferrous content);
• Geophysical technology/instrument selected for use (to be determined from ODDS results or SSPO); and
• Navigation technology/instrument selected for use (to be determined from ODDS SSPO).
A discussion of the above factors will be presented and specific procedures for each site survey defined in the SSWP particular to that site.
5.6.4.1 General Procedures
The following is a general list of procedures for carrying out the geophysical/GPS (if used) surveys.
1. Set up survey area as necessary using survey tapes and traffic cones for navigational guidance. 2. If not using GPS, set up fiducial markers across survey area at a minimum of 50 foot intervals. 3. Set up the instruments as described in their accompanying manuals. 4. If using GPS, mount the rover antenna centered directly above the geophysical instrument or on the instrument operator. If mounted on the operator, accurately measure the horizontal distance between the center of the GPS rover and the center of the geophysical instrument while the operator is separated from the instrument as he/she will be during the survey. 5. Activate the geophysical and GPS rover units.
5-15 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6. Synchronize instrument clocks (if necessary). 7. If not using GPS, place standard metal item (10” metal nail or comparable) at the 0,25 and 100,75 foot local coordinates of the grid block after clearing locations for anomalies with the survey instrument. If instrument indicates anomaly at location, place nail in alternate measured location along traverse line. Record the location on the field form. 8. Perform instrument and QC checks as defined in the Site Specific Work Plan. 9. Utilize instrument manuals as necessary to set up data recorders for surveys. 10. Perform geophysical surveys as defined in the Site Specific Work Plan, ensuring that survey spacing, lag bars and test spikes are used as described in the plan. Follow instrument manual instructions specific to the instruments in use. 11. One member of each team will be responsible for maintaining the field forms. Fill out field forms specified for data collection in the SSWP and record the following information in the field forms:
• Location (Test Area ID);
• Serial numbers of GPS rover unit (if used) and geophysical instrumentation;
• Quality control performed;
• Instrument offset times (if GPS used and logged separately from geophysical sensor data);
• Accurate locations of standard metal stakes;
• Time survey started;
• Time survey completed;
• Names of team members;
• Weather conditions;
• Survey directions;
• Sketch of surveyed area and survey path (include north arrow and approximate scale);
• Sketch locations of surface features in survey area (i.e. roads, utility poles, sewer covers, etc.);
• Data collection rate (i.e. 10 samples/sec or 1 sample/0.67 ft);
• Survey stake identifications (place on sketch);
• Any instrument peculiarities noted; and
• File names.
5-16 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
12. End of the day
• All equipment is returned to storage and the batteries are placed on charge.
• The field form pages are photocopied and placed in the appropriate backup folder or digital field forms are downloaded.
• The data files are given to the geophysical data processing center.
5.6.4.2 GPS/Geophysical Instrument Synchronization
If the GPS and geophysical instruments are not directly linked, at the start of each day the internal clocks of the geophysical equipment will be synchronized with the GPS system’s internal clock. If during the day a difference is noted between the clocks in the geophysical equipment and GPS equipment, then the difference will be recorded on the field forms. Because the clocks in the GPS systems are more accurate than the clocks in the geophysical equipment, during the data processing phase, Parsons’ geophysicists will correct the discrepancy between the time-stamped GPS data and time-stamped geophysical data.
5.6.4.3 Geophysical Mapping Procedures for Digital Geophysical Surveys
Parsons will use local navigation methodologies or tracking systems such as GPS or ultrasonic positioning systems to record the location of data acquired. Vegetation and terrain conditions will limit the areas where GPS can be used, and ultrasonic positioning systems are not yet economical for use over large, contiguous areas. Therefore a mix of positioning systems and local navigation methodologies may be used to successfully complete the geophysical mapping. All navigation data will be translated to NAD 83 California State Plane, Zone IV, coordinates.
5.6.4.4 Local Navigation Methodology
Local navigation methodologies include the use of surveyor’s tapes (or graduated static ropes), range markers (traffic cones or high visibility tripods), information recorded on the field forms (start and end of line stations, lane spacing, fiducial mark intervals, etc.) and information digitally recorded in each geophysical survey data file. The geodetic coordinates of the grid corners are used to geo-reference the geophysical data after the data have been collected.
Surveyor’s tapes (or graduated static ropes) will be laid out in east-west or north-south directions. Range markers are then placed along the line to be surveyed and provide the geophysical operator with a navigation aid allowing him or her to traverse the line in linear fashion. Fiducial data markers will be inserted manually by the operator at intervals not to exceed 50 feet. In areas of rough terrain or thick vegetation, 25 foot intervals will be used. These markers will be used to accurately locate each data measurement point during the post-processing stages.
The field forms’ recorded information and fiducial marks are used to correct the geophysical data to either compress or expand the recorded measurement locations for each line so that they cover the actual distance traveled. This operation is required to compensate for variations in the terrain along the survey line, which affects the rotation of the instrument’s wheels, or to compensate for the walking speed of the operator, depending on the instrument selected. The survey data are then rotated and translated from the local coordinate system in which they were
5-17 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
collected (where the southwest corner of the grid surveyed was assigned a coordinate of 0E, 0N) to the NAD 83 California State Plane coordinate system.
5.7 PERSONNEL
All geophysical investigations will be managed by qualified geophysicists meeting the qualification requirements listed in DID OE-025, which includes OSHA hazardous waste training according to Chapter 6, SSHP. The organizational structure of the site personnel is provided in Chapter 2, Technical Management Plan.
5.7.1 Project Geophysicist
The Project Geophysicist has overall responsibility for design, implementation, and management of all geophysical investigations required for the work effort, and will be on-site full time. The Project Geophysicist will have a degree in geology, geological engineering, or a closely related field and a minimum of five years of directly related geophysical experience. This individual shall be the Project Geophysicist of record.
For certain projects, additional supervising geophysicists will be required to oversee the day- to-day operations of the project geophysical investigations. The supervisor shall have the same education requirements as the Project Geophysicist, except the five years minimum experience requirement is waived, if working under the general supervision of the Project Geophysicist.
The specific responsibilities of the Project Geophysicist include, but are not limited to the following:
• Maintaining experienced personnel.
• Training geophysical field crews and geophysical data processors.
• Coordinating the field team and support personnel to ensure consistency of performance and maintenance of established schedules.
• Using experienced personnel to process and assess the quality of the geophysical and GPS data.
• Establishing a list of all equipment, computers, materials, and supplies necessary to perform the project.
• Coordinating and directing activities of all personnel on the geophysical field teams, including setting and enforcing the schedules required to achieve the goals for each day’s activities.
• Supervising geophysical field operations and related surveying activities, including directing field team activities.
• Monitoring technical performance of team members and subcontractors.
• Performing technical reviews of all deliverables of the study.
5-18 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Approving contributions to any technical deliverable for any work element.
• Communicating with CESPK in areas of technical expertise.
• Supervision of geophysical data processors.
The authority of the Project Geophysicist includes the following:
5.7.2 Field Geophysicist/Geophysical Technicians
Parsons Field Geophysicists and Geophysical Technicians are responsible for the administration of geophysical field activities and personnel. The Project Geophysicist, Field Geophysicist and the Geophysical Technicians work as an integrated team to ensure the success of the data acquisition phase of the project. The specific responsibilities of the Field Geophysicist and the Geophysical Technicians include the following:
• Scheduling field crew activities in concert with the Project Geophysicist.
• Maintaining data-acquisition-related records and ensuring their accuracy.
• Logging all activities at the geophysical survey site in the field forms, or field data computers, and maintaining relevant files.
• Ensuring that all materials needed at the survey site have been obtained (e.g., geophysical equipment, writing materials, tapes, diskettes, markers, etc.).
• Downloading of geophysical and GPS data.
• Performing daily and weekly QC activities as specified in the SSWP.
5.7.3 QC Geophysicist
The QC Geophysicist reports to the QCM and will be responsible for overseeing all QC aspects of the digital geophysical operations (see Chapter 11). The QC Geophysicists specific responsibilities are listed in chapter 11.
5.7.4 Data Processors
Geophysical Data Processors will have responsibility for processing geophysical data after the data are turned in from the field teams. Specific responsibilities include, but are not limited to:
• Performing pre-processing of geophysical and positioning data;
• Performing Geosoft analysis of data;
• Performing database entry to track all processing steps;
• Performing anomaly picking; and
5-19 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Preparing dig list.
5.7.5 Geophysical Team Structure and Management
The QC Geophysicist will be on-site and coordinate all activities associated with the collection, processing, and analysis of geophysical sensor and navigation data. The structure of the team developed to respond to individual task orders will depend on the scope and schedule of the work. However, it is anticipated that digital geophysical data collection and processing will require at a minimum the QC Geophysicist, one database manager, one GIS manager, one UXOQCS, multiple data collection teams, each consisting of Field Geophysicist and Geophysical Technicians and multiple geophysical data processors.
5.8 PRODUCTION RATES
Production rates for geophysical mapping are highly variable, depending on many factors, including topography, vegetation, site access, proximity of survey area to base of operations, weather conditions, and the instrument selected for the surveys. Production rates specific to each site will be provided in the SSWPs.
5.9 DATA RESOLUTION AND DATA DENSITY
Parsons will utilize the optimal survey lane widths and sampling rates determined for each instrument from the ODDS. Any variation from the parameters will be tested on the ODDS plots or in a site-specific prove-out to validate that the detection capabilities are equal to or better than those achieved using the ODDS parameters.
While field data collection teams will attempt to collect data at the optimal survey lane width, deviations from these lanes can not be avoided. For lane widths of 2 feet, the maximum allowable distance between sequential survey lines will be 4 feet. For areas that have had 100% analog removals completed prior to performing digital geophysical mapping, additional data does not need to be collected to fill in data gaps if at least 98% of the accessible portion of the grid is within 2 feet of a data point and no single data gap is larger than 4 feet2.
5-20 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
The sampling rates and survey speed will be selected to achieve sufficient along line data density. The total length of all segments along data transects that are more than 0.35 feet from a data point (see segment labeled GAP in diagram above) will not exceed 2% of the total transect length for a grid-block.
5.10 GEOPHYSICAL DATA PROCESSING AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Geophysical data collected in the field will be processed and managed by Parsons geophysical data processors. Processing procedures vary depending on the technology/instrument selected for use at a particular site. The SSWP for each particular site will summarize in detail the processing steps to be followed for the geophysical data. The following subsections summarize some of the field records management and processing steps performed.
5.10.1 Field Records Management
Paper and digital field records (field data forms, field note copies) will be maintained in the on-site project office. All records will be filed such that they can be found using the date they were created and the team who created them. Paper field forms will also be scanned for digital delivery.
5.10.2 Field Data Storage
All geophysical data collected in the field will be stored electronically on field laptop computers. Data from the surveys will be downloaded from data loggers at regular intervals to ensure that the work performed will not be interrupted by a lack of storage capacity in the loggers.
5.10.3 Processing of Geophysical Data
Specific geophysical data processing procedures will be defined in the SSWPs. A general description of the processing is described below.
Processing of the geophysical data involves two steps, the preprocessing phase, and the Geosoft® Oasis Montaj (Version 5.0 or above) analysis phase. During the preprocessing phase, Parsons’ geophysicists compare the data collected to the field notes to verify the geometry of a grid and the location of the surveyed grid corner stakes. In some cases, the Parsons geophysicist will use this opportunity to adjust the survey lines to the actual distance traveled. The Parsons geophysicists will also review the data at this phase to verify that there are no data gaps in the data set. Additionally, the field notes will be reviewed to determine if there is any interference such as trees, structures, fences, or metal scrap that might affect the data. Such information will be entered into the project database during this phase.
Any data collected with RTK GPS systems will be checked to ensure RTK quality was maintained for the entire survey. Differentially corrected data will be considered acceptable for short periods of time if the differentially corrected positions appear to be consistent with the RTK positions at the times when the RTK quality is lost and where it is reestablished.
Following the preprocessing phase, Project Geophysicist will conduct analysis of the geophysical data using Geosoft. This software consists of a graphical user interface, a high-volume database, and a cross-section of built-in data import, processing, analysis, visualization, mapping, and integration capabilities. The Geosoft platform allows a processor to edit maps interactively, apply dynamic linking to maps, and track the map creation process. Visual data links are used to
5-21 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
connect data in the spreadsheet, profile and map views. Data processing is achieved through the application of Geosoft eXecutable functions (GXs), which control all aspects of the data processing sequence and environment.
During the Geosoft processing phase, non-GPS data will be translated from local grid coordinates into NAD83 California State Plane Zone IV coordinates. Data corrections and filtering will then be performed on all of the data as necessary. As discussed previously, filtering and corrections will depend on the type of instrument used for the survey. Some examples of filtering and corrections are:
• Heading corrections (compensating for slight variations in magnetic gradient with direction of travel).
• Lag corrections (compensating for time stamp delays in the data recorders).
• Sensor offset corrections.
• Diurnal corrections (adjusting for daily fluctuations in magnetic field).
• Leveling of the data to a common baseline.
• Low-pass filtering to reduce high frequency noise.
• Non-linear filtering (removes data spikes and data “drop-outs”).
After all processing steps, raw data and filtered/processed data will be viewed in profile form over top of one another to clearly see the affect the filtering and processing had on the original data. After processing is complete, gridding and contouring of the data will be performed in preparation for anomaly selections.
Database entries will be performed for both preprocessing and for Geosoft analysis; the database provides real time tracking of all data sets from the raw to final dig sheets. The database details all stages of the processing methodology. This includes such information as the leveling procedure, heading corrections, filters used, dates that the data were QC’d, dates that the data were processed, the data coordinate system, the data file names, and any other information pertinent to the processing of the data file.
5.10.4 Methodology for Picking Anomalies
The Parsons methodology for “picking” the geophysical anomalies to be intrusively investigated is a highly subjective process. For that reason, only trained processors working under the oversight of the Project Geophysicist are responsible for evaluating the geophysical data and preparing “dig lists” with anomaly “picks.”
Following the Geosoft processing/filtering phase, the processors focus on picking all subsurface anomalies that are above background levels. Background levels can vary depending on the geology, the soil moisture content, and the terrain. Surface features such as fences and corner stakes can also affect background levels. For these reasons, the processor frequently refers to the field notes of the data collection teams so that potential subsurface anomalies are not confused with abrupt changes in soil conditions and surface features.
5-22 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
In order to thoroughly review data during the anomaly picking process, the Parsons geophysical teams utilize the following as ways of viewing the data and making anomaly selections:
• Data tables (raw, processed/filtered)
• Sensor data profiles
• Color contours of sensor responses
• Overlay of data profiles on contour maps
5.11 DATA DELIVERY
No later than three workdays after collection, Parsons will furnish each day’s raw data and no later than five workdays after collection processed data will be transmitted to CESPK for inspection. All data will be processed into ASCII file format. Each ASCII file format data field will be separated by a space. Each ASCII file of processed data will contain a header describing the type of data, grids covered in the file, when collected, where collected, data column descriptions, data collection interval, and line spacing for each file. Corrections such as for navigation, instrument bias, and diurnal magnetic shift shall be applied and any additional processing will also be included in the header.
Separate geophysical data files will be provided for grid blocks. The data will be presented in delineated fields as x1, y1, x2, y2, and z where x1 and y1 are in NAD 1983 State Plane Coordinates, California Zone IV, Feet and x2 and y2 are the local Cartesian grid coordinates referenced to the southwest corner of each local grid block (or 0, 0). The z column(s) will be the instrument reading(s) and the number of columns present will be instrumentation-dependent. Local Cartesian coordinates will only be included when the survey navigation method uses local coordinates.
5.12 INSTRUMENT STANDARDIZATION CHECKS
The quality of geophysical data sets is dependent on the operational capabilities of the equipment used. By manufacturer’s design, these instruments are calibrated at the time of manufacture and do not require field calibration. To ensure that equipment is fully capable and will perform in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications, Parsons will perform standardization checks. Following these checks, any equipment that is found unsuitable will be immediately removed from service. These checks will provide QC data indicating the proper functionality of the instruments.
5.12.1 Positioning Equipment Checks
Positioning equipment will be checked for proper operation by placing the system’s antenna over a known point and recording the calculated location. For GPS units using real time kinematic (RTK) corrections from a dedicated base station, the position repeatability standard will be ± 0.5 feet. The repeatability standard for ultrasonic positioning systems will be ± 1.0 feet. The repeatability standard for real time code corrected GPS systems is 3 feet. When code corrected GPS units are used, the position dilution of precision (PDOP, a unit-less measure of how good the geometry is between the satellite receiver and the satellites being used to calculate a position)
5-23 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
threshold will be set at no more than 8. This PDOP setting will ensure that positions recorded are accurate to within ± 3 feet.
5.12.2 Geophysical Sensor Checks
The daily instrument checks will involve three tests: a static test, a cable shake test, and an instrument standardization test.
The static test will involve collecting at least 1 minute of data with the equipment stationary once per day prior to collecting data. The static test criteria is a deviation from maximum to minimum over a one minute period of less than 1.5mV (EM61-Mk2), or 1.5 nT (G-858). If a full analog removal has been performed on the grid the standard will be relaxed to 2.0mV (EM61-Mk2) over a one minute period.
The cable shake test will be performed once per day prior to data acquisition. One team member will move the instrument cables to test for shorts and broken pin-outs, shaking the cable starting on one end and proceeding to the other. The second team member will look for data spikes in the instrument response during the cable shake test. If the cable-shake test results in instrument responses above the background noise level, the faulty cables or connectors will be replaced prior to data collection.
The instrument standardization test will be performed at a minimum before and after surveying each block. The instrument will be placed over a standard item near that day’s survey location. The standard item will remain in the same location until the block of grids has been completely surveyed. Standardization test data will be reviewed immediately following the test by the field geophysical team as well as later by the data processors. A QC problem will be indicated by a change of +/- 20 percent or more of the response when operated over the standard. The background values observed during each test will be subtracted from the instrument response before the pre-operational test is compared to the post-operational test. If a QC problem is indicated, the Project Geophysicist will immediately be notified and a determination will be made concerning the operability of the instrument. If the cause cannot be determined by the Project Geophysicist in the field, the unit will be removed from the field. If the instrument is found to be malfunctioning, it will be removed from service and replaced or repaired.
5.12.3 Six line Test
At the beginning of a project and whenever a new terrain type is encountered, the navigational accuracy of the combined geophysical and positioning equipment will be checked with the six-line test. The first two lines record "background" data up and back across a single 50 foot traverse. The next two are a set of traverses (up and back) over a metal stake (10 inch nail) driven into the ground at the 25-foot (halfway) mark. The final set of traverses will simulate surveying up and down hills. The operator will first log data traveling at a slow pace (simulating an uphill traverse) and then return at a significantly more rapid pace (simulating a downhill traverse). The QC and interpretation teams will assess these measurements and make a determination that is part of the QC record in the database for the surveyed grids as to the quality of the data as well as the spatial accuracy of selected anomaly locations.
5-24 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
5.12.4 Instrument Drift Checks
Instrument drift will be measured by surveying “cross-lines” of data perpendicular to the primary direction of survey at the conclusion of each block of grids surveyed. For example, if a block of four 100 x 100 foot grids are surveyed together in a north-south orientation, at the end of surveying this block, a line will be surveyed across the block in an east-west direction. The data from the east-west survey line will be compared to the north-south data in the same locations to measure instrument drift from the beginning to the end of the survey.
5.13 ANOMALY REACQUISITION
Following the evaluation of geophysical data, Parsons’ geophysicists prepare anomaly lists with suspect anomaly locations for field reacquisition teams. In cases where GPS or other location tracking devices can be used, the coordinates of the anomalies selected from the geophysical data will be loaded into the tracking instrument. The teams will then use this instrument to guide them to the selected anomaly location. If a tracking system cannot be used, a local coordinate, relative to a surveyed stake location, will be used to reacquire the anomaly location. Whenever possible, Parsons’ geophysicists will generate anomaly lists for groups of anomalies within the general vicinity of each other, thereby minimizing the travel time of the reacquisition teams.
A non-metallic flag marked with the anomaly ID will be placed at the anomaly coordinates. A sweep will be conducted within a 3-foot radius of the location using the original survey instrument. If the anomaly is detected it will be noted on the anomaly list as such and a static reading will be collected where possible. The reacquisition team will move the flag to the approximate location of the anomaly and the distance and direction the flag was moved will be recorded on the anomaly list. If no anomaly is detected, the reacquisition team will note the negative result on the anomaly list and leave the flag in the original location.
5.14 DIG SHEET DEVELOPMENT
Once a grouping of anomalies has been reacquired, dig sheet information will be developed by the geophysical data processors and given in digital form to the FOM for transfer to the intrusive investigation teams. All successfully reacquired anomalies and at least 10% of unsuccessfully reacquired anomalies will be investigated. The dig sheets will be provided to CESPK in digital form and will contain at a minimum:
• Project Site;
• Grid Identification;
• Unique Anomaly ID;
• Predicted Anomaly Eastings and Northings in NAD 1983 State Plane Coordinates, California Zone IV, Feet;
• Maximum Amplitude of Anomaly Signal (where applicable); and
• Blank spaces for: Distance and Direction to Contact from Marked Location, Depth to Item, Description of Item, Weight of Item, General Orientation of Item.
5-25 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
5.15 FEED-BACK PROCESS (COMPARISON OF DIG-SHEET PREDICTIONS WITH GROUND TRUTH)
After dig-sheets have been filled out and returned to the FOM by the intrusive teams, the Project Geophysicist will review the results of the intrusive investigation. An assessment will be made as to whether the item(s) found was sufficient to produce the amplitude or type of anomaly in the data. If it is determined that the item was likely not the entire source of the anomaly, the anomaly and anomalous area will be reacquired (if possible) and reinvestigated using the instrument utilized during the initial survey. Anomalies of this type will be tracked separately in the database in the event that future analysis is required.
5.16 FINAL REPORT AND MAPS
The final report and maps to be delivered for each site will include at a minimum:
• Description of work performed and procedures/methods employed to perform the work. This will include target listings generated from digital geophysical interpretations and the results of the intrusive investigations of those targets.
• Pseudo-color maps representing the data collected.
• Copies of field data and final data.
• Copies of individual target lists and maps/drawings for each grid.
• A summary of QC check results.
• Description of problems encountered and how they were resolved.
• Accident exposure data, including man-hours worked, miles driven, and aircraft flights taken to support the work.
Parsons will record and report on all discrepancies between original mapped locations of anomalies as shown on the dig-sheet, and actual locations of the reacquired location. Parsons will also report any anomalies that could not be reacquired.
Final reports will have geophysical data analysis included based on changes to the CESPK Scopes of Work or Data Item Descriptions.
5-26 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 6 SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN
6.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this SSHP is to establish general guidelines and procedures to ensure protection of Parsons’ personnel and the public while performing operations at Fort Ord sites. The plan assigns responsibilities, establishes procedures, and develops contingencies that may arise while operations are performed.
6.2 APPLICABILITY
This PWP's provisions are mandatory for all on-site activities undertaken by Parsons and its subcontractors. All site activities will comply with applicable federal, California, and U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) requirements. As site conditions change, this plan may need to be modified. Such modifications will be submitted as SSHP addenda and will be numbered sequentially. All SSHP addenda must be reviewed and approved by the Project Health and Safety Officer. All Parsons’ personnel and subcontractors must read and understand this SSHP and sign the Plan Acceptance Form (Attachment A) prior to the start of work at the site.
6.3 UNKNOWN FILLER
In the event ordnance suspected of containing unknown filler is encountered, refer to paragraph 6.6.5.
6.4 STAFF ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND RESPONSIBILITIES
6.4.1 General
Ensuring the safe and healthful conduct of site operations is the responsibility of everyone assigned to the site. All Parsons and subcontract personnel involved in site activities are responsible for the following:
• Complying with this SSHP and all other required safety and health guidelines.
• Taking all necessary precautions to prevent injury to themselves and to their fellow employees.
• Continually being alert to any potentially harmful situation and immediately informing the UXOSO of any such identified conditions.
• Performing only those tasks that they believe they can do safely and have been trained to perform.
• Preventing spillage and splashing of materials to the greatest extent possible.
• Practicing good housekeeping by keeping the work area neat, clean and orderly.
6-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Immediately reporting all injuries, no matter how minor, to the UXOSO.
• Maintaining site equipment in good working order and reporting defective equipment to the UXOSO.
• Properly inspecting and using the personal protective equipment correctly.
6.4.2 Responsible Parsons Safety and Health Personnel
Refer to Table 6-1.
6.4.3 Employee Safety Responsibilities
Each employee is responsible for his own safety as well as the safety of those around them. The employee shall use all equipment provided in a safe and responsible manner as directed by their supervisor. Personnel will follow the policies set forth in this SSHP.
6-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-1 Responsibilities of Parsons Team Members Fort Ord, California Title General Description Responsibilities Program Reports to upper-level • Prepares and organizes the background review Manager management. Has authority of the situation, the Quality Assurance Plan, to direct response operations. the SSHP, and the field team. Assumes total control over • Obtains permission for site access and site activities. coordinates activities with appropriate officials. • Briefs the field teams on their specific assignments. • Uses the Project Health and Safety Officer to ensure that safety and health requirements are met. • Serves as a liaison with public officials.
Project Health Advises Program Manager • Provides technical support concerning Safety and Safety on all aspects of S&H and and Health issues. Officer (PHSO) Supervises the UXOSO • Manages/oversees the preparation of the SSHP. • Conducts field Safety and Health audits to ensure SSHP conformance and Parsons policy compliance. • Certifies that all workers have proper training. • Investigates each accident or reportable incident.
Field Operations Responsible for field team • Manages field operations. Manager (FOM) operations and safety. • Oversees subcontractors’ field operations. • Coordinates with the UXOSO in determining protection level. • Enforces site control. • Documents field activities.
6-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-1 (Continued) Responsibilities of Parsons Team Members Fort Ord, California Title General Description Responsibilities UXO Health and Reports to the PHSO on all • Ensures that personnel perform inspections of Safety Officer aspects of Safety and Health protective equipment and clothing prior to, on site. Performs day-to-day during, and after each use. H&S tasks. Stops work if • Ensures that protective clothing and any operation threatens equipment are properly stored and maintained. worker or public health • Controls entry and exit at the Access Control and/or safety. Points. • Ensures personnel are monitored for signs of stress, such as cold exposure, heat stress, and fatigue. • Implements the SSHP. • Prior to each work event, conducts inspections to determine if the SSHP is being followed. • Knows emergency procedures, evacuation routes, and telephone numbers of the ambulance, local hospital, poison control center, fire department, and police department. • Ensures that all required equipment is available. • Notifies emergency response personnel by telephone or radio in the event of an emergency. • Acts as spokesperson if OSHA inspector arrives on site. • Conducts on-site training concerning pertinent H&S issues and new concerns. • Reports all accidents or H&S incidents to the PHSO. • Provides UXO safety oversight during intrusive activities conducted. • Oversees the identification, excavation, movement and disposal of all UXO discovered– to ensure only the safest possible procedures are used.
Field Team The work party must consist • Safely completes the on-site tasks. of at least two people. • Complies with Site Safety and Health Plan. • Notifies UXOSO/FOM or Supervisor of suspected unsafe conditions. • Inspects personal protective equipment prior to, during, and after each use.
6-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.6 HAZARD ANALYSIS AND RISK ASSESSMENT
Safety, biological, and physical hazards will present a risk to workers at Fort Ord sites. The level of risk is dependent upon the type of work being done. The paragraphs that follow describe the safety, biological, and physical hazards associated with planned activities.
6.6.1 Safety Hazards
The major safety hazard for operations performed at Fort Ord sites is the unintended detonation of ordnance. Other anticipated safety hazards include heavy equipment operation, excavation safety, slip hazards, and power tool use. Procedures to minimize these hazards are presented below.
6.6.1.1 MEC
Ordnance and ordnance-related items will be encountered at the Fort Ord site. Personnel must be alert for MEC and MEC and munitions debris. All field personnel must observe the following general safety precautions:
• DO NOT touch or move any MEC until positive identification has been determined, regardless of the markings or apparent condition.
• DO NOT visit an ordnance site if an electrical storm is occurring or approaching. If a storm approaches during a site visit, leave the site immediately and seek appropriate shelter.
• DO NOT use radios or cellular phones in the vicinity of suspect MEC.
• DO NOT walk across an area where the ground cannot be seen. If dead vegetation or animals are observed, leave the area immediately due to potential contamination by chemical agent.
• DO NOT drive vehicles into areas suspected of MEC. Use clearly marked lanes.
• DO NOT rely on color code for positive identification of MEC nor their contents.
• SMOKING will only be allowed in smoking areas designated by the UXO Supervisor during the morning Tailgate Safety Briefing.
• Approach ordnance items from the side.
• Prohibit unnecessary personnel from visiting the site.
• Decontaminate the vehicle interior when deemed necessary to prevent the spread of poison oak oils and sap.
• Always assume MEC contain a live charge until it can be ascertained otherwise.
6-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
The following precautions are applicable to personnel performing MEC recovery and demolition operations.
• All MEC will be identified independently by two (2) UXO Technicians.
• All MEC operations will use the "Buddy" system.
• Demolition operations will as a minimum conform to TM 60A-1-1-31.
• DO NOT dismantle, strip or handle any MEC unnecessarily.
• Avoid inhalation and skin contact with smoke, fumes, dust and vapors of detonations and residue from MEC.
• DO NOT attempt to extinguish burning explosives or any fire, which might involve explosive materials.
• DO NOT manipulate external features of MEC unless specifically called for in an EOD procedure.
• Incorporate appropriate property and personnel protective measures for shock and fragmentation when conducting MEC operations.
• Do not subject MEC to rough handling or transportation. Sand bag, chock and block appropriately.
• Carry explosives in an appropriate container.
• Hand carry no more than two items (one in each hand) at a time and then only as required by the operation being performed.
• Destroy shaped charge munitions by crushing the cone to prevent formation of the explosive jet.
• Dispose of white phosphorous (WP) munitions IAW the direction of the CESPK Safety Specialist.
• Do not transport damaged WP munitions unless fully submerged in water.
• Avoid unnecessary movement of armed or damaged MEC.
• Avoid the forward portions of munitions employing proximity fusing.
• Assume unknown fuses contain cocked strikers or anti-disturbance features.
6.6.1.2 Heavy Equipment
A portion of the work may involve the utilization of backhoes to perform excavation. Injuries can result from equipment hitting or running over personnel or from the overturning vehicles.
6-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Vehicle and heavy equipment design and operation will be in accordance with 29 CFR parts 1926.600 through 1926.602. In particular, the following precautions shall be used to help prevent injuries:
• Brakes, hydraulic lines, light signals, fire extinguishers, fluid levels, steering, tires, horn, and other safety devices being checked by the vehicle operator at the beginning of each shift.
• Cabs will be kept free of all nonessential items, and all loose items will be secured.
• Glass in windshields, windows and doors shall be safety glass. Any cracked or broken glass shall be replaced.
• Backhoes will be provided with necessary safety equipment (seat belts, rollover protection, emergency shut-off in case of rollover, and backup warning lights and audible alarms).
• Blades and buckets will be lowered to the ground, and parking brakes will be set before shutting off any heavy equipment or vehicle.
Backhoes will not be backed up unless:
• The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm audible above the surrounding noise level.
• The vehicle is backed up under the direction of a signalman.
The heavy equipment operator shall be trained in the operation of the vehicle. Any person operating a motor vehicle shall possess a permit valid for the equipment being used.
6.6.1.3 Excavation Safety
Prior to any excavation activity, efforts must be made to determine whether underground installations (i.e., sewers, telephone, water, fuel, electric lines, etc.), will be encountered and, if so, where such underground installations are located. The UXOSO or designee must contact the utility companies or owners involved and inform them, within established or customary local response times, of the proposed work. If the utility companies or owners do not respond within the period established by law or ordinance, or if they cannot identify the locations of utilities the excavation may proceed with caution. In this situation, detection equipment or other safe and acceptable means to locate utilities may be used. If underground installations are exposed, OSHA requires that they be removed, protected, or properly supported.
No protective system is needed if the excavation is made entirely in stable rock, or if workers enter an excavation that is less than 5 feet in depth (provided that the competent person, UXOSO, determines that there is no potential for a cave-in). If the depth of the excavation exceeds 5 feet than the sides of the excavation will be slope to an angle not steeper than one and one-half horizontal to one vertical (34° measured from the horizontal). Access to and exit from an excavation must comply with the following conditions:
• Trenches 4 feet or more in depth should be provided with a fixed means of egress.
6-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Spacing between ladders or other means of egress shall be a minimum of 25 feet laterally.
• Ladders must be secured and extend a minimum of 36 inches above the landing.
• Metal ladders should not be used when electric utilities are present.
6.6.1.4 Slip, Trip, and Fall Hazards
Slip, trip and fall hazards may be encountered at the site including holes, pits, ditches, steep grades, and uneven grades. Personnel should use caution when traversing the site.
6.6.1.5 Power Tools
By their very nature power tools have great capability for inflicting serious injury upon site personnel if they are not used and maintained properly. To control the hazards associated with power tool operation, the requirements outlined in EM 385-1-1 and the safe work practices listed below are observed when using power tools:
• Operations are conducted by authorized personnel familiar with the tool, its operation and safety precautions. Power tools must be operated in accordance with the owner’s manual.
• Power tools are inspected prior to use and defective equipment is removed from service until repaired.
• Power tools designed to accommodate guards have such guards properly in place prior to use.
• Loose fitting clothing or long hair is not permitted around moving parts.
• Hands, feet, etc., are kept away from all moving parts.
• Maintenance and/or adjustments to equipment are not to be conducted while the equipment is in operation.
• An adequate operating area is provided, allowing sufficient clearance and access for operation.
• Personnel use required protective equipment, such as gloves, chaps and steel-toed boots when using chainsaws.
6.6.1.6 Confined Space Entry
Entry into permit required confined spaces are not anticipated. Should entry into a permit required confined space be required, the PHSO will be contacted to provide guidance and training.
6-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.6.2 Biological Hazards
Biological hazards that are usually found on-site include tick bites, spiders, poisonous snakes, vermin and hazardous plants. Depending on the season and weather the hazards at Fort Ord will vary. For instance, during cold weather many animals and insects are not active and most plants are dormant. The project may continue through several seasons and the risks and hazards will change with the seasons. Employee awareness and the safe work practices outlined in the following paragraphs should reduce the risk associated with these hazards.
6.6.2.1 Hazardous Plants
A number of hazardous plants may be encountered during field operations. The ailments associated with these plants range from mild hay fever to contact dermatitis. Plants that present the greatest risk to site workers are those that produce allergic reactions and tissue injury.
6.6.2.1.1 Plants That Cause Skin and Tissue Injury Contact with sharp leaves and thorns are of special concern to site personnel. This concern stems from the fact that punctures, cuts, and even minor scrapes caused by accidental contact may result in skin lesions and the introduction of fungi or bacteria through the skin. This is especially important in light of the fact that the warm moist environment created inside protective clothing is ideal for the propagation of fungal and bacterial infection. Personnel receiving any of the injuries listed above, even minor scrapes shall report immediately to the UXOSO for continued observation and care. Keeping the skin covered as much as possible (i.e., long pants and long sleeved shirts) in areas where these plants are known to exist will limit much of the potential exposure.
6.6.2.1.2 Plants That Cause an Allergic Reaction The poisonous plants of greatest concern are poison ivy, poison oak, and poison sumac. Contact with the poisonous sap of these plants produces a severe rash characterized by redness, blisters, swelling, and intense burning and itching. The victim also may develop a high fever and may be very ill. Ordinarily, the rash begins within a few hours after exposure, but it may be delayed for 24 to 48 hours.
The most distinctive features of poison ivy and poison oak are their leaves, which are composed of three leaflets each (Figure 6-1). In certain seasons, both plants also have greenish- white flowers and berries that grow in clusters. Poison sumac is a tall shrub or small tree with 6-12 leaflets arranged in pairs with a single leaflet at the end. This plant grows in wooded, swampy areas. The reaction associated with exposure to these plants will generally cause the following signs and symptoms:
• Blistering at the site of contact, usually occurring within 12 to 48 hours after contact.
• Reddening, swelling, itching and burning at the site of contact.
• Pain, if the reaction is severe.
• Conjunctivitis, asthma, and other allergic reactions if the person is extremely sensitive to the poisonous plant toxin.
6-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
If the rash is scratched, secondary infections can occur. Preventive measures that are effective for most site personnel include:
• Avoid contact with any poisonous plants on site, and keep a steady watch to identify, report and mark poisonous plants found on site.
• Wash hands, face or other exposed areas at the beginning of each break period and at the end of each workday.
• Avoid contact with, and wash on a daily basis, contaminated tools, equipment and clothing.
• Barrier creams, detoxification/wash solutions and orally administered desensitization may prove effective and should be tried to find the best preventive solution.
Keeping the skin covered as much as possible (i.e., long pants and long sleeved shirts) in areas where these plants are known to exist will limit much of the potential exposure.
Figure 6-1: Poison Ivy/Poison Oak/Poison Sumac
Poison Ivy Poison Oak Poison Sumac
6.6.2.2 Tick Bites
The Center for Disease Control (CDC) has noted the increase of Lyme Disease and Rocky Mountain Spotted Fever (RMSF), which are caused by bites from infected ticks that live in and near wooded areas, tall grass and brush. Ticks are small, ranging from the size of a comma up to about one quarter inch and are sometimes difficult to see (Figure 6-2). The tick season extends from spring through summer. When embedded in the skin, they may look like a freckle.
6-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Lyme disease has been documented in 43 states with the heaviest concentrations in the northeast (Connecticut, Massachusetts, New Jersey, New York, and Pennsylvania), the upper Midwest (Minnesota and Wisconsin), and along the northern California coast and more specifically, Monterey County. It is caused by deer ticks and lone star ticks that have become infected with spirochetes. Female deer ticks are about one quarter inch in size and are black and brick red in color. Male deer ticks are smaller and completely black. Lone star ticks are larger and chestnut brown in color.
Lyme disease has been documented in 43 Figure 6-2: Photograph of Tick states with the heaviest concentrations in the northeast (Connecticut, Massachusetts, New Jersey, New York, and Pennsylvania), the upper Midwest (Minnesota and Wisconsin), and along the northern California coast and more specifically, Monterey County. It is caused by deer ticks and lone star ticks that have become infected with spirochetes. Female deer ticks are about one quarter inch in size and are black and brick red in color. Male deer ticks are smaller and completely black. Lone star ticks are larger and chestnut brown in color.
RMSF has occurred in 36 states, with the heaviest concentrations in Oklahoma, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Virginia. It is caused by Rocky Mountain Wood Ticks and Dog Ticks that have become infected with rickettsia. Both are black in color.
The first symptoms of either disease are flu like chills, fever, headache, dizziness, fatigue, stiff neck, and bone pain. If immediately treated by a physician, most individuals recover fully in a short period of time. If not treated, more serious symptoms can occur.
If you believe a tick has bitten you, or if any of the signs and symptoms noted above appear contact the UXOSO, who will authorize you to visit a physician for an examination and possible treatment.
Protective Measures
Standard field gear (work boots, socks and light-colored coveralls) provides good protection against tick bites, particularly if the joints are taped. However, even when wearing field gear, the following precautions shall be taken when working in areas that might be infested with ticks:
• When in the field, check yourself often for ticks, particularly on your lower legs and areas covered with hair.
• Spray outer clothing, particularly your pant legs and socks, BUT NOT YOUR SKIN, with an insect repellant that contains permethrin or permanone.
6-11 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• When walking in wooded areas wear a hard hat and avoid contact with bushes, tall grass or brush as much as possible.
• If you find a tick, remove it by pulling on it gently with tweezers. Do not squeeze the tick's body. Grasp it where the mouthparts enter the skin and tug gently, but firmly, until it releases its hold on the skin.
• If the tick resists, cover the tick with salad oil/Vaseline for about 15 minutes to asphyxiate it then remove it with tweezers.
• DO NOT use matches, a lit cigarette, nail polish or any other type of chemical to "coax" the tick out.
• Be sure to remove all parts of the tick's body and disinfect the area with alcohol or a similar antiseptic after removal.
• For several days to several weeks after removal of the tick, look for the signs of the onset of Lyme disease, such as a rash that looks like a bulls-eye or an expanding red circle surrounding a light area, frequently seen with a small welt in the center.
• Also look for the signs of the onset of RMSF, such as an inflammation, which is visible in the form of a rash comprising many red spots under the skin, which appears 3 to 10 days after the tick bite.
6.6.2.3 Insects
Contact with stinging insects may result in site personnel experiencing adverse health affects that range from being mildly uncomfortable to being life threatening. Therefore, stinging insects present a serious hazard to site personnel and extreme caution must be exercised whenever site and weather conditions increase the risk of encountering stinging insects. A decision diagram for stings from insects is presented in Figure 6-3. Poisonous insects and insect-like creatures that may be encountered at Fort Ord include the following:
• Bees ("Killer" bees, honeybees, bumble bees, wasps, and hornets and wingless wasps)
• Scorpions
• Fire ants
Bees
At Fort Ord, personnel should be very cautious of "killer" bees. They have the appearance of the typical honeybee, however they are very aggressive. These Africanized honeybees (AHB) defend their colonies much more vigorously than typical bees. The colonies are easily disturbed (sometimes just by being nearby). When they do sting, many more bees may participate, so there is a danger of receiving more stings. This can make them life threatening, especially to people allergic to stings, or with limited capacity to escape (the young, old, and handicapped).
6-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Scorpions
The scorpions commonly found in California have the capacity to inflict a painful sting, however, they are not considered to pose a danger to humans. Stings by these scorpions can be managed by washing the wound with soap and water and by application of an ice pack for a few minutes. Medical attention is usually not needed unless the victim is displaying signs of an allergic reaction (rash, severe swelling, shortness of breath).
Fire Ants
Fire ants are aggressive, reddish-brown to black ants that are 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch long. They construct nests, which are often visible as dome-shaped mounds of soil, sometimes as large as 3 feet across and 1 1/2 feet in height. In sandy soils, mounds are flatter and less visible. Fire ants usually build mounds in sunny, open areas such as lawns, pastures, cultivated fields and meadows, but they are not restricted to these areas. Mounds or nests may be located in rotting logs, around trees and stumps, under pavement and buildings, and occasionally indoors.
Fire ants use their stingers to immobilize or kill prey and to defend ant mounds from disturbance by larger animals, such as humans. Any disturbance sends hundreds of workers out to attack anything that moves. The ant grabs its victim with its mandibles (mouthparts) and then inserts its stinger. The process of stinging releases a chemical, which alerts other ants, inducing them to sting. In addition, one ant can sting several times without letting go with its mandibles.
Once stung, humans experience a sharp pain that lasts a couple of minutes, then after a while the sting starts itching and a welt appears. Fire ant venom contains alkaloids and a relatively small amount of protein. The alkaloids kill skin cells; this attracts white blood cells, which form a pustule within a few hours of being stung. The fluid in the pustule is sterile, but if the pustule is broken, the wound may become infected. The protein in the venom can cause allergic reactions that may require medical attention.
Some of the factors related to stinging insects that increases the risk associated with accidental contact are:
• The nests for these insects are frequently found in remote wooded or grassy areas and hidden in cavities.
• The nests can be situated in trees, rocks, bushes or in the ground, and are usually difficult to see.
• Accidental contact with these insects is highly probable, especially during warm weather conditions when the insects are most active.
• If a site worker accidentally disturbs a nest, the worker may be inflicted with multiple stings, causing extreme pain and swelling which can leave the worker incapacitated and in need of medical attention.
• Some people are hypersensitive to the toxins injected by a sting, and when stung, experience a violent and immediate allergic reaction resulting in a life-threatening condition known as anaphylactic shock.
6-13 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Anaphylactic shock manifests itself very rapidly and is characterized by extreme swelling of the body, eyes, face, mouth and respiratory passages.
• The hypersensitivity needed to cause anaphylactic shock, can in some people, accumulate over time and exposure, therefore even if someone has been stung previously, and not experienced an allergic reaction, there is no guarantee that they will not have an allergic reaction if they are stung again.
With these things in mind, and with the high probability of contact with stinging insects, all site personnel will comply with the following safe work practices:
• If a worker knows that he is hypersensitive to bee, wasp or hornet stings, he must inform the UXOSO of this condition prior to participation in site activities.
• All site personnel will be watchful for the presence of stinging insects and their nests, and will advise the UXOSO if a stinging insect nest is located or suspected in the area.
• Any nests located on site will be flagged off and site personnel will be notified of its presence.
• If stung, site personnel will immediately seek shelter and stay there even if some bees come in with you (there are more outside the building or car). Do not jump in water (bees will still be in the area when you come up). Once safe, remove stings from your skin, it does not matter how you do it, but do it as quickly as possible to reduce the amount of venom they inject. Obtain first aid treatment and contact the UXOSO who will observe for signs of allergic reaction.
• Site personnel with a known hypersensitivity to stinging insects will keep required emergency medication on or near their person at all times.
6-14 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 6-3: Decision Diagram for Stings from Insects
Honey bee No Yes sting?
Other types of Stinger stinging insects No Yes embedded?
Scrape stinger off with fingernail, credit card, or knife. Do not squeeze stinger.
Allergic to No Yes stings?
Wash site with soap and water. Apply ice pack Seek medical attention for 15-20 minutes. Relieve pain with aspirin or immediately. acetaminophen. Keep bite area lower than heart. Relieve itching and swelling with topical Apply constriction band. steroid cream. Use insect bite kit. Keep bite area lower than heart. Monitor ABCs; treat accordingly.
6-15 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.6.2.4 Snakes
Snakes like to sun themselves on rocks during the day. Therefore, when site activities are conducted, extreme caution must be exercised around areas where snakes might be found (i.e. rocks, bushes, logs, or in holes, crevices, and abandoned pipes). The rattlesnake is the only type of snake in California that is dangerous to humans. These snakes are normally not aggressive and will flee when humans approach. However, if a rattlesnake is encountered, leave the area and report the location to UXOSO. The UXOSO will issue protective clothing, such as snake leggings, to site personnel.
Western Rattlesnake Figure 6-4 Photograph of Western This is the only rattlesnake that can be Rattlesnake encountered in Northern California. Its venom, which it uses to immobilized its prey and defend itself, contains both neurotoxins and hemotoxins. Neurotoxins affect the nervous system and hemotoxins affect the bloodstream. Its size can vary between 1.25 and 5.25 feet and can be identified by brownish blotches down midline of back; generally edged with dark brown or black (Figure 6-4). The snake is most active between the months of April and October.
Treatment
A snake bite is usually characterized by extreme pain and swelling at the site of the bite; the presence of one or more puncture wounds created by the fangs; and a general skin discoloration. The manifestations of the bite include general weakness, rapid pulse, nausea and vomiting, shortness of breath, dimness of vision, tingling or numbness of the tongue, mouth or scalp and shock.
Physical reactions are aggravated by acute fear, anxiety, the amount of venom injected, the speed of absorption of venom into the victim's circulation, the size of the victim, protection provided by clothing (including shoes and gloves), the amount of time before anti-venom therapy and location of the bite.
First Aid – The rules to follow for a snake bite are:
• DO NOT cut "Xs" over the bite area, as this will intensify the effect of the venom.
• DO NOT apply suction to the wound since this has a minimal effective in removing venom.
• DO NOT apply a tourniquet since this will concentrate the venom and increase the amount of tissue damage in the immediate area.
• DO NOT use cold compresses, ice, dry ice, chemical ice packs, spray refrigerants, or other methods of cold therapy.
6-16 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• If possible, try to get a good look at the snake so it can be identified for proper selection of anti-venom.
• DO NOT allow the victim to run for help since running increases the heart rate and will increase the spread of the venom throughout the body.
• Calm, reassure and keep the victim calm, quiet and immobile. Do not delay evacuation.
• Have the victim hold the affected extremity lower than the body while waiting for medical assistance.
• Transport the victim to medical attention immediately.
Identification Features -- Non-poisonous snakes are often erroneously identified as poisonous. The features identified in Table 6.2 will assist in properly identifying a snake as poisonous or non- poisonous.
Table 6-2 Snake Identification Features
Feature Poisonous Non-Poisonous
Eye Pupils Elliptical, or cat-like Round
Sensing Pits Pit between the eyelids and nostrils No pit between the eyelids and nostrils
Teeth Two enlarged teeth (fangs) in front of the All teeth are approximately the same upper jaw size
Scales Form a single row on the underside and Arranged in a double row on the below the tail underside of the tail
Head Head much wider than the neck Head slightly wider than the neck
Tail Single anal plate Divided anal plate
6-17 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.6.2.5 Spiders
A large variety of spiders may be Figure 6-2: Photograph of Black Widow Spider encountered during site activities. Extreme caution must be used when lifting logs and debris, since spiders are typically found in these areas.
While most spider bites merely cause localized pain, swelling, reddening and in some cases, tissue damage, there are a few spiders that, due to the severity of the physiological affects caused by their venom, are dangerous. The UXOSO will brief site personnel as to the identification and avoidance of these dangerous spiders. These species include the black widow and the brown or violin spiders.
The black widow (Figure 6-5) is a coal-black bulbous spider 3/4 to 1 1/2 inches in length, with a bright red hourglass on the under side of the abdomen. The black widow is usually found in dark moist locations, especially under rocks, rotting logs and may even be found in outdoor toilets where they inhabit the underside of the seat. Victims of a black widow bite may exhibit the following signs or symptoms:
• Sensation of pinprick or minor burning at the time of the bite.
• Appearance of small punctures (but sometimes none are visible).
• After 15 to 60 minutes, intense pain is felt at the site of the bite which spreads quickly, and is followed by profuse sweating, rigid abdominal muscles, muscle spasms, breathing difficulty, slurred speech, poor coordination, dilated pupils and generalized swelling of face and extremities.
The brown or violin spider (Figure 6-6) is Figure 6-3: Photograph of Brown Recluse brownish to tan in color, rather flat, 1/2 to 5/8 Spider inches long. However unlike the typical species, the ones encountered at Fort Ord do not have a violin or “fiddle” shaped mark on the top of the head. Of the brown spider, there are three varieties found in the United States that present a problem to site personnel. These are the brown recluse, the desert violin and the Arizona violin. These spiders may be found in a variety of locations including trees, rocks or in dark locations. Victims of a brown or violin spider bite may exhibit the following signs or symptoms:
6-18 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Blistering at the site of the bite, followed by a local burning at the site 30 to 60 minutes after the bite.
• Formation of a large, red, swollen, postulating lesion with a bull's-eye appearance.
• Systemic affects may include a generalized rash, joint pain, chills, fever, nausea and vomiting.
• Pain may become severe after 8 hours, with the onset of tissue necrosis.
There is no effective first aid treatment for either of these bites. Except for very young, very old or weak victims, spider bites are not considered to be life threatening. However, medical treatment must be sought to reduce the extent of damage caused by the injected toxins. First aid should include:
• If possible, catch the spider to confirm its identity. Even if the body is crushed, save it for identification.
• Clean the bitten area with soap and water or rubbing alcohol.
• To relieve pain, place an ice pack over the bite.
• Keep the victim quiet and monitor breathing.
• Seek immediate medical attention.
6.6.2.6 Rats, Mice, and Bats
Rats, mice, and bats may be found at the site. These animals may carry rabies and should be avoided. In addition, Hanta Virus is also a concern when coming in contact with these animals. Hanta Virus is a disease spread primarily from infected rodent droppings. Hanta Virus results from intimate contact with rodents, such as may occur in agricultural areas with dense human and rodent populations or during soil excavation. Hanta virus is not transferred from person to person. The overwhelming evidence is that spread is from rodent to humans through contact with infected rodent secretions or airborne transmission by infected dust particles.
Preventive measures should focus on cleaning all cuts and scratches with soap and water, followed by rinsing with hydrogen peroxide. Put liquid skin on the affected areas. The best preventative measure is to avoid all rodent nests during geophysical surveys. If rodent nests are discovered field team members should be apprised of their locations and avoid working adjacent to the nests. If work must be performed at that location, a 10% bleach solution will be sprayed on the nest and adjacent areas to kill the virus. If work must be performed at a location where rodent infestation is evident personal protective equipment should be worn. The PPE ensemble will include:
• Half face air purifying respirator with HEPA filter cartridges (N/P/R99, 100) and non- vented goggles or high filtration dust mask with non-vented goggles
• Tyvek coveralls
6-19 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Tyvek boot covers or rubber boots
• PVC or latex gloves
6.6.2.7 Blood borne Pathogen
Blood borne pathogens enter the human body and blood circulation system through punctures, cuts or abrasions of the skin or mucous membranes. They are not transmitted through ingestion (swallowing), through the lungs (breathing), or by contact with whole, healthy skin. Examples of blood borne pathogens are HIV, Hepatitis B, Malaria, Syphilis and West Nile Virus. However, under the principle of universal precautions all blood should be considered infectious, and all skin and mucous membranes should be considered to have possible points of entry for pathogens.
Potential blood borne pathogen exposures that employees might face include:
• Contact with contaminated medical equipment or medical waste or sharp instruments.
• Medical emergency response operations such as administering first aid or CPR.
• Contact with human wastes such as domestic sewage.
Parsons field personnel that could potentially contact human blood must be familiar with the Parsons Exposure Control Program.
6.6.3 Physical Hazards
Physical hazards that exist at Fort Ord sites include noise, heat and cold stress, and fire hazards. Procedures to protect workers from these hazards are presented below.
6.6.3.1 Noised Induced Hearing Loss
Planned activities will involve the use of heavy equipment, such as backhoes and generators. The unprotected exposure of site workers to this noise during activities can result in noise-induced hearing loss. Personnel working at this site will be enrolled in a hearing conservation program (Attachment B). The UXOSO will verify that each site worker has received hearing conservation training that entails proper use of hearing protectors. Additionally, the UXOSO will ensure that either earmuffs or disposable foam earplugs are made available to, and used by, all personnel near operating heavy equipment, or other sources of high intensity noise. Hearing protection is required any time the noise level reaches 85 dbA or greater. Double protection is required anytime noise levels exceed 104 dbA.
Noise monitoring will be accomplished by field determination - if a person speaking in a normal voice cannot be heard at a minimum three-foot distance - hearing protection will be required.
6.6.3.2 Heat Stress
Heat stress is one of the most common (and potentially serious) illnesses that affect site workers. When site personnel are engaged in operations in hot environments, a number of
6-20 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
physiological responses can occur which may seriously affect the health and safety of the workers. These affects can be eliminated or controlled through the use of a comprehensive heat stress prevention and monitoring program.
Individuals vary in their susceptibility and degree of response to stress induced by increased body heat. Heat stress can result in health effects ranging from transient heat fatigue to serious illness or death. Heat stress is cause by a number of interacting factors including environmental condition, clothing, workload, and the individual characteristics of the worker. Because heat stress is probably one of the most common (and potentially serious) illnesses at MEC sites, regular monitoring and other preventive precautions are vital. Factors that may predispose a worker to heat stress include:
• Lack of physical fitness
• Lack of acclimatization to hot environments
• Degree of hydration
• Obesity
• Current health (i.e., having an infection, chronic disease, diarrhea, etc.)
• Alcohol or drug use
• The worker’s age and sex
The amount and type of PPE worn influence the worker’s heat tolerance. PPE adds weight and bulk, severely reduces the body’s access to normal heat exchange mechanisms (evaporation, convection, and radiation), and increases energy expenditure. Therefore, when selecting PPE, each item’s benefit should be carefully evaluated in relation to its potential for increasing the risk of heat stress. Once PPE is selected, the safe duration of work/rest periods should be determined based on:
• Anticipated work rate
• Ambient temperature and other environmental factors
• Type of protective ensemble
• Individual worker characteristics and fitness
Sweating does not cool the body unless moisture is removed from the body. The use of PPE reduces the body's ability to eliminate large quantities of heat because the evaporation of sweat is decreased. The body's effort to maintain an acceptable temperature may become impaired and this may cause heat stress. Increased body temperature and physical discomfort also promote irritability and a decreased attention to the performance of hazardous tasks. At Fort Ord sites, Level D PPE will be utilized, thus providing minimal increase in the potential for heat stress. Level D PEP is defined as standard work clothes with long pants, hard-hat (when overhead hazard is present), and safety boots (when working around heavy equipment).
6-21 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.6.3.2.1 Early Symptoms of Heat Stress The early symptoms used to recognize heat related illnesses include:
• Decline in task performance
• Lack of coordination
• Decline in alertness
• Unsteady walk
• Excessive fatigue
• Muscle cramps
• Dizziness
6.6.3.2.2 Heat Stress Disorders The following paragraphs outline the major heat related illness that may result from exposure to high heat environments, which include heat rash, fainting, heat cramps heat exhaustion, and heat stroke. For the purpose of this program, reference to “liquids” will indicate the use of water or an electrolyte replacement solution.
6.6.3.2.2.1 Heat Rash Heat rash is caused by continuous exposure to heat and humid air and is aggravated by wet chafing clothing. This condition can decrease a worker’s ability to tolerate hot environments. Symptoms include a mild red rash, especially in areas of the body that sweat heavily. Treatment of heat rash entails decreasing the amount of time in protective gear and using baby powder to absorb moisture and decrease chafing. Maintain good personal hygiene standards and change into dry clothes as needed.
6.6.3.2.2.2 Heat Cramps Heat cramps are caused by a profuse rate of perspiration that is not balanced by adequate fluid and electrolyte intake. The occurrence of heat related cramps are often an indication that excessive water and electrolyte loss has occurred, which can further develop into heat exhaustion or heat stroke. Symptoms include acute, painful spasms of voluntary muscles such as the back, abdomen and extremities. Treatment involves moving victim to a cool area and loosening restrictive clothing. Stretch and massage affected muscles to increase blood flow to the area. Have patient drink one to two cups of liquids immediately with fluid intake repeated every twenty minutes thereafter. Consult with physician if condition does not improve. If available, an electrolyte replacement solution should be consumed.
6.6.3.2.2.3 Heat Exhaustion Heat exhaustion occurs due to the large fluid and salt loss from profuse sweating. It is a state of very definite weakness or exhaustion caused by increased stress on various organs to meet
6-22 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
increased demands to cool the body from excessive loss of fluids. This condition leads to inadequate blood supply and cardiac insufficiency. Heat exhaustion is less dangerous than heat stroke, but nonetheless must be treated. If allowed to go untreated, heat exhaustion can quickly develop into heat stroke. Symptoms include: pale and moist skin, profuse perspiration, and extreme weakness. Body temperature is basically normal or slightly elevated. The worker's pulse is weak and rapid, and breathing is often shallow. The individual may have a headache or experience nausea. Treatment for heat exhaustion involves removing the individual to a cool, air-conditioned place, loosen the persons clothing and elevate victim’s feet. Consult physician, especially in severe cases. Have patient drink one to two cups of liquids immediately, and repeat every twenty minutes thereafter. Total liquid consumption should be about one to two gallons per day. If the signs and symptoms of heat exhaustion do not subside, or become more severe, medical attention will be required.
6.6.3.2.2.4 Heat Stroke Heat stroke is an acute and dangerous reaction to heat stress caused by failure of the heat regulating mechanisms of the body. The failure of the individual’s temperature control system causes the perspiration system to stop working correctly. When this occurs, the body core temperature rises very rapidly to a point (+105°F) where brain damage and death will result if the person is not cooled quickly. The victim’s skin is hot and often dry. Other symptoms include confusion; extremely high body temperature; rapid respiratory and pulse rate; delirium; convulsions; unconsciousness or coma.
Cool the victim immediately. If the body temperature is not brought down quickly, permanent brain damage or death may result. The victim should be moved to a shady area; he should lie down and keep head elevated. Cool the victim by either sponging or immersing the victim in very cool water to reduce the core temperature to a safe level (<102°F). If conscious, give the victim cool liquids to drink. Observe the victim and obtain immediate medical help. Do not give the victim caffeinated or alcoholic beverages. Heat stroke is considered a medical emergency. Medical help should be summoned immediately. EARLY RECOGNITION AND TREATMENT OF HEAT STROKE ARE THE ONLY MEANS OF PREVENTING BRAIN DAMAGE OR DEATH.
6.6.3.2.3 Preventive Measures Proper training and preventive measures will help avert serious illness and loss of work productivity. Preventing heat stress is particularly important because once someone suffers from heat exhaustion, that person may become predisposed to additional heat injuries. In order to avoid heat related illnesses, proper preventive measures will be implemented whenever environmental conditions dictate the need, normally whenever the temperature reaches at least 75°F. These preventive measures represent the minimal steps to be taken and will include the following procedures:
• The UXOSO will examine each site worker prior to the start of daily operations, and periodically throughout the day, to determine the individuals susceptible to heat induced stress. Evidence of extreme dehydration or may require the UXOSO to restrict the worker’s activities until such time as the worker is fit for duty. Personnel identified as being at high risk (obese, using diuretics, etc) for heat stress that are allowed to participate in site operations will be monitored frequently by the UXOSO.
6-23 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Site workers will be trained to recognize and treat heat-related illnesses. This training will include recognizing the signs, symptoms of heat stress disorders and knowing proper treatment.
• In order to maintain workers’ body fluids at normal levels, workers will be encouraged to drink, as a minimum, approximately sixteen ounces of liquids prior to start of work in the morning, after lunch and prior to leaving the site at the conclusion of the day’s activities. Disposable four (4) to twelve (12) ounce cups and liquids will be provided on site. Liquids to be provided will include water and an electrolyte replacement solution, with the intake of each being equally divided. Liquids containing caffeine are to be avoided.
• When ambient conditions and site workload requirements dictate, as determined by the UXOSO, workers will be required to drink a minimum of 16 to 32 ounces of liquids during each rest cycle. The normal thirst mechanism is not sensitive enough to ensure that enough water will be ingested to replace lost sweat. When heavy sweating occurs, workers shall be encouraged to drink even though they may not be thirsty.
• A shelter or shaded area will be provided where workers may be protected from direct sunlight during rest periods.
• Monitoring of ambient or physiological heat stress indices will be conducted to allow prevention and early detection of heat induced stress. Monitoring will be conducted in accordance with applicable paragraphs of this SSHP.
• Site workers will be given time to acclimatize to site work conditions, temperature, protective equipment, and workload. Acclimatization is the adaptive process that results in a decrease of the physiological response produced by the application of a constant environmental stress. On initial exposure to a hot environment, there is an impaired ability to work and evidence of physiological strain. If the exposure is repeated on several successive days, there is a gradual return of the ability to work and a decrease in physiological strain. Acclimatization usually takes two to six days of continued work in hot environments, and allows the worker’s body to become adjusted to this level and type of work. This process involves a gradual increase in the workload over the required period, the length of which depends upon the nature of the work performed, the ambient temperatures, and the individual’s susceptibility to heat stress. The results of acclimatization include: subjective discomfort practically disappears; body temperature and heart rate are lower; there is a more stable blood pressure; and the sweat is more profuse and dilute.
• Work schedules will be adjusted as follows:
− Modify work/rest schedules according to monitoring requirements.
− Mandate work slowdowns as needed.
− Rotate personnel: alternate job functions to minimize over-stress or overexertion at one task.
− Add additional personnel to work teams.
6-24 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
− Perform work during cooler hours of the day if possible.
• Workers will be encouraged to achieve and maintain an optimum level of physical fitness. Increased physical fitness will allow workers to better tolerate and respond to hot environments and heavy workloads. In comparison to an unfit person, a fit person will have: less physiological strain, a lower heart rate and body temperature, and a more efficient sweating mechanism.
• Alcohol should not be consumed in a hot environment because the loss of body fluids increases the risk of heat stress.
6.6.3.2.4 Heat Stress Monitoring
Heat stress prevention is important, because once a person suffers from heat stroke or heat exhaustion, that person may be more likely to have additional heat-related illnesses. The signs and symptoms of heat stress are presented in Table 6-3. Table 6-4 presents a suggested schedule for the heat stress monitoring. The following steps to prevent heat stress should be followed:
• Provide air conditioned shelter or shaded areas to protect personnel during rest periods.
• Urge workers to drink water to keep their body fluids at normal levels.
• Adjust work schedules according to monitoring requirements and performing work during cooler hours of the day. The normal work schedule consists of a 10-hour day, four days per week.
• Provide accurate verbal and written instructions, frequent training programs, and other information about heat stress and strain.
• Permit self-limitation of exposures and encourage co-worker observation to detect signs and symptoms of heat strain in others.
• Counsel and monitor those who take medications that may compromise normal cardiovascular, blood pressure, body temperature regulation, renal, or sweat gland functions; and those who abuse or are recovering from the abuse of alcohol or other intoxicants.
• Encourage healthy life-styles, ideal body weight and electrolyte balance.
• Adjust expectations of those returning to work after absence from hot exposure situations and encourage consumption of salty foods (with approval of physician if on a salt-restricted diet).
• Ensure workers have current medical screening to identify those susceptible to systemic heat injury.
6-25 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
TABLE 6-3 a SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF HEAT STRESS
HEAT RASH may result from continuous exposure to heat or humid air.
HEAT CRAMPS are caused by heavy sweating with inadequate electrolyte replacement. Signs and symptoms include:
• muscle spasms
• pain in the hands, feet, and abdomen
HEAT EXHAUSTION occurs from increased stress on various body organs including inadequate blood circulation due to cardiovascular insufficiency or dehydration. Signs and symptoms include:
• pale, cool, moist skin
• heavy sweating
• dizziness
• nausea
• fainting
HEAT STROKE is the most serious form of heat stress. Temperature regulation fails and the body temperature rises to critical levels. Immediate action must be taken to cool the body before serious injury and death occur. Competent medical help must be obtained. Signs and symptoms are:
• red, hot, usually dry skin • lack of or reduced perspiration
• nausea • dizziness and confusion • strong, rapid pulse
• coma
6-26 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
a NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA, 1985. TABLE 6-4 SUGGESTED FREQUENCY FOR MONITORING a FIT AND ACCLIMATIZED WORKERS
Adjusted Normal Work Impermeable
c Temperatureb Ensemble Ensemble 90ºF (32.2ºC) After each 45 After each 15
or above minutes of work minutes of work
87.5º-90ºF After each 60 After each 30
(30.8º- 32.2ºC) minutes of work minutes of work
82.5º-87.5ºF After each 90 After each 60
(28.1º- 30.8ºC) minutes of work minutes of work
77.5º-82.5ºF After each 120 After each 90
(25.3º- 28.1ºC) minutes of work minutes of work
72.5º-77.5ºF After each 150 After each 120
(22.5º- 25.3ºC) minutes of work minutes of work
Reference NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA, 1985. a For work levels of 250 kilocalories/hour. b Calculate the adjusted air temperature (ta adj) by using the equation: ta adj = ta + (13 x percent sunshine) where: ta is the air temperature in ºF. Measure air temperature (ta) with a standard mercury-in-glass thermometer, with the bulb shielded from radiant heat. Estimate percent sunshine by judging what percent time the sun is not covered by clouds that are thick enough to produce a shadow (100 percent sunshine = no cloud cover and a sharp, distinct shadow; zero percent sunshine = no shadows.) c A normal work ensemble consists of cotton coveralls or other cotton clothing with long sleeves and pants.
6-27 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
For temperatures above 70°F (21°C), heat stress monitoring will be initiated for workers wearing semi-permeable or impermeable clothing. The monitoring will be as follows:
Heart rate: Count the radial pulse during a 30-second period as early as possible in the rest period.
• If the heart rate exceeds 110 beats per minute at the beginning of the rest period, shorten the next work cycle by one-third and keep the rest period the same.
• If the heart rate still exceeds 110 beats per minute at the next rest period, shorten the following work cycle by one-third.
6-28 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.6.3.3 Cold Related Illnesses If work on this project is conducted in the winter months, thermal injury due to cold exposure can become a problem for field personnel. Work will cease under unusually hazardous conditions (e.g., wind-chill less than 0°F, or wind-chill less than 10°F with precipitation). Systemic cold exposure is referred to as hypothermia. Local cold exposure is generally labeled frostbite. Recognition of the symptoms of cold related illness will be discussed during the health and safety briefing conducted prior to the onset of site activities. Refer to the 2000 American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Threshold Limit Values (TLV) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices for additional information on cold stress prevention, monitoring, and protective measures.
6.6.3.3.1 Hypothermia Hypothermia is a life-threatening condition in which the core body temperature falls below 95°F. Hypothermia can occur at temperatures above freezing particularly, when the skin or clothing becomes wet. During exposure to cold, maximum shivering occurs when the core temperature falls to 95°F. As hypothermia progresses, depression of the central nervous system becomes increasingly more severe. This accounts for the progressive signs and symptoms ranging from sluggishness and slurred speech to disorientation and eventually unconsciousness (see Table 6.5). The ability to sustain metabolic rate and to reduce skin blood flow is diminished by fatigue. Thus, fatigue increases the risk of severe hypothermia by decreasing metabolic heat. Additionally, because blood flow through the skin is reduced to conserve heat, the skin and underlying tissues become more susceptible to frostbite.
Table 6-5 Progressive Clinical Symptoms of Hypothermia
Core Temperature (°F) Clinical Signs 95° Maximum shivering 87° - 89° Consciousness clouded; blood pressure becomes difficult to obtain; pupils dilated 84° - 86° Progressive loss of consciousness; muscular rigidity; respiratory rate decreases 79° Victim rarely conscious 70° - 72° Maximum risk of ventricular fibrillation
6.6.3.3.2 Frostbite Frostbite is both the general and medical term given to areas of cold injury. Unlike hypothermia, frostbite rarely occurs unless environmental temperatures are less than freezing and usually less than 20°F. Frostbite injuries occur most commonly on the distal parts of the body (nose, earlobes, hands, and feet) that are subject to intense vasoconstriction. The three general categories of frostbite are:
6-29 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Frostnip - A whitened area of the skin, which is slightly burning or painful.
• Superficial frostbite - Waxy, white skin with a firm sensation but with some resiliency. Symptomatically feels “warm” to the victim with a notable cessation of pain.
• Deep frostbite - Tissue damage deeper than the skin, at times, down to the bone. The skin is cold, numb and hard.
6.6.3.3.3 Preventing Cold Related Illnesses Educate worker to recognize the symptoms of frostbite and hypothermia.
• Ensure the availability of an enclosed, heated environment within the vehicles. The nearest heated environment will be the interior of the vehicles at the site.
• Ensure the availability of dry changes of clothes.
• Record temperature readings.
• Ensure the availability of warm beverages, preferably non-caffeinated.
6.6.3.3.4 Cold Weather Monitoring and Hypothermia
Hypothermia is defined as a decrease in the body core temperature below 96°F (36°C). The following symptoms appear (in the order listed) as the body loses heat faster than it can be produced:
• Voluntary exercise to stay warm
• Involuntary exercise to stay warm (shivering)
• Loss of judgment and reasoning abilities
• Feelings of apathy, listlessness, and indifference
• Loss of control of the hands
The following steps should be taken to prevent hypothermia:
• Educate workers to recognize the symptoms of frostbite and hypothermia
• Identify and limit known risk factors
• Ensure the availability of dry changes of clothes
• Develop a capability for temperature recording at the site
• Ensure the availability of warm drinks
6-30 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Monitoring the oral temperature on the job site can also be used to defend against hypothermia. This should be done at the supervisor’s discretion based on changes in the worker’s performance or mental status, or when the wind-chill is less than 20°F (-7°C), or a wind-chill is less than 30°F (- 2°C) with precipitation. Any worker developing moderate hypothermia, defined as a core temperature of 92° (34°C), may not return to work for 48 hours. 6.6.3.4 Fire Hazards
Although fires and explosions may arise spontaneously they are more commonly the result of carelessness during the conduct of site activities, such as moving drums, mixing/bulking of site chemicals and during refueling of heavy or hand held equipment. Some potential causes of explosion and fires include:
• Mixing of incompatible chemicals which cause reactions that spontaneously ignite due to the production of both flammable vapors and heat;
• Ignition of explosive or flammable chemical gases or vapors by external ignition sources;
• Ignition of materials due to oxygen enrichment;
• Agitation of shock or friction-sensitive compounds; and
• Sudden release of materials under pressure.
6.6.3.4.1 Fire Prevention Explosions and fires not only pose the obvious hazards of intense heat, open flames, smoke inhalation and flying objects, but may also cause the release of toxic chemicals into the environment. Such releases can threaten both personnel on-site and members of the general public living or working nearby. Site personnel involved with potentially flammable material or operations must follow the guidelines listed below and EM 385-1-1, Section 9, to prevent fires and explosions:
• Potentially explosive/flammable atmospheres involving gases or vapors will be monitored using a combustible gas indicator.
• Prior to initiation of site activities involving explosive/flammable materials all potential ignition sources must be removed or extinguished.
• Non-sparking and explosion-proof equipment must be used whenever the potential for ignition of flammable/explosive gases/vapors/liquids exists.
• Dilution or induced ventilation may be used to decrease the airborne concentration of explosive/flammable atmospheres.
• Smoking is restricted to designated areas on MEC work sites.
• Flammable and/or combustible liquids must be handled only in approved and properly labeled metal safety cans equipped with flash arresters and self-closing lids.
6-31 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Transfer of flammable liquids from one metal container to another will be done only when the containers are electrically interconnected (bonded).
• The motors of all equipment being fueled will be shut off during the fueling operations.
• Metal drums used for storing flammable/combustible liquids will be equipped with self- closing safety faucets, vent bung fittings, grounding cables and drip pans and will be stored outside buildings in an area approved by the UXOSO.
6.6.3.4.2 Fire Protection The following safe work practices are to be used to protect against fires:
• Vehicles and equipment shall not be fueled while running.
• Flammable/combustible liquid storage areas have at least one 4A:20:B:C fire extinguisher located within 25-75 feet and marked with the appropriate fire symbol and no smoking signs.
• All vehicles used in the transport of explosives are equipped with two fire extinguishers of not less than 2A:10B:C or higher, with one fire extinguisher mounted/placed inside the cab of the vehicle and one mounted outside, by the driver’s side door, if possible.
• Temporary offices will be equipped with a fire extinguisher of not less than 10:ABC.
• At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 4A:20B:C will be located at each work site.
6.6.3.5 Ionizing Radiation
No radiological hazards are anticipated during operations at Fort Ord. If any radioactive sources are encountered by Parsons’ personnel work at that location will be stopped and the PHSO will be contacted to provide guidance on proper protective measures.
6.6.4 Chemical Hazards
Non-CWM chemical hazards, such as lead contaminated soils or lead-based paint, may be anticipated at former small arms ranges or during demolition of existing structures. The Lead Management Plan, Appendix J, provides procedures for minimizing lead hazards onsite. Should contaminated soils be encountered, the PHSO will be contacted to provide guidance on appropriate safety precautions.
6.6.5 Chemical Warfare Munitions
Chemical Munitions, Chemical Warfare Material or Radiological Contamination is not anticipated to be encountered during operations on Fort Ord; however, should personnel encounter a suspected toxic chemical munitions, Chemical Warfare Material or any situation where radiological contamination could become a concern, all personnel will immediately withdraw upwind to a safe location outside of the fragmentation zone of the type ordnance located and
6-32 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
contact the CESPK Safety Specialist who will notify the appropriate agencies. The site will be secure with two UXO Technicians until the arrival of the Technical Escort Unit (TEU) or Military Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD). Parsons will assist the TEU as directed. Decontamination station setup and operation will be performed by fire department hazardous response personnel.
6.6.5.1 Ordnance Fillers
In the event of locating a Livens Projector 4-inch Stokes or a 4.2-inch mortar and positive identification of the filler remains unknown, the item will be left in place awaiting disposition by TEU who will identify the filler prior to final disposition.
6.6.6 Task Hazard Analysis
Parsons has analyzed the scope of work tasking to determine the work risk hazards associated with each task. The tasks consist of direct tasks and implied tasks, or sub tasks, to accomplish the work. Table 6.6 presents each activity, the associated hazards, and the control measures planned to prevent accidents.
6.7 MEDICAL MONITORING
Personnel engaged in field activities must be enrolled in a medical surveillance program as required by 29 CFR Part 1910.120(f). Doctors on Duty, 2260 North Fremont Street, (831) 372- 6700, is used to provide the medical examinations for Parsons’ personnel. Qualisys Medical Network Services, 4501 Circle 75 Parkway, Suite C-3250, Atlanta, Georgia, (770) 226-9944, provides medical surveillance and records management. The content of the examination must be designed to determine each individual's fitness for duty, including ability to work while wearing protective equipment (e.g., respirator, impermeable clothing, etc.).
Personnel performing on-site field activities on this project must present to the UXOSO a physician's certification of completion of a comprehensive medical monitoring examination within the 12 months prior to the beginning of field activities. Additionally, the UXOSO will ensure that workers remain current in their medical monitoring throughout the duration of the project. Copies of employees' Health Status Reports will be available to the COR upon request.
6-33 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California
Activity Hazards Control Measures Brush Clearing • Potential UXO/OE. • Be alert, Mark and report all OE (Manual) • Wildlife, insects, poison located. oak • Be alert. Watch for snakes; do • Slips, trips and falls not handle wildlife. • Cuts and lacerations from • Use insect repellent and barrier using cutting tools and cream. Change clothing daily. brush • Be alert. Watch for trip hazards; • Noise hazard from gas look where you are walking. powered equipment • Wear Level D PPE include; eye, • Heat/ Cold Stress hearing protection, and gloves • Sunburn/Windburn when operating powered • Thunderstorms equipment. • Use Kevlar chaps and steel-toed boots when using chainsaw. • Dress for the weather. Use sunscreen if necessary. • Buddy system monitoring. • Do not work during electrical storms.
Brush Clearing • Potential MEC • Conduct a thorough surface (Mechanical) • Noise hazard from clearance and use equipment mechanized equipment. with low ground pressure in • Thunderstorms areas where surface ordnance is • Dust not anticipated • Armor vehicle to protect the operator from an unintentional detonation, especially in areas of heavy UXO concentration. • Wear hearing protection as required. • Be alert, have UXO mark and report all OE located. • Have UXO escort mark all physical hazards with caution tape. • Buddy system monitoring. • Do not work during electrical storms.
6-34 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Chipping of resultant • Getting caught in feed • Chipper will be manned by two brush and limbs from mechanism. personnel, one on either side. manual brush cutting • Poison oak contamination. • Feeders will use care not to place body parts onto feed table when • Scrapes, cuts, and scratches chipper is operating. from limbs and brush. • Care will be exercised not to • Noise level. reach past the “SAFE” point established on the feed table/chute. • A push stick of material consumable by the chipper will be available, one on each side of the chipper, for pushing brush into the chipper when necessary. • No one will approach within 50 feet of operating chipper while in operation without proper PPE and hearing protection. • Level D PPE will be IAW the SSHP and the Chipper SOP.
Removing and replacing • Potential MEC • Use UXO qualified escort in barbed wire and chain uncleared areas. • Slips, trips and falls link fence. • UXO safety precautions IAW the • Scrapes, cuts and WP and SSHP. lacerations from fence material and cutting tools. • Be aware of terrain and overhead vegetation. • Wildlife, insects, and poison oak • Watch for wildlife and stinging insects. • Heat/cold stress • Use leather gloves and safety • Sunburn/windburn glasses when handling fence materials. • Use barrier creams and decon as needed. • Dress appropriately for weather. • Use sunscreen as needed.
6-35 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Surveying, establishing • Potential MEC • UXO safety precautions follow boundaries and grids. • Unplanned detonation. the PWP and SSHP. Installing stakes and • Wildlife. • Watch for snakes; do not handle monuments • Slips, trips, and falls. wildlife. Use insect repellent. • Cuts and lacerations from Avoid toxic plants. brush and trees. • Wear level D PPE to include eye protection and gloves when digging. Be alert, watch for trip hazards. • Dress for weather; use sunscreen, insect repellent/ barrier cream as necessary. • No smoking except in designated areas. • UXO personnel will escort non- UXO personnel at all times. Mark and avoid UXO. • Only UXO personnel will handle UXO. • Do not subject UXO to heat, shock, or friction. Check location with magnetometer prior to driving stakes. • Wear Level D PPE, eye protection and gloves while pounding stakes.
6-36 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Transportation, storage, • Vehicle accident • Load/unload vehicle in and handling of • Fire, designated areas. explosives/UXO. • Unplanned detonation. • Use authorized explosive route. Preparing and placing • Slips, trips, and falls. • Placard vehicle. charges. Detonation in • Heat/ Cold Stress. • No personnel in cargo place. • Noise, fragmentation, compartment. debris • No explosives in passenger compartments. • Observe explosives transportation compatibility requirement. • Do not fuel when loaded. • No smoking. • Shut vehicle off and block wheels when loading. • Block/ brace secure explosives/UXO. • Use demolition Procedures IAW Work Plan, EODB/TM/TO 60a- 1-1-31, and SOP’s. • Maintain Exclusion Zone, distance, tamping, personnel shelters, and control of shot size. • Be aware of obstacles- watch footing. • Level D PPE.
6-37 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Excavating, Grading, • Potential MEC unplanned • Only UXO Technicians will Backfilling, Using Earth detonation excavate or handle UXO. Moving Machinery • Slips, trips and falls • Personnel in the immediate (EMM), and Hand • Scrapes and cuts vicinity of UXO operations will digging. • Heat/ Cold Stress be kept to the minimum • Sunburn/ Windburn necessary for safe operations but • Unauthorized personnel no less than two UXO within the exclusion zone technicians. (EZ) • Only hand excavation will be • Excavation cave-in permitted within 1 foot of UXO. Do not subject UXO to heat, shock, or friction. Establish exclusion zone (EZ), post warning signs, and stop all UXO operations when Non-UXO trained personnel are in EZ. • EMM will be operated by trained, experienced personnel. UXO Technicians will operate heavy equipment when excavating UXO items. Remain outside of the reach of EMM while in operation (an arc defining the reach of the backhoe arm will be cut with the bucket on soft surfaces or spray painted on the ground surface). Workers must wear level D PPE with hard hat, eye protection, work gloves, hearing protection, and steel-toed footwear, when around EMM. Slope trenches when deeper than 5 feet (if workers are to enter excavation). Avoid obstacles when possible. Use buddy system monitoring.
6-38 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Excavating, Grading, • Potential MEC unplanned • When performing intrusive Backfilling, Using Earth detonation. digging of magnetic anomaly a Moving Machinery • Slips, Trips, and falls. minimum of a 200' EZ must be (EMM), and Hand Scrapes and cuts. established. digging (Continued) • Heat/ Cold Stress. • Look before backing; be aware of • Sunburn/ Windburn. personnel in the area. • Unauthorized personnel • Use ground guides when needed. within the EZ. • Be aware of terrain. • Excavation cave-in. • Dress appropriately for the weather. • Wear sunscreen, insect repellent, or poison oak barrier cream as necessary. • Wear level D PPE to include hard hat, hearing protection and safety-toed boots.
6-39 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Geophysical Survey • Potential MEC • Watch for, mark, and report all Operations • Slips, trips and falls OE located. • Wildlife, insects, poison • Watch for wildlife (snakes, oak insects, etc.) • Heat/cold stress • Wear insect repellant and barrier • Sunburn/windburn creams. • Change clothing daily. • Dress for the weather. • Use buddy system monitoring. • Use sunscreen, insect repellant, and poison oak barrier cream, as needed. • Be aware of terrain, footing and overhead hazards.
6-40 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Lead sampling of soils • Potential MEC • Use UXO escorts. • Slips trips and falls • Observe UXO precautions in • Lead exposure work plan and SSHP. • Wildlife • Be aware of terrain and overhead • Poison oak vegetation. • Insects • Utilize proper PPE. • Heat illness • Use proper decontamination procedures. • Lead Awareness Training. • Medical monitoring. • Avoid wildlife/ • Use sunscreen, insect repellant, or poison oak barrier cream, as necessary. • Increase fluid intake. • Use buddy system.
6-41 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Removal of Targets from • Potential MEC • Clear path of UXO and mark cleared an OE Site area to target to be removed.
• Perform a thorough visual inspection for
UXO in and around target prior to removal activities. • Perform initial movement of target remotely when possible.
• Inspect target after initial movement has
been completed.
• Inspect and certify target free of UXO and energetic materials prior to removal from the OE Site.
• Allow only necessary personnel within
the area for the operation.
• Observe UXO precautions in work plan and SSHP. • Crush and Pinch • Keep clear of moving equipment. Hazards • Do not allow personnel under a suspended load unless protected from falling objects. • Keep all personnel clear of wire ropes or chains during pulling or lifting of targets. • Do not exceed the equipment lifting capacities. • Inspect all rigging at proper intervals. • Display warning signs at entry points to work area. • Use material handling equipment to move where possible and practical. • Ensure all PPE is serviceable
6-42 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-6 (Continued) Hazard Analysis by Site Activity Fort Ord, California Activity Hazards Control Measures Removal of Targets from • Cuts, punctures and • Use material handling equipment to an OE Site, continue scratches from move where possible and practical. targets and debris • Use caution when handling range residue and scrap.
• Ensure all PPE is serviceable. • Provide protective chaps as needed for leg and arm protection.
• Provide protective chaps as needed for
leg and arm protection.
• Check targets and area near target for • Insect stings and insect nests prior to any removal bites activities.
• Observe heat illness precautions in work plan and SSHP. • Heat illness • Increase fluid intake.
• Use buddy system.
• Observe posted speeds • Driving patrol duties • Road conditions and • hazards Stay alert for changing road conditions • Avoid distractions while driving. Stay focused
• Wear seatbelts when vehicle is in
motion
• Stay alert for walkers, bicyclists and • Road obstructions joggers. • Look ahead for potential obstructions on the roadway.
• Scan areas adjacent to the road for
wildlife. Prepare to stop if wildlife is spotted. • Drive defensively. • Emergency • Ensure good communications. Situations • Report emergency situations and trespassers when necessary.
6-43 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.8 TRAINING
All personnel performing field activities at Fort Ord sites must have received 40 hours of initial HAZWOPER health and safety training (or have equivalent training) in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(3) and must be current in their refresher training. Site supervisors responsible for personnel engaged in field activities must have attended a site management training as required by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(4). All Parsons UXO personnel and the Parsons UXOSO working at this site must have completed Naval Explosive Ordnance Disposal (USNAVSCLEOD) training which details procedures for evaluation and disposal of MEC. At least one member of each field team must be current in first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) training. Copies of training certificates will be provided to the UXOSO.
6.8.1 Site Specific Training
In addition to the 40-hour initial training and 8-hour refresher training, site-specific training will be conducted. The UXOSO is responsible for developing a site-specific occupational hazard training that will be provided to all Parsons’ personnel and Parsons’ subcontractors prior to the start of field operations. This training will cover the following topics:
• Names of personnel responsible for site safety and health;
• Safe work practices;
• Site history;
• Safety, health, and other hazards at site;
• Work zones and other locations;
• Emergency procedures, evacuation routes, emergency phone numbers;
• Personal protective equipment for anticipated task;
• Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site;
• Blood borne pathogen; and
• Ordnance recognition and reporting.
6-44 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Prohibitions in areas and zones, including:
− Site layout; and
− Procedures for entry and exit of work areas and zones.
In addition, site specific training may include Lead Awareness Training, as required by the Lead Management Plan (Appendix J).
6.8.2 Tailgate Safety Meetings
The UXO Supervisor will conduct tailgate safety briefings for field personnel. This training must as a minimum cover the following topics:
• Tasks to be performed.
• Hazards that may be encountered, including their effects, how to recognize symptoms or monitor them, or danger signals.
• Emergency procedures (emergency equipment, emergency communications, and route to hospital).
• Rallying Points and safe refuge areas.
6.8.3 Supervisor Meetings
Weekly meetings will be held for all supervisors. The agenda will include the past week's operations, safety issues/problems, corrective actions required or taken, and the upcoming week's activities.
6.8.4 Training Documentation
The UXOSO will maintain copies of training certificates (HAZWOPER, Naval Ordnance School Certificate, and CPR/first aid) for personnel participating in field operations. The UXOSO will document site-specific initial training, lead awareness training, tailgate training/subjects, and any other special or additional training.
6.8.5 Hazard Communication Training
All project work will be conducted in accordance with standard policies for hazard communication (Attachment B). Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for any hazardous chemicals brought on site will be maintained at the field office. Employees that are exposed to hazardous chemicals brought to the site must receive training on:
• The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the work area.
• Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of the hazardous chemicals in the work area.
6-45 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• The measures a worker can take to protect themselves from these hazards.
6.8.6 Blood borne Pathogen Training
Personnel working on this project will be provided bloodborne pathogen training review. This training will be given initially at the same time as the site-specific initial training (paragraph 6.8.1). The topics covered in the training will include the following:
• An overview of the Blood borne Pathogen Standard;
• Epidemiology and symptoms of blood borne diseases;
• Modes of transmission of blood borne pathogens;
• Discussion of Exposure Control;
• Tasks that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials;
• Review of the methods that will prevent or reduce exposure;
• Selection and use of PPE; and
• Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up program.
6.8.7 Visitor Training
All visitors to the site will be given a health and safety briefing prior to gaining access to the site. Following this briefing, visitors will be asked to sign SSHP - Plan Acceptance Forms (Attachment A). The UXOSO will also ensure that visitors have applicable health and safety equipment, medical surveillance, and training for the activities/areas they will be visiting. Should questions arise as to whether or not specific training or equipment is needed - the PHSO will be contacted.
6.8.8 Ergonomic Training
An Industrial Training Program will be implemented and documented in accordance with CALOSHA and California Code of Regulations.
6.9 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Personal protective equipment required at the site will be at a level necessary to protect personnel. No contamination is anticipated, therefore, a level D ensemble will be worn.
6.9.1 Level D Protective Ensemble
The minimum level of protection for all personnel at this site is level D. A level D ensemble consists of:
• Short or long sleeve coveralls or work clothing
6-46 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Kevlar chaps (when operating chainsaw)
• Leather work boots (steel toe if a foot hazard exists [brush clearing and excavation])
• Safety glasses or goggles when an eye hazard exists (brush clearing and hand or mechanical excavation operations]
• Hard hat, when a head hazard exists (brush clearing and around heavy equipment)
• Work gloves, leather or rubber as appropriate
• Hearing protection when working around heavy equipment or powered hand tools
• Respirator when clearing/grubbing rodent nests (APR with N-100 cartridge)
• Sun block and insect repellant as needed
• Demolition operations PPE
• Reflective safety vest usage
6.9.2 Upgrading PPE
The level of protection is based on what is known about the site. Protection levels may change as site conditions change. The UXOSO monitors site conditions and provides information to the PHSO and PM as necessary. The UXOSO may increase the levels of protection when necessary but cannot downgrade them without approval from PHSO. PPE requirements specific to lead hazards are provided by the Lead Management Plan (Appendix J).
6.10 SITE CONTROL
The UXOSO will coordinate access control and security on site. Due to the hazardous nature of MEC only authorized personnel will be allowed in the exclusion zone (EZ). The EZ is the work site, encompassing an area large enough to prevent personnel injuries as a result of MEC operations. The boundary of the EZ will be appropriately identified. During intrusive operations the boundary will be established by the UXOSO based on minimum separation distance. The MSD is the minimum separation distance for unrelated personnel given unintentional detonation of conventional ordnance items. The MSD for all unrelated personnel for an unintentional detonation shall be determined by the greatest distance 200 feet, the K50 distance, or the maximum fragment throw distance. During intrusive operations only essential trained personnel are allowed in the EZ.
Visitors must check-in at the field office in the Support Zone (SZ) to gain access to work sites. The UXOSO or a designee will escort visitors to and from work sites. The SZ is the administrative area at the field office where operations and support equipment are located. During all operations on site the field supervisors can cease operations if unescorted personnel are observed within the operating area. During work hours Parsons’ personnel provide security at the site. Equipment is returned to the SZ and secured at the end of the workday.
6-47 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Representatives from regulatory agencies are permitted to enter the site at any time during business hours or any other reasonable times with an escort. Site controls to ensure their safety are as follows:
• Eating, drinking and smoking are prohibited except in designated areas in the EZ/SZ.
• Hazardous MEC operations in the EZ cease if non UXO trained personnel are present.
• UXO trained personnel must escort all authorized visitors to the site.
• All personnel, to include visitors, entering the site are in the proper PPE.
• The UXOSO maintains the site entry control log to ensure accurate accounting of personnel.
• The UXOSO provides visitor training (paragraph 6.8.7). All personnel acknowledge this briefing by signing the SSHP Plan Acceptance Form.
In the case of an emergency, personnel will exit the site and move to the designated safe area. The safe area will be located upwind of the site. The UXOSO will determine the severity of the emergency. If the emergency warrants site evacuation the FOM will notify the Fort Ord Safety Office.
6.11 DECONTAMINATION AND PERSONNEL HYGIENE
In general, no hazardous, toxic, or radiological waste materials are anticipated, thus decontamination for constituents will not be required. However, entry into sites with suspected lead hazards will require decontamination per procedures defined in the Lead Management Plan (Appendix J). Site sanitation will be established and maintained in compliance with 29 CFR 1926.51 and EM385-1-1, Section 2.
6.11.1 Potable Water
An adequate supply of drinkable water will be provided on-site during work activities.
6.11.2 Toilet Facilities
As the Fort Ord work sites are not provided with a sanitary sewer system, temporary toilet facilities will be used. Each temporary toilet will be naturally lighted, ventilated and lockable from the inside. Toilets will be provided for employees according to table 6.7.
6.11.3 Washing Facilities
Washing facilities in the EZ will consist of water containers, buckets, soap and drying towels. Workers exiting the EZ must wash hands and face prior to eating, drinking or smoking.
6-48 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-7 Minimum Number of Facilities
Number of Employees Number of Facilities
20 or fewer employees One toilet with seat. One toilet with seat and one urinal per forty More than 20, less than 200 employees employees. More than 200 employees One toilet with seat and one urinal per fifty employees.
6.12 ENVIRONMENTAL AND PERSONAL MONITORING
Exposure to hazardous airborne substances is anticipated only in areas where lead hazards may exist (i.e. small arms ranges, or during structure demolition). Exposure assessment monitoring requirements are provided by the Lead Management Plan.
6.13 EMERGENCY RESPONSE AND CONTINGENCY PROCEDURES
The frequency and severity of emergency situations can be dramatically reduced through proper implementation of the SSHP. However, if an emergency does occur, quick, decisive action will be required since delays in minutes can create or escalate life-threatening situations. In an emergency situation, site personnel involved in emergency response and rescue must be prepared to respond immediately and all required equipment must be on hand, in proper working order and ready to use. To ensure rapid, effective response to a site emergency, the procedures and contingency plans outlined in this section will be implemented prior to and during the conduct of any site activities involving exposure to safety and health hazards.
6.13.1 Identifying Potential Emergencies
Contingency plans for responding to the potential emergency situations have been developed and are presented below. Potential emergencies that may occur include:
• Injury or illness
• Fire/explosion
• Inclement weather
6.13.2 Emergency Response Responsibilities
In the event of an emergency, the UXOSO will assume the responsibility of being the On Scene Incident Commander (OSIC). The alternate person to assume this role, in the event that the UXOSO is unavailable or incapacitated, will be the FOM. The OSIC will have the responsibility of directing all on-site and off-site response personnel, and will, as soon as possible, advise the CESPK Safety Specialist of the emergency situation. Upon arrival of First Responders, i.e. Fire
6-49 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Department and upon determination that no ordnance or explosives hazard exists, the role of OSIC will be turned over to the senior responding member of the fire department.
6.13.3 On-Site Emergency Response Services
Parsons personnel will provide first aid treatment for minor injuries up to the limits of their qualifications and training. At least two people per team will be First Aid and CPR certified. If necessary the OSIC will contact medical personnel to determine if additional treatment is required. If further treatment is required the Fire Department providing fire services to Fort Ord will be notified and the injured person will be transported to the Community Hospital of the Monterey Peninsula (CHOMP). If transport by the American Medical Response ambulance is required, an escort will meet the ambulance at the Fort Ord gate and guide them to the accident site.
6.13.4 Off-Site Emergency Response Services
Off-site emergency response services may include local fire and law enforcement personnel. Emergency phone numbers for off-site response organizations are presented in table 6.8.
6.13.5 Route to Hospital
The evacuation route map to the CHOMP from Fort Ord is presented as Figure 6-7. The map will be kept in all vehicles. Directions for evacuation are printed with the figure.
6-50 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 6-8: Directions to: Community Hospital of Monterey Peninsula
23625 Holman Highway, Monterey, CA 93940 (831) 372-6106
Access CA- 1 from Seaside or Sand City CA-1 S becomes CA-1 S/CA-68 W. Take the 68 West exit towards Asilomar. The hospital will be on the right.
6-51 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 6-9 Emergency Contacts Emergency Contact Telephone Number
Presido of Monterey Fire Department/Paramedics 831-242-7701 MEDEVAC, Cal Star 1-800-252-5050
Community Hospital of the Monterey Peninsula (831) 372-6160 Santa Clara Valley Medical Center (831) 885-5000
American Medical Response (831) 655-4040 Fort Ord Fire Department (831) 242-7701
Fort Ord Post Police (831) 242-7853
Parsons PHSO-Tim Mustard (303) 764-8810
Parsons Program Manager-Gary W. Griffith (831) 884-2309 Poison Control (800) 288-9999
6.13.6 Emergency Response Training
All site personnel will receive specialized training that will be given by the UXOSO prior to initiating site activities involving safety and health hazards. The content of this training will include the items listed below and will be documented using the site Training Log.
• Emergency chain-of-command
• Communication methods and signals
• Emergency equipment and PPE
• Removing injured personnel from the site;
• Emergency contacts, phone numbers and hospital route
6.13.7 Emergency Equipment
During intrusive operations, the UXOSO will maintain emergency equipment containing the following: an eyewash station, first-aid kit, a fire extinguisher, a portable cellular telephone and radio. Copies of pertinent figures including emergency phone numbers and maps to emergency facilities will be included with this equipment.
6-52 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
For non-intrusive operations, such as geophysical surveying, a first-aid kit, fire extinguisher, and radio will be provided.
6.13.7.1 Fire Extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and labeled to identify the labeling organization and the fire test and performance standard, will be provided at each individual job site. Extinguishers will be fully charged and in operable condition.
A dry-chemical type 4A:20B:C extinguisher will be available at each work site. Each piece of heavy equipment, site trailer, and each vehicle will be equipped with at least a 2A:10B:C fire extinguisher.
6.13.7.2 First Aid Equipment
First aid kits will be the 16 unit first aid kits and comply with ANSI Z308.1. A kit will be located in each field team vehicle and at the field office. Kits will be inspected on a weekly basis and missing components replaced immediately.
6.13.8 Communication Devices
Site communication devices will include portable, hand-held two-way radios for communication between teams and the field office. Cellular telephones will be used to communicate with off-site individuals and organizations. Radios will be distributed to the FOM, the UXOSO and to each field team supervisor. Cellular phones and Police/Fire radios will be available to the FOM, the UXOSO, and the SUXOS.
6.13.9 General Emergency Procedures
Emergency response procedures include all steps to be taken for notifying, evaluating, reacting to, documenting and following-up on a given emergency situation. To ensure all necessary elements are covered, the procedural steps outlined in this paragraph will be implemented for each emergency, regardless of its nature.
6.13.9.1 Notification
Once the OSIC has been informed of an emergency, the OSIC will alert site personnel to the presence of the emergency by radio. This will be done to:
• Notify personnel and to get their attention;
• Stop all work activity as required;
• Lower noise levels in order to speed and simplify communication; and
• Initiate emergency or evacuation procedures.
If on-site Parsons’ personnel or off-site emergency personnel are to enter the site in response to the emergency, the OSIC will to the extent possible, notify the response personnel about the nature of the emergency, to include:
6-53 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• What happened and when it happened;
• Where on-site the emergency situation occurred;
• Who is involved and, if possible, the cause of the emergency
• The extent of damage and what hazards may be involved; and
• What actions should be taken.
6.13.9.2 Assessing the Emergency
Available information related to the emergency and the on-site response capabilities should be evaluated and the information listed below obtained to the extent possible:
• What happened:
− Type of incident
• Casualties involved:
− Victims (number, location and condition)
− Treatment required
− Missing personnel
• Cause of incident
• Extent of damage to structures, equipment and terrain
• What could happen from this point
− Potential for fire or explosion
− Location of all personnel in relation to hazardous areas
− Potential for emergency affecting the general public or the environment
• What can be done to remedy the situation:
− Equipment and personnel needed for rescue and hazard mitigation
− Number of uninjured personnel available for response
− Resources available on-site
− Resources available from off-site response groups and agencies
6-54 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
− Time needed for off-site response resources to reach the site
− Hazards involved in rescue and response
6.13.9.3 Rescue and Response Actions
Based on the information collected during the emergency assessment, the general actions listed below will be taken, with some actions being conducted concurrently. No one will attempt emergency response/rescue until the situation has been assessed and the appropriate response outlined by the OSIC.
• Enforce the Buddy System:
− Allow no one to enter a hazardous area without a partner.
− Personnel in the EZ should be in line-of-sight or in communication with the OSIC or his designee.
• Survey Casualties:
− Locate all victims and assess their condition.
− Determine resources needed for stabilization and transport.
• Assess Existing and Potential Hazards and Determine:
− Whether and how to respond.
− The need for evacuation of site personnel and off-site population.
− The resources needed for evacuation and response.
• Contact the required off-site/on-site personnel or facilities, such as ambulance, fire department, police, etc.
• Allocate on-site personnel and equipment to rescue and initiate incident response operations.
• Assist in bringing the hazardous situation under complete or temporary control and use measures to prevent the spread of the emergency, i.e. control fire, secure site, etc.
• Remove or assist victims from the area.
• Stabilize:
− Administer any medical procedures that are necessary before the victims can be moved.
− Stabilize or permanently fix the hazardous condition.
6-55 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
− Attend to what caused the emergency and anything damaged or endangered by the emergency (e.g., drums, tanks).
• Transport using either on-site or off-site assets.
• Casualty Logging-Record who, time, destination and condition upon transport.
• Evacuate:
− Move site personnel to the rally point, a safe distance upwind of the incident.
− Monitor the incident for significant changes; the hazards may diminish, permitting personnel to re-enter the site, or hazards may increase and require public evacuation.
• Casualty Tracking-Record disposition, condition and location.
6.13.9.4 Post Emergency Follow-up
Before normal site activities can resume, the site and personnel must be prepared and equipped to handle another emergency. It is also imperative that all federal, state and local regulatory agencies be notified of the emergency. Therefore, the following activities must be conducted prior to resumption of site activities:
• Notify all appropriate governmental agencies as required (i.e. OSHA must be notified if there have been any fatalities or three or more personnel hospitalized)
• Restock and clean all equipment and supplies utilized or damaged in the emergency.
• UXOSO should conduct an accident investigation to determine the cause of the emergency and what preventative measures could be taken to ensure the emergency does not occur again.
• Complete the CESPK Accident Investigation Report (Eng Form 3394) and any other governmental or Parsons forms (Attachment A).
• Review and revise, as needed the SSHP to reflect the new procedures.
6.13.10 Contingency Plans
The following paragraphs contain emergency specific contingency plans. These plans outline the procedures for mitigating potential emergency situations identified in paragraph 16.13.1. Any changes to these plans must be approved by the PHSO.
6.13.10.1 Injury or Illness
In the event of an emergency involving personal injury or illness, immediate response will be key in preventing further harm and providing comfort to the affected party. When personnel are injured or overcome by illness, the following procedure will be followed:
6-56 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Upon notification of the occurrence and nature of the injury/illness the OSIC will, if deemed necessary, summon emergency personnel.
• The OSIC or SUXOS will assess the severity of the injury/illness and direct personnel to provide CPR/First aid as needed.
• If immediate life support is not required, or once the victim is stabilized, and if required, transport victim to the appropriate medical facility for further attention.
6.13.10.2 Fire or Explosion
6.13.10.2.1 Small Fire A small fire is defined as a fire that can be extinguished with a 4A:20B:C type fire extinguisher. In the event of a small fire, site personnel will take the following actions:
• All unnecessary personnel will be evacuated from the immediate area, to an upwind location.
• Extinguish the fire using portable fire extinguishers or by smothering from an upwind location.
• Request emergency response assistance (ambulance, fire, police) as needed.
• Do not attempt to extinguish a fire, even a small one, involving explosives.
• Notify the UXOSO, FOM and the CESPK representative.
6.13.10.2.2 Large Fires In the event of a large fire (or small fire which cannot be extinguished), the following actions will be taken:
• All unnecessary personnel will be evacuated from the site, to an upwind location.
• The Fort Ord Fire Department, Fort Ord Environmental Office and/or other emergency response services (police, ambulance, hospital, etc.) will be notified as needed by the OSIC.
• OSIC will meet fire Department and direct them to location of fire.
• Notify the CESPK representative.
6.13.10.2.3 Explosion In the event of an explosion, all nonessential personnel will evacuate and help secure the site, the OSIC will request the required support equipment and personnel, and the CESPK representative will be notified. It is essential that the site be evacuated and no one is allowed to
6-57 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
re-enter, except to possibly save a life, until at least 30 minutes or longer if necessary, after the explosion. The OSIC will determine what actions are appropriate.
6.13.11 Chemical Spills
A spill kit will be maintained at the site in case a chemical being used at the site (such as oil or gasoline) is spilled. The kit will include spill absorbers (spill socks, pads, and pillows), and disposable bags. Approximately 18 gallons of spilled oil, coolants, fuels or water can be absorbed using the contents of the kit.
All spills will be immediately reported to on-site CESPK representatives per procedures outlined in Section 12.9.1.1 of the Environmental Protection Plan.
6.14 LOGS, REPORTS AND RECORD KEEPING
6.14.1 Logbook
The FOM will keep a log recording the following aspects related to safety at the site:
• Training (initial site specific training, tailgate meetings, etc)
• Site visitors
• Safety issues or problems encountered
• Accidents
• Emergencies
6.14.2 Safety Log
The UXOSO will maintain a daily safety log of all safety related activities. The following information will be maintained in the safety log:
• Date and recorder of log
• Tailgate safety briefing (time conducted, material discussed, etc.)
• Weather conditions
• Significant site events relating to safety
• Accidents;
• Stop work events related to safety
• Safety inspections
6-58 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.14.3 Training Log
The UXOSO will maintain a training log documenting the following information:
• Date of training
• Type of training (initial, tailgate briefing, visitor)
• Workers or visitors attending training
• Signature of UXOSO
6.14.4 Equipment Maintenance
The Senior UXO Specialist will document the results of daily check of heavy equipment using the Heavy Equipment Daily Inspection List (Attachment A).
6.14.5 Record Keeping
The UXOSO will establish and maintain a filing system on-site for health and safety records, reports, and information concerning individual training, medical surveillance, etc. Sections in this filing system will include:
• Training Records -- Certificates for training required by 29 CFR1910.120 (40-hour initial HAZWOPER, 8 hour refresher, and supervisory training) will be maintained at the site. Additionally, documentation of CPR and First Aid training will be available at the site.
• Medical Monitoring -- Documentation of current enrollment (within last 12 months) in a medical monitoring program will be available for each employee working at the site. Documentation will consist of the employee's Health Status Report that is written and signed by the examining physician.
• Accident Reports -- Copies of any accident/incident reports and follow-up reports.
• Plan Acceptance Forms -- Copies of the Plan Acceptance Forms documenting that employees have read and understand the SSHP will be maintained at the site.
6.14.6 Accident Reporting
If an injury occurs on-site, the UXOSO is responsible for completing a Parsons’ accident report form. The UXOSO must submit a copy of this form to PHSO within 24-hours of the injury. All accidents/incidents must be investigated by the UXOSO. The purpose of the investigation is to determine the causal factors that lead to the accident/incident and to establish corrective actions to prevent a recurrence. A completed Parsons Accident Report Follow-UP Form (Attachment A) must be forwarded to the PHSO within 7 days after the incident. CESPK notification and reporting will be in accordance with AR 385-40, Accident Reporting and Records, and CESPK Supplement 1 to AR 385-40 (refer to CESPK Form 3394).
6-59 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6.15 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES, ENGINEERING CONTROLS, AND SAFE WORK PRACTICES
6.15.1 General Safety
The following are standard practices for work on Fort Ord sites.
• Eating, drinking, chewing tobacco, smoking, and carrying matches or lighters are prohibited in a contaminated or potentially contaminated area or where the possibility of contamination transfer exists.
• Field crewmembers should be alert to all potentially dangerous situations i.e., presence of strong, irritating, unusual or nauseating odors.
• Field crewmembers shall be familiar with the physical characteristics of a site during intrusive investigations, including:
Wind direction in relation to nearby buildings
Accessibility to associates, equipment, vehicles, communication
Hot zone (areas of known or suspected contamination)
Site access
Nearest water sources
Protective equipment as specified in this SSHP will be used by workers throughout the Fort Ord project.
Use of heavy equipment on-site, i.e., trucks, and bobcats, presents additional hazards for site workers. For example, the vision of a backhoe operator is limited, so all field crewmembers should stay clear when backhoe is operating.
Wearing personal protective equipment can result in an impairment of the ability to operate site equipment. All field crewmembers should pay specific attention to decreased performance capabilities resulting from the use of personal protective equipment, such as poor tactile skills when wearing certain types of gloves. Prior knowledge of limitations imposed by the use of such equipment and clothing will allow the worker to assess the decrease in his or her capability to perform field operations in a safe manner.
Wearing of jewelry, such as loose bracelets and necklaces is prohibited in order to avoid its entanglement in site machinery.
Overhead power lines, downed electrical wires, and buried cables pose a danger of shock or electrocution if workers contact or sever them during site operations. The location of these potential hazards should be ascertained before beginning site activities.
Buddy system procedures will be enforced during site operations.
6-60 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Site personnel will perform only those tasks that they are qualified to perform.
Site visitors are to be escorted by qualified personnel at all times.
Running and horseplay are prohibited in all areas of the site.
The number of personnel in the exclusion zone will be the minimum number necessary to perform work tasks in a safe and efficient manner.
6-61 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
PARSONS
PLAN ACCEPTANCE FORM I, the undersigned, have read and have been verbally briefed on the topics noted above and in the SSHP; I understand the SSHP and agree to comply with all the indicated safety and health requirements:
PRINTED NAME ORGANIZATION SIGNATURE DATE
UXOSO Signature Date
FOM Signature Date ACCIDENT REPORT FORM PARSONS Page 1 of 2
Employer
1. Name: 2. Mail Address: (No. and Street) (City or Town) (State and Zip) 3. Location : (if different from mail address) Injured or ill employee
4. Name: Social Sec. No.: (first) (middle) (last) Employee No: 5. Home Address: (No. and Street) (City or Town) (State and Zip) 6. Age: 7. Sex: male ( ) female ( ) 8. Date of injury or illness: Time of accident: 9. Occupation: (specific job title, not the specific activity employee was performing at time of injury) 10. Department: (enter name of department in which injured person is employed, even though they may have been temporarily working in another department at the time of injury) The accident or occupational illness
11. Place of accident of exposure: (No. and Street) (City or Town) (State and Zip) 12. Project: 13. Was place of accident or exposure on employer's premises? Yes ( ) No ( ) 14 How did the accident occur? (Describe fully the events that resulted in the injury or occupational illness.
Tell what happened and how. Name objects and substances involved. Give details on all factors that led to accident. (Use separate sheet for additional space.)
ACCIDENT REPORT FORM PARSONS Page 2 of 2
15. What was the employee doing when injured? (Be specific--was employee using tools or equipment
or handling material?)
16 WITNESS TO ACCIDENT (Name) (Affiliation) (Phone No.)
(Name) (Affiliation) (Phone No.) 17 Name the object or substance that directly injured the employee. (For example, object
that struck employee; the vapor or poison inhaled or swallowed; the chemical or radiation that
irritated the skin; or in cases of strains, hernias, etc., the object the employee was lifting, pulling, etc.) 18. Did the accident result in employee fatality? Yes ( ) No ( ) 19. Number of lost days ____/restricted workdays ____ resulting from injury or illness? Other
20. Name and address of physician: (No. and Street) (City or Town) (State and Zip) 21. If hospitalized, name and address: (No. and Street) (City or Town) (State and Zip) 22. Initial diagnosis of injury/occupational illness: Date of report: Prepared by: Official position: 23. Treatment rendered: ( ) first aid ( ) medical treatment
PARSONS
ACCIDENT REPORT FOLLOW-UP
Employee:______Date of injury or illness: ______
ANALYSIS - What caused the accident. Why did it happen: Primary cause: ______Contributing factors: ______
PREVENTIVE/CORRECTIVE ACTION - State what will be done to prevent re-occurrence.
Immediate action: ______Who is responsible ______Completion date(s):______Long-term action: ______Who is responsible ______Completion date(s):______Closed by ______Project Health and Safety Officer date
Safety Meeting Attendance Log
Date: Time: Contract Number: DACA05-00-D-0003 Location: Fort Ord Weather Conditions: Temp: Wind: SAFETY MEETING TOPICS. (BRIEFLY DESCRIBE.)
Attendees:
Name Signature Company
UXOSO Signature______Date______
Daily Safety Inspection Log
Date: Time: Location: Fort Ord Weather Conditions: Type of Inspections: Daily Weekly Special Reinspection Location inspected: (List by team, grid number, coordinates, or description) Activity inspected:
II. Inspection Requirement Satisfactory Unsatisfactory N/A Vegetation Removal Geophysical Survey Surface Sweep (OE Removal) Subsurface Sweep (OE Removal) Evacuation Technique Personal Protection Equipment Work Practices Site Control First Aid Equipment Fire Fighting Equipment Explosives Transportation Explosives Storage Disposal Operations
Overall Inspection Results: Satisfactory Unsatisfactory
III. Comments:
• Work stopped due to safety violation: Yes No • Safety violations noted: • Personnel involved: • Corrective Measures • Reinspection required Yes No IV. Signatures: I acknowledge that I have been briefed on the results of this inspection and will take corrective actions (if necessary). ______UXOSO Sr. UXO Supervisor/Project Manager
PARSONS Contract No. DACA-05-00-D-0003
Weekly Vehicle/Equipment Inspection
Vehicle/Equipment Data
Date:______Team:______
Mileage: Hour Meter:______
Type of Equipment:______
Model:______
License No.:______
All vehicles must be cleaned weekly. Note: Inspections should be performed weekly or accordingly to the recommended interval which ever is less.
Vehicle/Equipment Areas Inspected
Remarks
Seatbelts Pass Fail ______
Windshield Pass Fail ______
Tire Pressure Pass Fail ______
Fire Extinguisher Pass Fail ______
Brakes Service Pass Fail ______
Parking Pass Fail ______
Back-up Alarm Pass Fail N/A ______
Horn Pass Fail ______
Lights
Driving Pass Fail ______
Hazards Pass Fail ______
Turn Signals Pass Fail ______
Back Up Pass Fail ______
Fluid Level Pass Fail ______
Engine
Oil Pass Fail ______
Coolant Pass Fail ______
Hoses Pass Fail ______
Belts Pass Fail ______
All Gages and Indicators operational Yes No ______
Serviced within recommended intervals Yes No ______
Registration Yes No ______
Insurance Card Yes No ______
Current Vehicle Tags Yes No ______
Damaged Sidewalls Yes No ______
Comments: ______
Operator: ______Date: ______
Date Completed by UXOSO: ______CC: USACE Maintenance Safety
ATTACHMENT 6-B PROCEDURES AND PROGRAMS
HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAM
HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAM
The purpose of this Hearing Conservation Program is to provide protection for employees from adverse health effects associated with occupational exposure to noise. The program consists of annual audiometric testing of workers, annual employee training, selection and use of hearing protection, and noise monitoring. All Parsons’ employees and subcontractors must comply with this program.
Audiometric Testing Program
Audiometric testing shall be made available to all employees whose exposures equal or exceed an 8-hour time- weighted average of 85 decibels. Audiometric tests shall be performed by a licensed or certified audiologist, otolaryngologist, or physician who is certified by the Council of Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation. Each employee assigned to noisy operations must receive a baseline audiogram prior to assignment and yearly testing thereafter for as long as that employee is exposed to excessive noise levels (8-hour time- weighted average of 85 decibels or greater). Each employee's annual audiogram is compared to that employee's baseline audiogram to determine if the audiogram is valid and if a standard threshold shift has occurred. (A standard threshold shift is a change in hearing threshold relative to the baseline audiogram of an average of 10 dB or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear.) This comparison should be done by a physician.
If a comparison of the annual audiogram to the baseline audiogram indicates a standard threshold shift has occurred, the employee shall be informed of this fact in writing, within 21 days of the determination. The following steps are taken by the UXOSO when a standard threshold shift occurs:
• Employees not using hearing protectors shall be fitted with hearing protectors, trained in their use and care, and required to use them. • Employees already using hearing protectors shall be refitted and retrained in the use of hearing protectors and provided with hearing protectors offering greater attenuation if necessary. • The employee shall be referred for a clinical audiological evaluation or an otological examination, as appropriate, if additional testing is necessary. • The employee is informed of the need for an otological examination if a medical pathology of the ear that is unrelated to the use of hearing protectors is suspected.
Audiometric tests shall be pure tone, air conduction, hearing threshold examinations, with test frequencies including as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 6000 Hz. tests at each frequency shall be taken separately for each ear. Audiometric tests shall be conducted with audiometers (including microprocessor audiometers) that meet the specifications of, and are maintained and used in accordance with, American National Standard Specification for
Audiometers, S3.6-1969. The functional operation of the audiometer shall be checked before each day's use by testing a person with known, stable hearing thresholds, and by listening to the audiometer's output to make sure that the output is free from distorted or unwanted sounds. Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically at least annually in accordance with OSHA requirement (29 CFR 1910.95 Appendix E)
Hearing Protectors
The UXOSO shall make hearing protectors available to all Parsons and subcontract employees exposed to an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or greater. Hearing protection for this project will consist of earmuffs or foam fitting earplugs. The selection of hearing protector will be based upon noise attenuation requirements for the task and worker comfort.
Employee Training
The UXOSO will develop a hearing conservation training program for all employees assigned to noisy work. This training will be a component of the initial site safety training. As a minimum the training shall consist of:
• The effects of noise on hearing. • The purpose of hearing protectors, the advantages, disadvantages, and attenuation of various types, and instructions on selection, fitting, use, and care. • The purpose of audiometric testing, and an explanation of the test procedures.
Noise Monitoring
When operations are anticipated to exceed the 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels, the UXOSO shall implement a noise monitoring program. The sampling shall be used to:
• Verify that appropriate hearing protection is being used by employees • Identify the boundaries of the noise hazard area in accordance with Section 05.C.07 of EM 385-1-1.
Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure shall be calibrated to ensure accuracy.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
Introduction
The OSHA Hazard Communications Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) was promulgated to ensure that all chemicals would be evaluated and information regarding the associated chemical hazards would be communicated appropriately. The goal of the standard is to reduce the number of chemically related occupational illnesses and injuries.
In order to comply with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard, this written program has been established by Parsons for work at Fort Ord. All Parsons and subcontractor personnel working at Fort Ord are included in this program.
Hazardous chemical inventory list
Hazardous chemicals used at Fort Ord include industrial chemicals such as fuels, oils, and greases. The UXOSO will maintain an inventory of hazardous chemicals brought onto Fort Ord.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
MSDSs are prepared by manufacturers or producers to provide specific information on the safety precautions and health effects of a particular chemical or mixture. The MSDS contains at a minimum the following information:
• Chemical and common names • Physical and chemical characteristics • Physical hazards • Health hazards • Primary routes of entry • Exposure limits • Carcinogenic potential • Handling and protective precautions • Control measures • Emergency and first aid procedures • Date of MSDS preparation • Name and address of manufacturer When chemicals are ordered, the Site Manager or his designee will specify on the purchase order that chemicals are not to be shipped without corresponding MSDSs. When chemicals and MSDSs arrive, they will be reviewed for completeness by the UXOSO or his designee. Should any MSDS be incomplete, a letter or FAX will be sent immediately to the manufacturer requesting the additional information, Parsons or its subcontractors will not accept (at Fort Ord sites) any shipped chemical materials without an MSDS.
A complete file of MSDSs for all hazardous chemicals to which an employee of Parsons may be exposed will be kept in labeled files on-site. MSDSs for chemicals anticipated to be used at the site are provided at the end of this attachment. In the event that an MSDS is missing the employee should immediately contact the UXOSO or PHSO.
MSDSs at this site will be reviewed during periodic audits by the PHSO. Should there be any MSDS that has not been updated within the past year a new MSDS will be requested.
Labels ad Other Forms of Warning
The Hazard Communication Standard requires that hazardous chemicals be labeled by manufacturers. The label must contain the following:
• Chemical identity • Appropriate warnings • Name and address of manufacturer, importer, or other responsible party. If the labels are incomplete or missing, Parsons’ personnel will refuse the shipment.
When chemicals are transferred from the manufacturer’s containers to secondary containers, the Site Manager or UXOSO will ensure that the containers are labeled with the identity of the chemicals and appropriate hazard warnings. Labels for secondary containers can be obtained from the UXOSO.
The entire labeling procedure will be reviewed at least annually and changed as necessary.
Employee Information And Training
Prior to starting work Parsons and its subcontractors’ employees will attend a site specific safety and health training course. This course will include Hazard Communication Training to review the contents of this program and learn the hazards associated with each listed hazardous chemical. The training will be performed by the UXOSO. The format will be classroom training.
Training Topics
The site training or HAZCOM will include:
• An overview of the requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard • The labeling system and how to use it • How to review MSDS and where they are kept • Chemicals present in work operations • Physical and health effects of hazardous chemicals • Methods and observation techniques used to determine the presence or release of hazardous chemicals in the area • PPE and work practices to reduce or prevent exposure to chemicals
• Steps to be taken to prevent or reduce exposure to chemicals • Safety-emergency procedures to follow if exposure occurs • Location and availability of written program/MSDSs Following the training session(s), each employee will sign and date the training record. Additional training may be provided by the UXOSO, with the introduction of each new hazardous chemical. Records of additional training will be maintained.
On-Site Contractors And Visitors
Parsons understands that at times other persons may be on the work site. New contractors, subcontractors and visitors will be required to attend site health and safety training to familiarize them with the contents of this document and the specific hazards associated with Fort Ord. New contractors, subcontractors and visitors will be provided with the following information:
• Hazardous chemicals to which the contractor’s employees or visitors may be exposed • Precautions necessary to protect employees during normal operating conditions and foreseeable emergencies • Labeling system used in the work place It is the responsibility of the Site Manager and/or UXOSO to ensure that all MSDSs of chemicals to which the contractor’s employees or visitors may be exposed are made available at a central location in the work place along with an example of the labeling system in use. Visitors and subcontractors will be informed of the availability of this information and its location.
Program review
This written hazard communications program for Parsons will be reviewed by the PHSO or Corporate Health and Safety Manger at least annually and updated as necessary.
Reviewed and Approved:
Project HSO:
Field Operations Manager:
CHAPTER 7 LOCATION SURVEYS, MAPPING AND GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM PLAN
7.1 GENERAL
This Surveying, Mapping, and GIS Plan, outlines the tools and methodologies used for the efficient and accurate completion of surveying, mapping, and GIS operations.
The plan is divided into three sections that are outlined below. The first section focuses on surveying and discusses the methodology and equipment to be used and the accuracy requirements to be met to locate and record spatial coordinates. The second section identifies the various hardware, software, data, personnel and methods required to implement a fully functioning Geographical Information System (GIS). The final section discusses the necessary equipment, data and structure for database design and information management.
Surveying:
• Control Points
• MRS Site Boundaries
• MRS Grids
• Military Munitions (MM) Items Encountered
• Other Items as Required
• Safety
• Equipment
• Accuracy
• Quality Control
7-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
GIS:
• Hardware
• Software
• File Formats and Requirements
• Metadata Requirements
• GIS Data Directory Structure
• Data Distribution
• General Map Requirements
• Documentation
• Staffing
• Quality Control
Database and Information Management:
• Hardware
• Software
• Structure and Design
• Database Backup routines
• Database User Administration
• Data Capture
• Data Distribution
• Digital image catalogue
• Staffing
• Quality Control
7-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
7.2 LOCATION SURVEYS
7.2.1 Control Points
All work on the site is based on established monumentation. The coordinate system to be used for control points and other survey activities is NAD 83 California State Plane Zone IV. All control points used for base lines meet the standards established by the Federal Geodetic Control Committee (FGCC) for Third Order, Class 1 survey and published in the publication "Classification, Standards of Accuracy and General Specifications of Geodetic Control Surveys" (September 1984) and "Specifications to Support Classification, Standards of Accuracy, and General Specifications of Geodetic Control Surveys” (1980). All control points recovered and/or established at the site will be plotted on planimetric drawings at the appropriate coordinate location and will be identified by name or number. The final adjusted coordinates will be shown, and a tabulated master list of all points is provided.
Copies of all field books, layout sheets, computation sheets, abstracts and computer printouts will be maintained for inclusion in the Final Report.
7.2.1.1 Monument Caps
The caps for the new monuments will be stamped in consecutive order. The name and identification to be stamped on each cap will be provided by CESPK. The following is an example of consecutive monument cap identification:
ORD-1-2000 ORD-2-2000 ORD-3-2000 CESPK CESPK CESPK
The dies for stamping the numeric and alphabetic figures into the caps shall be 1/8-inch to 3/16-inch in size. All coordinates and elevations shall be depicted to the nearest one-thousandth of a meter (0.001 m) and one-hundredth of a foot (0.01 ft).
7.2.1.2 Plotting
The location, identification, coordinates and elevations of all control points recovered and/or established at the site and the corners of all areas cleared of MEC will be plotted on site maps drawn at a scale of 1 inch = 200 feet on reproducible materials. All drawings will show locations in relation to the surface and planimetric features within the project area.
7.2.1.3 Description Cards
A Description Card for each control point used will be submitted to CESPK with the tabulated master list of all points. The Description Cards include the following:
• A north arrow;
• A sketch of each monument with its location relative to reference marks, buildings, roads, railroads, towers, etc.
• A detailed, typed description telling how to locate the monument from an easily identifiable point;
7-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• A sketch showing how to locate the monument;
• The monument's name or number;
• The final adjusted coordinates and elevations in meters (to the closest 0.001m) and feet (to the closest 0.01 ft.).
The Description Cards are 5" X 8" describing one monument per card. If any damaged monuments are found, they will be clearly identified and reported to CESPK.
7.2.2 MRS Boundaries
Boundaries for MRS on Fort Ord have been previously identified and placed into digital format. Before MM clearance activities begin on an MRS, the boundary of the site will be loaded into RTK-GPS receivers, which will then be used to survey and stake the MRS boundary. In areas where terrain or vegetation precludes the use of RTK-GPS, standard surveying methods will be used. This boundary will serve as the limit of MM investigation for the specific MRS.
7.2.3 Operating Grids
A grid system, referred to as the, CESPK Former Fort Ord Master Grid System, has been established for the Fort Ord MMRP. These grids measure 100 feet by 100 feet. An example of this grid layout is shown in Figure 7-1. Corner points for these grids will be loaded into RTK-GPS receivers for location of grid corners on the actual terrain. In areas where terrain or vegetation precludes the use of RTK-GPS, standard surveying methods will be used in coordination with CESPK.
7-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 7-1: Removal Action Grid Layout
7.2.4 MM Items Encountered
Spatial location of MM items encountered will be surveyed in one of two ways. The first method employs GPS technology to mark the location of the MM item, where deemed appropriate based on vegetation cover, terrain, and other factors. The second method is the standard MM item
7-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
location method-using x and y distances from the southwest corner of the search grid. Selection of the appropriate survey method for MM items encountered will be coordinated with CESPK.
7.2.5 Other Items as Required
Throughout the course of the project, it is anticipated that the location of other items or features such as roads, firebreaks, fences, power lines, etc. will need to be determined. The location of these items will be acquired with RTK-GPS technology where possible, and with standard surveying procedures where terrain and or vegetation preclude such acquisition. Selection of the appropriate survey method for other items will be coordinated with CESPK. In the event of MM removal activities along firebreaks or roads, clearance grids will be designed and located using the above mentioned survey methods.
7.2.6 Safety
Accompany all survey or mapping crews will be UXO technicians serving as safety escorts. The escorts will perform visual surface surveys (conducted en route), and magnetometer surveys at the location of any new monuments or markers. No excavation of any kind will be initiated until the area has been verified as safe by the UXO technician. All personnel entering the work site will adhere to U.S. Army Engineering and Support Center, Huntsville’s “Safety Concepts and Basic Considerations for Unexploded Explosive Ordnance Operations.”
7.2.7 Equipment
Equipment used in surveying activities on the project will include, but not be limited to, RTK- GPS base station and rover(s), mapping grade GPS rovers, and survey total station. In most cases, the survey equipment to be used will be RTK-GPS; use of other survey equipment and methods will be coordinated with CESPK.
7.2.8 Accuracy
Survey accuracy will be dependant upon the equipment and methods used for a specific survey. The RTK-GPS technology can achieve sub-centimeter accuracy. Mapping grade GPS, with differential correction, can achieve sub-meter accuracy. Total station surveys can also achieve sub-centimeter accuracy. Accuracy requirements, equipments and methods to be used for specific surveying tasks will be coordinated with CESPK.
7.2.9 Quality Control
The GIS Manager will be responsible for QC and validation of the survey data. Survey data received from the field will be checked against existing surveys for accuracy and completeness. The data will also be checked to ensure that labeling is correct and follows the project standard set for the features surveyed.
7.3 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM
7.3.1 GIS Hardware
The GIS hardware for the project will consist of the following:
7-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Server
• GIS workstations
• Large format color inkjet plotter
All of the GIS data, map files, metadata and user manuals will be stored on the server. The server will have a RAID 5 storage array, tape backup system and an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to ensure maximum data integrity. The GIS workstations will be high-end computers with large monitors designed for the intense computing and display requirements of GIS. The inkjet plotter will be capable of high speed plotting of E size (34 inch x 44 inch) maps.
7.3.2 Software
The following software will be used specifically for the Project GIS:
• ESRI ArcView ™ (with appropriate extensions)
• ESRI ArcInfo ™ (with appropriate extensions)
• ARCIMS ™
• ERDAS Imagine ™
• AutoCad Map ™
• GPS data processing software (varies depending upon vendor)
Maps generated for the project will be created and stored in the latest version of ArcView™. Vector GIS data will be created, modified, and analyzed using ArcView™ and its extensions and ArcInfo™. Raster GIS data processing will be done in Imagine ™. ARCIMS™ will be used to distribute appropriate GIS data layers and maps over the Internet. AutoCad Map™ will be used in the process of converting historical GIS files, which are currently in AutoCad™ .dwg files. Any GPS data processing software used will correspond to the appropriate GPS hardware provider (e.g. Leica, Trimble, etc.).
7.3.3 File Formats and Requirements
GIS vector data for the project will be stored in either ArcInfoTM coverages, ArcViewTM shape files or in a personal Geodatabase. Raster files such as orthophotography and geophysical pseudocolor maps will be stored as TIFF (.tif) files with .tfw world files defining the geospatial location and resolution of the image.
7.3.4 Metadata Requirements
Metadata for each coverage and shape file is generated using the metadata generator in the ArcInfoTM ArcCatalog module. This software creates an .xml file, which will be available for viewing in ArcCatalog or in any web browser. FGDC metadata will be maintained for all final GIS data files and will be included with the data when it is distributed.
7-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
7.3.5 GIS Data Directory Structure
The GIS data directory structure will follow the standards set forth by CESPK GIS. The following directory tree depicts this structure:
../Fort_Ord_GIS
GIS_Project (Location of ArcView .apr and ArcInfo .mxd map files)
Graphics (Location of logos, raster images and plot files)
Master_Coverage (Location of all final vector GIS data files)
Working_Files (Location of vector GIS data files that are not finalized)
The directory structure under Master_Coverage has been established by CESPK GIS, based on the Corps of Engineers Spatial Data Standards (SDS). Any modifications to the primary GIS directory structure will be made in coordination with CESPK GIS.
7.3.6 Data Distribution
Updates made to the primary coverages and shape files in the Master_Coverage directory will be submitted to the CESPK GIS office on a quarterly basis, or as requested. Additionally, updates to these files received from CESPK will be incorporated into the project GIS upon receipt. Data transfer between Parsons and CESPK will be accomplished electronically, on DLT tape, or on CD depending upon the size and format of the data.
7.3.7 General Map Requirements
Maps will be created in a variety of sizes (e.g. 8 ½ x 11, 11 x 17, 22 x 34, 34 x 44, 36 x 36) depending upon the cartographic requirements to present the chosen data. Each sheet/set will have a size/type standard border, revision block, title block, complete index sheet layout (if set), scale bar, legend, and north arrow, date, author, (initials) and name of map document (.apr or .mxd). This variety of sizes and layouts will be used to best present and describe the data and/or analysis included.
7.3.8 Documentation
The project GIS documentation will consist of two documents. The first document is a GIS Users Manual. This manual will be designed to provide new users with appropriate, detailed information to enable them to quickly and easily use the project GIS. The second document is a list containing pertinent information about map documents such as date of creation, map title, author, etc. This will enable subsequent users to identify and print the appropriate map when a map request is received.
7.3.8.1 GIS Users Manual
The GIS user’s manual will include the GIS directory structure, standard operating procedures (SOPs), programming scripts and code, and pointers to reference material. It will show examples of how GIS tasks are completed for the project. Additionally, there will be a section addressing
7-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
solutions to common problems that have been solved by the GIS staff. The GIS user’s manual will be updated regularly, and will be submitted to CESPK Monterey Office quarterly and/or as requested.
7.3.8.2 GIS Project Tracking
GIS projects (e.g. .apr and .mxd files) used for maps will be tracked in a list. The name of the project file, requestor, creator, date of creation, most recent date of modification, and map content will be tracked. This will facilitate the modification and update of maps at a later date, possibly by other users. This tracking file will be submitted quarterly and as requested, to CESPK Monterey Project Office.
7.3.9 Staffing
The project GIS staff will consist of a GIS Manager and GIS analyst(s). The number of analysts required by the project may vary with workload, with a minimum of one analyst on staff at all times.
7.3.9.1 GIS Manager
The GIS Manager is responsible for high-level management of the overall GIS and database program. A person with a broad knowledge of GIS applications, capabilities and overall system requirements fills this position. Specific duties include the day-to-day management responsibilities of GIS projects, staff, and budget. The GIS Manager coordinates project GIS needs with the PM, FOM, PG, and other project staff as necessary. The GIS Manager coordinates regularly with the CESPK GIS Manager and other USACE personnel as required. The GIS Manager also oversees the Database Manager and provides high-level oversight of the development of the database users, structure and applications.
7.3.9.2 GIS Analyst
The GIS Analyst performs the day-to-day GIS tasks for the project. The analyst position is filled with a person having specific hands-on experience using the project GIS software. Duties include creating and modifying GIS data layers; creating maps for field use, presentations, and final reports; and integrating the MMRP database with the GIS.
7.3.10 Quality Control
Procedures for quality control of GIS data will be implemented. The GIS Manager will oversee spatial accuracy of new GIS data, which will be checked against known locations using existing survey data and/or digital orthophotography. Additionally, a comparison of the ArcCatalog metadata and the GIS data file will be made to ensure that the metadata is correct.
7.4 DATABASE MANAGEMENT
7.4.1 Hardware
Database management hardware consists of the following:
7-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Server
• Workstations
The database and related files are stored on the server. As discussed in the GIS section, the server will have a RAID 5 storage array, tape backup system and an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The operating system of the server will be Windows 2000™, which provides a high level of security for the database. Database management will be accomplished on workstations having adequate RAM and processor speeds to handle the database tasks.
7.4.2 Software
The following software will be used for database management:
• Microsoft™ SQL Server 2000
• Microsoft™ Office Professional 2002 (including Microsoft Access)
• Microsoft™ Visual Basic
• Microsoft™ InterDev
• Seagate™ Crystal Reports
7.4.3 Structure and Design
The structure and design of the database will be accomplished in coordination with CESPK personnel. There will be three main components to the database: MM, Geophysical, and Cost and Scheduling, which are detailed below.
7.4.3.1 MMRP Database
The MMRP database will provide a common repository for data collected from MM removal efforts. The MMRP database will be maintained on a computer system that provides for control over data access. This database shall be used to catalogue MM actions in an organized fashion so that reporting and querying will be possible. The database will be submitted to CESPK Monterey Project Office quarterly and as requested.
7.4.3.2 Geophysical Database
The information management team will design a geophysical database for tracking of fieldwork and reporting of data. This will be designed in cooperation with the Project Geophysicist to meet overall program and site specific geophysical objectives such as reporting of survey team information, anomaly picks, dig sheet production, geophysical file index, and project analysis. The database will be designed with forms for categories such as geophysical processing data. Reports and analysis will be created with queries that allow users to access and analyze data from multiple tables and multiple records.
7-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
7.4.3.3 Cost and Scheduling Database
The cost and scheduling database will be used to track the cost and time effort involved in all aspects of MM clearance activity. The data captured in this database can be used for analyzing costs for specific sites and activities.
7.4.4 Data Capture Methods
Parsons will capture field data digitally with hand held computers. These units will be capable of downloading the data to the appropriate database with minimum user assistance. This method of data capture will greatly reduce the number of potential errors, which normally occurs during the transcription and data entry process. This method will also reduce the time between data capture in the field and inclusion in the database.
7.4.5 Data Distribution
Updates made to the database will be submitted to the CESPK GIS office on a quarterly basis, or as requested. As with the GIS updates, data transfer between Parsons and CESPK will be accomplished electronically, on DLT tape, or on CD in coordination with CESPK.
7.4.6 Staffing
Primary staffing of database activities will consist of two individuals, a Database Manager, and a Data Entry Specialist. Additional data entry staff may be required depending upon project workload. The responsibilities of these individuals are described below.
7.4.6.1 Database Manager
The Database Manager will oversee and coordinate database activities on the project. The Database Manager will have significant database experience and will perform routine database functions such as user management, table creation and modification, query development, form creation and report design. The Database Manager will also train and supervise the Data Entry Specialist and oversee all database modification activities.
7.4.6.2 Data Entry Specialist
While not explicitly part of the database itself, it is noted here that Parsons will maintain a catalog of digital images (photographs) acquired during the course of the project. The catalog will include, at a minimum, a listing of the image names, date taken, location taken, subject matter, and photographer. This catalog will be submitted to CESPK quarterly and as requested. Photographs from the catalog will be made available for use by CESPK.
The Data Entry Specialist will enter data into the database. This will be accomplished by the following methods: 1) Manual data entry from hardcopy forms; and 2) Digital import of data from the field data loggers or other data sources. The data entry specialist will check for errors and problems in the data during the entry and import process.
7-11 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
7.4.7 Database User Administration
The Database Manager will be responsible for the administration of database user accounts. Each user will be given the appropriate level of permissions within the database such that only authorized personnel can make changes to database values. Read only permissions will be assigned to users that need to review the data, but who are not authorized to make changes.
7.4.8 Database Backup Routines
Database backup routines will be established. These routines will be set up for daily and weekly backups. These backups will be used to restore data to the database in the event of database corruption or other events requiring the restoration of the data. The Database Manager will be responsible for these backups. A log of database backups will be generated and maintained.
7.4.9 Database Users Manual
The database user’s manual will include database standard operating procedures, programming scripts and code, and pointers to reference material. It will contain a diagram of the database schema and descriptions of each of the tables and columns. Copies of standard forms, reports, queries, and views will be included in this manual. The manual will also contain instructions for administration, maintenance and backup of the database. Additionally, there will be a section addressing solutions to common problems that have been solved by the database staff. The database users manual will be updated regularly, and will be submitted to CESPK Monterey Office quarterly and/or as requested.
7.4.10 Digital Image Catalog
A digital image catalog will be created which will contain information about digital images acquired by Parsons. These images include photographs taken to document fieldwork activities, wildlife sightings, MM items, and other events or items of interest. The image catalog documents the image name, date taken, subject matter, site or location, direction, photographer, and miscellaneous comments. The purpose of this catalog is to easily identify digital images that could potentially be used by CESPK or Parsons in documents or presentations. The digital image catalog will be updated regularly, and will be submitted to CESPK Monterey Office quarterly and/or as requested.
7.4.11 Quality Control
QC of data will be performed in all data acquisition, data processing, data analysis, and data reporting stages. The Database Manager will be fully responsible for performing and documenting all database QC. The GIS Manager will supervise the Database Manager in these activities. It should be noted that these are the fundamental QC steps for information management, and that individual project sites and scopes may specify additional QC requirements.
The basic database QC steps at Fort Ord along with the parties responsible for performing the QC are presented in Table 7-1.
7-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 7-1: Database QC Action and Responsibilities
QC Action Performed By Overseen By
Daily Back Up Database Manager GIS Manager
Field Data Quality Checks Database Manager GIS Manager
Data Entry Checks Database Manager GIS Manager
Weekly Data Checks Database Manager GIS Manager
Data Deliverable Checks Database Manager GIS Manager
Parsons will perform QC of the data before delivery to CESPK and will include checks and reviews of the digital data deliverables. Specific checks will include data completeness, quality, and format checks, which will be entered in the database QC log. QC checks will be applied to each step of data processing, from data entry on. Overall, these QC checks will help ensure that all grid surveys and their included grids are entered properly, headers are attached to data files, and that scanned field forms are included with their corresponding data files. If at any point during this process the data are found to be deficient, Parsons will take corrective action regarding the data in question. Automated checking procedures and other timesaving/quality assuring, measures may be developed throughout the course of this program.
7-13 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 8 WORK, DATA, AND COST MANAGEMENT PLAN
8.1 PURPOSE AND APPROACH
The Work, Data and Cost Management Plan (WDCMP) is prepared for the purpose of effective management of allocated funds and resources. All work on the Fort Ord Military Munitions Removal Program (MMRP) project will be accomplished via task orders issued by CESPK after being planned, scheduled and estimated by Parsons.
Parsons will aggressively act to prevent cost overruns and schedule slippage. Our Earned Value Management System (EVMS) is at the heart of the project controls process. Management emphasis will be combined with continuous quality surveillance to ensure the integrity of the system. Information provided by the EVMS will be used to communicate status, forecast problems and facilitate contingency planning and corrective actions.
Our subcontractor control is centered on the control account managers (CAMs)/functional managers working with the support of project planner/schedulers and cost engineers. The CAMs will intensively manage the subcontractors and hold them fully accountable for meeting the schedule milestones within the task order (TO) budgets and in compliance with designs and specifications.
8.1.1 Earned Value Management System
This MMRP requires earned value management (EVM) reporting. This section provides an overview of the Parsons Integrated Control System (PICS), which is fully compliant with the ANSI criteria for EVMS. The PICS is being tailored to the scope of this MMRP so as to efficiently, economically, and effectively provide the necessary cost/schedule management control data to Parsons and CESPK in a manner consistent with the cost, schedule, and technical skills required for the successful execution of this project.
Modifications to the PICS Description are the responsibility of the manager of program controls for Parsons and are brought to the attention of the Parsons’ customer(s) where EVMS changes are necessary. Parsons may choose to implement modifications to this PICS Description prior to customer approval with the understanding that further modifications may be required if the customer does not approve those implemented system modifications.
The PICS is composed of six integrated management planning and control functions, which are described in the following sections:
Section 8.1.2: Baseline Development Section 8.1.3: Project Execution and Reporting Section 8.1.4: Material and Subcontract Management Section 8.1.5: Change Control Section 8.1.6: System Surveillance Section 8.1.7: Procedures
8-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
These major functions are integrated into a comprehensive system that maintains a project’s cost, schedule and scope baselines and provides for the generation of timely performance measurement data and reports. The performance measurement reports provide management with the necessary information to monitor progress, identify significant problems, and implement corrective actions, as necessary.
8.1.2 Baseline Development
The baseline development process consists of those activities necessary to achieve integration of the cost, schedule and scope baselines for a project. The process used to identify cost, schedule, and scope metrics that will be used to measure project success is referred to as "baseline development" and is one of the most important activities that the project team must complete. The Baseline Development process consists of the following processes:
Project Structure Integrated Master Schedule (IMS) Planning and Budgeting Work Authorization
8.1.2.1 Project Structure
The PICS provides a well-structured, integrated and organized approach for the accomplishment of all task orders. The schedule and budget for these tasks and the individuals and departments responsible for performing the work are specifically identified. Parsons’ approach is organized to provide the framework for internal and customer reporting in a consistent manner. The tools employed to clearly identify the project organization are: Work Breakdown Structure (WBS), Organizational Breakdown Structure (OBS), Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM), and Control Accounts (CA).
Parsons and CESPK have developed, through multiple iterations, the WBS as shown in Figure 8-1. This WBS forms the basis for developing a basis for work, estimating, costing, and the measurement of work progress.
8-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
WBS STRUCTURE Former Fort Ord Muntions Response Program 1.0 Rev. 9 Tuesday, April 13, 2004
TASK ORDER SITE CLEANUP TYPICAL [For MANAGEMENT GENERAL SITE RI/FS 739266 PROGRAMMATIC Elements Noted] 739219 Task Order 5 IMPROVEMENT 739219 SSx0z 1.3 DOCUMENTS 1.1 743710 739266 739219 1.A [see typical] 1.4 1.6 1.8
Watkins Gate MRS-MoCo.2 MRS-SEA.01 MRS-SEA.02 MRS-SEA.03 MRS-SEA.04 Burn Area FUEL BREAKS WORK PLANS GENERAL RI/FS 06x0z 07x0z 08x0z 09x0z 10x0z 1.3.38 REMOVAL and SOP'S MANAGEMENT 80yy0 TYPICAL SITE 1.3.06 1.3.07 1.3.08 1.3.09 1.3.10 38x0z 42x0z 60000 01001 1.8.yy SSx0z 1.4.02 1.6.01 1.1.01 1.A.SS MRS R43-48 Impact Area [see typical] Burn & Removal Security 1.4.8 GENERAL SITE GIS DATA 36x0z 48507 WORK MANAGEMENT 1.3.36 SITE TPP INVESTIGATION 44000 SS100 SS200 1.4.04 1.A.SS.1 1.A.SS.2 1.1.02 BURN, SITE PREP, QC, POST- SUPPORT, AND REMOVAL, AND REMOVAL, Site TPP POST-BURN SUPPORT AND GEO 36103 GIS ACTIVITIES ACTIVITIES WORK PLAN GIS MANAGEMENT SS300 SS400 1.A.SS.3 1.A.SS.4 01021 Build Quality Control Site 1.1.02.1 Towed Array Quality Assurance Prescribed Burn Support Investigation 36503 36505 AFTER ACTION 2003 2003 REPORT 36703 36203 Dust SS600 RI/FS Monitoring- Range Residue 1.A.SS.6 INTERFACE Removal Removal Work Plan Site Security 36506 01004 36512 36303 1.1.04 Burn 2003 36537 SITE WORK Management SS500 Border Survey Grid Survey Support 1.A.SS.5 ESCORTING 36511 36521 Air Monitoring GIS 01005 36538 Burn 2003 36403 1.1.05 36803 Visual Surface Special-Case Areas L E G E N D Removal Surface Removal Site Security LOCATION SITE PREP & 36514 36524 Removal SURVEY REST TRAINING AAR 36517 SS501 SS502 01006 Burn 2003 1.A.SS.5.1 1.A.SS.5.2 36600 W B S T I T L E 1.1.06 Manual Veg Mechanical Veg Clearance Clearance Parsons Job No(s). xxxxxx 36522 36532 Erosion Control GEOPH MEC REMOVAL FIELD OFFICE 36552 SURVEY Parsons WBS No. xxxxx SS504 CLOSE-OUT SS503 1.A.SS.5.4 01007 Analog Removal- Project WBS No. x.x.xx.x.x 1.A.SS.5.3 Removal Target Areas 1.1.07 Sifting 36534 36554 (TBD) QUALITY RESIDUE CONTRACT 36564 CONTROL REMOVAL CLOSE-OUT Anomaly CODE STRUCTURE Digital Survey SS505 SS506 01008 Reacquisition 36513 1.A.SS.5.5 1.A.SS.5.6 1.1.08 36523 AAR Muntions A = 2, 3 or 4 (Level 1) Response SS = Two Digit Site Number (Level 2) 36601 MANAGEMENT CLOSE-OUT Digital Anomaly Demo x = Site Activity (Level 3) SITE SECURITY & SUPPORT OF INDIRECTS Excavations Ops z = Site Work Sub Activity ( Level 4) SS507 SS508 01009 36544 36574 yy=RI/FS Task No. (Level 2) 1.A.SS.5.7 1.A.SS.5.8 1.1.09 (effective 4/1/02) = Ranges 43-48 = Task Order 5
8-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Parsons internal functional organizations and major subcontractors are organized to perform the project effort through the use of an OBS. The OBS displays organizational relationships and is integrated with the WBS to establish a RAM, which is used to identify CA responsibility. The RAM ensures that each CA is assigned to one organizational entity responsible for the management of the work.
The WBS for this MMRP project will be hierarchical, the top level being the program. This approach allows for horizontal traceability for tracking and reporting both costs and schedule. This approach also allows for efficient management of multiple TOs.
8.1.2.2 Integrated Master Schedule
The PICS scheduling module utilizes the Critical Path Method (CPM) to generate an Integrated Master Schedule (IMS). The IMS is developed by logically networking all detailed activities for and between task orders used to accomplish the total project scope of work. This network approach serves to accomplish horizontal traceability. Key milestones, decision points and task deliverables at all levels of the schedule hierarchy are at the detail level. These schedules are produced with MS Project and provide the network analysis system (NAS). Through the NAS we ensure that work is properly planned and flows continuously from the beginning to the end of the task order and the project with a critical path clearly identified. The NAS is resource loaded to show manpower requirements as well as material and subcontractor costs across the timeline of the task order and project as a whole.
The detail schedule (Level II) summarizes upward to an intermediate schedule (Level I), which in turn summarizes up to the master project schedule (Level 0). This upward summarization ensures vertical traceability.
Upon approval of the initial task order, the IMS becomes the baseline schedule for the project and is maintained under the formal change control process.
Weekly statusing of the schedule helps manage resources and focus attention on those areas of the project that pose the most risk to the project's scheduled objectives.
8.1.2.3 Planning and Budgeting
The Performance Measurement Baseline (PMB) is the time-phased budget plan against which contract performance is measured. It is formed by the authorized work and budgets for each task order assigned to control accounts, in accordance with higher-level schedules. Project controls, in concert with the Control Account Manager (CAM), is responsible for ensuring the integrity of the PMB through the use of formal change control procedures, which ensure that integrity is maintained at the CA level.
8.1.2.4 Work Authorization
Work authorization for this MMRP project has two components, the formal CESPK Work Authorization System and internal work authorization.
8-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
8.1.2.5 Formal Work Authorizations System
The CESPK will use a formal Work Breakdown Structure for issuing and controlling WBS and TOs. Under this system, Parsons will prepare all necessary Work Orders (WO) for advance approval of the KO, for the execution of the work included in each WBS/TO. Each WBS/TO will include a budget cost estimate to include all costs, a detailed Network Analysis System, the WBS element number under which the work will be accomplished. The cumulative cost of the approved WO shall not exceed the total budget amount of the WBS under which they are issued without prior approval of the KO.
CESPK and Parsons Contract management will meet on a monthly basis to discuss performance measurement and variance analysis for each WBS as part of the formal monthly status review. Parsons will be available more frequently if required.
8.1.2.6 Internal Work Authorization
The internal work authorization (IWA) process ensures that all project work is properly defined and authorized prior to committing resources and performing work. The project itself cannot be initiated without formal authorization being received from the Parsons Contract Administration. The program manager must authorize all work prior to its performance. IWA documents contain a statement of work, target budget, resource type and/or element of cost, schedule constraints and other project requirements. An approved IWA document is required before work can begin on any WBS element.
IWA documents are used to authorize contract performance, initial planning, control account budgets, budget baseline changes, and performance of direct contract work. IWA documents also contain individual references for identification and collection of costs.
8.1.3 Project Execution and Reporting
The baseline plans generated during the TO planning and budgeting phase are statused and compared with actual costs and schedules for project reporting. Forecasts of future costs and schedule dates are made. Corrective actions are initiated as required. The project execution and reporting process includes:
• Project and Earned Value Status • Accounting • Performance Analysis • Indirect Cost Planning and Control • Reporting
8.1.3.1 Project and Earned Value Status
Occurring weekly for scheduling and monthly for project performance assessment, the results are incorporated into management reports for review and analysis of cost and schedule.
Earned value is calculated monthly, both for the current period and cumulative, for each CA and represents the value of work accomplished, expressed in budgeted dollars. The earned value, Budgeted Cost for Work Performed (BCWP) is compared to the plan, Budgeted Cost for Work Scheduled (BCWS), and to the actual cost incurred for that work, Actual Cost of Work Performed
8-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
(ACWP). The results of these comparisons are expressed as cost and schedule variances. Variances are calculated at the CA level and are summarized upward through the WBS. The Cost Schedule Status Report (C/SSR), monthly and weekly summary status reports, and other Parsons internal performance reports are used to assess future performance and progress toward meeting cost and schedule objectives for the Project.
8.1.3.2 Accounting
The accounting process provides for the timely and accurate collection of all direct and indirect costs associated with a project. Costs are accumulated using the Parsons accounting structure, which is identified to WBS codes, subcontracts, and purchase orders for summarization and higher level reporting purposes. Indirect costs are budgeted and collected within established pools for allocation to a project. The methods used to collect and control these costs are governed by Parsons Disclosure Statement and are reviewed and approved periodically by the Defense Contract Audit Agency (DCAA).
8.1.3.3 Performance Analysis
The early detection and correction of performance related problems is a major benefit of a properly implemented EVMS. The performance analysis and estimate at completion process (EAC) focuses management’s attention on critical project issues by identifying CAs that have exceeded established variance thresholds. The CAM provides an evaluation of the impact of identified problems and corrective actions required to mitigate the problem. In addition to evaluating progress, a monthly assessment is made of cost and schedule resources required to complete the project. The PICS requires the project to develop a comprehensive estimate to complete (CETC) at least once a year. CAMs review their control account estimate at completion monthly. The schedule and cost index report data is utilized by the CAMs to improve the accuracy of their estimate at completion calculations and in defining project impacts and corrective actions.
8.1.3.4 Analyzing the Impact of Indirect Cost Applications to Project Costs
Project controls will include the impact of overhead (indirect costs) on the project. Each month they assess this impact of indirect costs on the project’s estimate at completion.
8.1.3.5 Reporting
Data from the PICS is used to generate project reports, and to manage the project. The regular project performance reports for the MMRP will be Cost and Schedule Status Report (C/SSR), monthly cost and technical report, weekly summary status report, and schedule and cost performance index reports as well as add-hoc reporting.
8.1.4 Material and Subcontract Management
8.1.4.1 Material Management
Parsons has established material control and procurement systems and procedures. These systems and procedures also provide a basis for integrating subcontractor performance into the PICS and for tracking materials throughout the life of the project. Obligated costs, where applicable, will also be provided.
8-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
8.1.4.2 Subcontractor Management
Major subcontractors, who are considered to be extensions of the Parsons project-team, perform work that is part of a CAM's responsibility. Although these subcontractors operate their own management systems, these systems must support the CAM's ability to plan and control work. Contractual provisions are included in the subcontract to formally specify requirements that facilitate this capability. CAMs and project control representatives work with counterparts in the subcontractors' organizations to develop processes to integrate the subcontractor cost and schedule data into the PICS. Periodic baseline reviews and audits are conducted by Parsons to ensure compliance with these requirements. The accounting system will hold obligated costs for major subcontractors.
Other (non-major) subcontractors that get progress payments based on costs incurred and evidence of physical accomplishment must also be represented in the baseline plan. Budgets are based on the progress payment plan with earned value and actual costs based on progress against pay items and accrued actual costs. The accounting system will hold obligated costs for non-major subcontractors.
8.1.5 Change Control
Two categories of baseline changes exist, those that can be made unilaterally by Parsons Management (internal changes) and those that require approval by the customer (external changes).
8.1.5.1 External Changes
External changes for the MMRP will be in the form of Task Orders and their revisions. As explained above, Parsons will conduct detailed planning for each task order prior to its issuance by CESPK. External changes will not be incorporated into the performance measurement baseline until the contracting officer approves them and they are issued to Parsons. No work will be executed or costs accumulated on an issued TO until the PM authorizes the same through the internal work authorization process.
8.1.5.2 Internal Changes
Internal changes/re-planning is intended to achieve efficiencies in operation. Transfer of funds between TOs and/or subtasks will be strictly controlled by CESPK.
8.1.6 System Surveillance
Though not a specific requirement for the MMRP project, Parsons will conduct surveillance of the management information system (EVMS modules) to ensure they are compliant with both the company’s system and customer approved project specific changes. System Surveillance may occur in any of four ways: internal company surveillance, independent consultant surveillance, customer surveillance, or joint company/customer surveillance. As a matter of policy and practice, Parsons assures maintenance of systems through implementation of internal surveillance programs. These internal surveillance programs include surveillance of the EVMS system applications.
Effective administration of the System Surveillance Program identifies changes that need to be made to the PICS whether such changes result from a need to correct shortcomings or an opportunity for improvement.
8-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
8.1.7 Procedures
EVMS is implemented at the project level through procedures. The PICS is implemented at the project level through company and project specific procedures.
8.2 SYSTEM CONCEPTS AND USE
8.2.1 Overview
The PICS provides the ability to analyze cost/schedule information and determine the project's performance against the established baseline throughout the life cycle of the MMRP. Variance identification and analysis aids in isolating causes of deviation from the plan and allows the mitigation process to minimize overall impact. Through timely reporting, management can take actions necessary to bring the variances under control. The overall system concepts and use of the PICS are shown in Figure 8-2.
8-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Figure 8-2: Parsons Integrated Control System (PICS) Flow Chart
PARSONS INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (PICS)
BUDGET INITIATE REQUEST CONTRACT BASELINE MONTH CHANGE MILESTONES RFP PROPOSAL CONTRACT CONTRACTUAL ESTABLISHED CLOSE IMPLEMENTED SUBMITTAL AWARD CHANGE
CUSTOMER CUSTOMER
BUSINESS CONTRACT DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION
PROJECT MANAGER/ PROJECT PROPOSAL OFFICE MANAGER
INVOLVED MANAGEMENT ESTIMATING
PROGRAM PROGRAM CONTROL CONTROL TEAM TEAM
FUNCTIONAL FUNCTIONAL MANAGER/ MANAGER/ CONTROL ACCT CONTROL ACCT MANAGER MANAGER
ESTABLISHING ESTABLISHING AUTHORIZING ACCOMPLISHING REPLANNING & THE THE WORK AND MONTHLY PERFORMANCE INCORPORATING TO ACCOMPLISH THE PROPOSAL CONTRACT RECORDING PERFORMANCE REPORTING CONTRACT FUNCTIONS OF BASELINE BASELINE COSTS MEASUREMENT CHANGE
IN A WAY THAT PROVIDES A. ACCOUNTABILITY AND TRACEABILITY OF TIME PHASED COSTS - FROM TO TO IN A PROPOSAL CONTRACT STATUS CHANGING ESTIMATE BUDGETS REPORTS ENVIRONMENT
B. ACCOUNTABILITY AND TRACEABILITY OF WORK VERTICALLY FROM THE CONTRACT TO THE WORK PACKAGE C. REPORTING OF CONTRACT COST & SCHEDULE STATUS TO PARSONS MANAGEMENT AND TO THE CLIENT IN A CLEAR AND CONCISE MANNER
8.2.2 Data Update
During each monthly reporting cycle, update and statusing of each active control account is performed to provide the most recent data possible for analysis purposes. During this reporting cycle, the CAMs assess the work accomplished to date and the BCWP. ACWP is provided by the Parsons accounting system called PRISM and the CAMs assess the EAC based on current progress and projections of future performance. This data is provided to Project Controls.
The CAMs are responsible for the assessment of BCWP and updating the EAC. Project Controls is responsible for compiling the updated information, checking the input and overseeing the generation and distribution of internal system reports.
The PICS has the capability to produce both internal and external performance measurement reports at any selected level of the WBS and OBS. Performance measurement data (i.e. BCWS, BCWP, ACWP, Budget at Completion (BAC), EAC and resulting variances) are available at each level of the WBS and OBS.
8-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
The PICS shows any associated Schedule Variance (SV), and Cost Variance (CV), plus Budget at Complete (BAC) and Estimate at Complete (EAC) and their difference, Variance at Completion (VAC), originating within the control accounts. Schedule Performance Indexes (SPI) and Cost Performance Indexes (CPI) are produced at the CA level also. From this point, performance measurement data is summed upward through the WBS and OBS to the TO, and total contract level.
BCWP is earned in the same manner that BCWS was established. For example, if work was planned (BCWS) for a TO work element using the apportioned effort method, then BCWP must be earned using the same method while taking into consideration the same control accounts and/or work packages used to establish BCWS.
8.2.3 Monthly Reporting Cycles
The reports generated from the cost and schedule system are updated and published monthly. The amount of data, participants making inputs, processing time, and other considerations require that an orderly process be used to collect, review, report, and use the data generated by the system. The basic data in planning and accounting are financial in nature. Therefore, the monthly reporting cycle is based on the accounting month.
The CAM is responsible for providing schedule status to project controls to show accomplishment for all discrete open work packages. This, plus the accumulation of actual costs, allows reports containing BCWS, BCWP and ACWP to be generated. CAMs receive the portion(s) of these reports that include their control account(s). This allows them to see their performance status each month. Following the distribution of these reports, Variance Analysis Reports are generated based on established thresholds. The following paragraphs address Variance Analysis Reporting.
8.2.4 Variance Analysis Thresholds
Variance analysis is performed at the control account level and reported to the CESPK at level II of the WBS. Variance analysis thresholds are identified for each of these levels. Variance thresholds for the CESPK reporting Level of the WBS will be negotiated with the CESPK and implemented. If the CESPK does not establish variance analysis thresholds, Parsons will recommend reasonable thresholds based on cumulative reporting level budget values. Variance thresholds for CAs are established by Parsons and agreed to by the CESPK.
8.2.5 Variance Analysis
The purpose of variance analysis is to investigate the scope and impact to the overall project. The Program Manager monitors approved corrective actions to resolution via the corrective action log or other specified approach.
The responsible Control Account Manager for each CA completes the VAR for any variance exceeding established thresholds. The CAM must analyze the reason for the variance, the impact to the CA or the project along with any corrective action(s) that can be taken. In addition, the CAM performs an estimate at completion analysis.
8-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
8.2.6 Cost Variance
A CV is calculated by subtracting ACWP from BCWP. The CV is an assessment of the cost performance on work accomplished. Dividing the CV by BCWP and multiplying the resulting quotient by 100 can calculate the cost variance percentage.
A cost index, called Cost Performance Index (CPI), can be calculated by dividing BCWP by ACWP. The index indicates the cost efficiency at which the work has been performed.
8.2.7 Schedule Variance
The SV is calculated by subtracting BCWS from BCWP. While the CV provides an accurate assessment of performance, the SV should only be used as an indicator because it does not consider the criticality of tasks, only their associated dollar values, nor does it provide insight to relative time variances. Dividing the SV by BCWS and multiplying the resulting quotient by 100 can calculate the Schedule Variance percentage.
A schedule index, called Schedule Performance Index (SPI), can be calculated by dividing BCWP by BCWS. The index indicates the schedule efficiency at which work has been performed. This is only an indicator and the schedule must be reviewed to determine schedule status.
8.2.8 At-Completion Variance
An At-Completion Variance is calculated by subtracting the Estimate at Completion from the BAC. When the EAC exceeds the total budget, an overrun is being forecasted. The At- Completion Variance percentage is calculated by dividing that At-Completion Variance by the total budget (BAC) and multiplying the resulting quotient by 100. A Project Cost Index is calculated by dividing the BAC by the EAC. This index is similar to the CPI but represents projected at completion performance rather than experienced performance. The project cost index can be compared to the cumulative to date CPI to determine whether the manager is projecting improved or deteriorating performance.
8.2.9 Monitoring Corrective Action
The Program Manager is responsible for monitoring corrective actions identified during the variance analysis process until those actions are resolved.
The Program Manager, functional managers and CAMs meet monthly for the purpose of reviewing technical, cost and schedule performance data. Causes and impacts of variances are discussed, as well as appropriate corrective actions. The results of previously implemented actions are also a part of this discussion. Minutes and/or notes from these meetings are formally documented.
8.2.10 Variance Reporting
Variance Analysis Reports (VARs) are prepared by the CAMs for each control account exceeding established cost and/or schedule thresholds for the cumulative-to-date performance data or variance at completion thresholds. CAMs are responsible for determining the cause of the variance and its impact on the control account and related activities and milestones, developing a
8-11 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
corrective action plan, where possible, and including this information in the appropriate sections of the VAR.
Project Controls prepares the C/SSR for submission to the CESPK. The Program Manager, project administrator and functional managers jointly prepare and approve the monthly VAR at the C/SSR reporting level of the WBS. This preparation is based on the CESPK reporting Level C/SSR and the associated VARs provided by the CAMs.
CAMs develop realistic corrective action plans, where possible, and identify "get well" dates on the VAR. The PM monitors corrective actions to ensure that they are being accomplished and yield the desired results. This is normally accomplished via the Corrective Action Log maintained by the PM and/or project controls.
The PM/project controls/functional manager discuss the variance analyses with CAMs as necessary, and determine if the explanations adequately describe the causes, impacts and corrective action. Any changes in EAC are reviewed by the PM to determine if they are acceptable and reasonable before the revisions are to be entered into the reporting system.
If a VAR is not acceptable, it is returned with comments to the CAM. Any VARs that have wide disparities between the CAM's evaluation and the Program Manager's comments are subjects to further discussion until finally resolved.
Project Controls uses the monthly performance measurement data and variance analysis report to update charts, graphs and other visual aids used in the monthly reviews with Parsons’ management and CESPK.
8.2.11 Trend Analysis
Graphic analysis often reveals trends that go unnoticed by statistical analysis. Any analysis must take into account the contract percent complete. Although percent complete may be derived by many methods, for EVMS performance measurement purposes it is calculated by dividing BCWP by the total budget (BAC) and multiplying by 100. This formula yields a relatively accurate percent complete because BCWP is a representation of the amount of work accomplished and the total budget represents the total amount of work planned. Also used are analysis of period and cumulative SPI & CPI, prior months’ performance vs. current month, etc.
8.2.12 Estimate at Completion
The primary objective in preparing an estimate of completion (EAC) is to provide an accurate projection of cost at contract completion. The EAC is derived by adding ACWP plus the estimate to complete (ETC). The cumulative ACWP portion of the EAC is the more objective portion of the EAC formula; nevertheless, it should be reviewed for missing or incorrect charges before it can be considered valid. As a minimum, EACs are based on performance to date, actual costs to date, projections of future performance, economic escalation, expected indirect burden rates, and material commitments.
The basis of the ETC is the estimate for the remaining authorized scope of work regardless of whether or not it is budgeted. Using this as a starting point, the CAM must evaluate the validity as estimated future costs. A recovery plan for any existing cost and schedule variances will have an impact on the ETC and must be considered. The CAM must also consider other factors when
8-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
estimating future costs, such as any past problem areas that may have an effect on future work, technical breakthroughs, improvements in methods, and any other knowledge regarding the tasks to be done.
EACs are developed with varying degrees of detail and supporting documentation. A comprehensive EAC is prepared at least annually. Priority changes, partial terminations, and current performance indicate a need for an EAC update. These events may cause a comprehensive EAC to be developed. The detailed ETC will include a description of the work remaining, a forecast of the time frame it is to be performed in, and the estimated costs of resources to accomplishment it.
Each month the CAM evaluates the current EAC for accuracy using project knowledge, SPI and CPI. If the CAM does not believe the existing EAC is correct, he/she prepares a new time- phased ETC, by element of cost, for each work package and planning package and reports it at the control account level. This EAC is less detailed than the comprehensive EAC.
8.3 PROJECT ORGANIZATION
Parsons has evaluated the work requirements for the anticipated TOs and has developed a comprehensive approach for meeting its objectives. Our approach provides a structure for performance of the work, which results in maximized project performance.
Figure 2-1 depicts the management structure that Parsons employs during this project. This structure provides an appropriate level of management, safety and quality oversight for the project, and ensures that work performed will be executed in an efficient, safe and appropriate manner.
8.3.1 Subcontractors
Parsons issues detailed subcontracts that designate the services to be provided, monitors performance to ensure that these services are provided, and reviews all billing documents to ensure that they accurately reflect the services provided. In the event of a disagreement between Parsons and a subcontractor concerning the services provided or the cost of these services Parsons resolves these difference/discrepancies prior to submitting either the subcontractor’s work or billings to CESPK.
8.3.1.1 Subcontractor Supervision
Throughout execution of task orders Parsons maintains overall supervisory responsibility for all operations. Subcontractors work under the direction and oversight of FOM and are monitored by the UXOSO and the UXOQCS. All operational activities are scheduled by FOM and a strict accounting is made of actions performed and activities completed. Throughout their operations subcontractors coordinate their operational schedules with the FOM and strictly adhere to this Work Plan.
8.4 WORK SCHEDULE
Parsons has worked with the CESPK in developing various short- and long-term schedules. Efforts to finalize a programmatic project schedule will continue. This schedule will then be maintained on site at the field office and updated on a regular basis. The schedule will depict the activities associated with the work in each operating area, the sequence in which the work will be
8-13 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
performed and a proposed start and finish date for accomplishing the work. The schedule will be based on Parsons’ alternate work schedule which is a forty-hour workweek consisting of four ten- hour days. The daily work schedule for the field crews is outlined in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1: Daily Activity Schedule
Time Activity Location 06:30 Safety Briefing and Team Leader Brief Field Office 07:00 Start Operations and Tailgate Safety Meeting Work Area 09:30 Morning Break (10 minutes) Work Area 11:30 Lunch 12:00 Resume Work Work Area 13:30 Afternoon Break (10 minutes) Work Area 15:30 Afternoon Break (10 minutes) Work Area 16:30 Stop Operations Work Area 16:45 Clean and Store Equipment Field Office 17:00 End of Work Day
For site conditions where personnel are working in Level D PPE and the ambient temperature is greater than 70 ºF the UXOSO will conduct monitoring to assist in controlling the potential for site workers experiencing heat related adverse health affects. The break schedule may be altered as needed upon instructions from the UXOSO to avoid the effects of heat stress.
8.5 MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS
Parsons has structured its manpower requirements to meet the anticipated operational requirements of the task orders. The structure is designed to minimize associated costs (i.e., travel and per-diem), and maximize technical talents and skills for executing the work associated with this TO.
8.5.1 Travel and Per Diem
Travel and per diem costs associated with this task order are based on the Joint Travel Regulation (JTR).
8.5.1.1 Travel
This category includes all chargeable travel that is incurred during the execution of the task orders. Included is travel for mobilization, operations and home leave. The cost is an estimate based on the number of trips required and an average cost for commercial air-travel. During the execution of this task order Parsons arranges travel through its corporate travel agent, and whenever possible obtains reduced fares based on 21 days advance bookings.
8.5.1.2 Meals and Lodging
Amounts are computed using the rates for meals and lodging authorized in the JTR and the lodging rates where Parsons presently houses employees.
8-14 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
8.5.2 Equipment, Materials and Supplies
Chapter 9 identifies the procedures for rental and purchase of equipment to support the work associated with the project. Prior to the start of operations Parsons will coordinate with CESPK’s Property Manager to identify specific items from the list of required equipment, which the Government will provide. A list of government furnished equipment (GFE) is included in Chapter 9.
8.5.3 Meetings
Parsons and CESPK project management personnel meet weekly to discuss project status and progress. A monthly C/SSR meeting is held to review the status of the project, schedule, costs and any other issues.
8-15 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 9 PROPERTY MANAGEMENT PLAN
9.1 POLICY
It is Parsons’ policy to maintain government property and establish a system for acquiring, using, caring for, controlling, managing, reporting, redistributing, and disposing of government property project items (supplies/inventories) in full accordance with good commercial practice and the requirements of FAR Part 45, Government Property, including applicable FAR Part 52 clauses.
9.2 SCOPE
Parsons, during the performance of contract work, may obtain property (e.g., materials, parts, or equipment) as provided by the Federal Government (GFP, GFM, GFE), fabricated by Parsons, or by purchasing from outside parties for use in performing the contract requirements. The property may be consumed in the course of the work or may remain as a tangible asset after completion of the work. Title to property acquired by Parsons and its subcontractors often transfers to the Government and, as such, requires special control and administration by Parsons. This chapter is prepared in accordance with requirements contained in FAR Part 45.5, Management of Government Property in Possession of Contractors, and provides instructions for the control and administration of Government property.
9.3 RESPONSIBILITY
9.3.1 Corporate Manager of Procurement
Responsibility for (1) coordinating the Company-wide implementation of procurement policies and procedures, (2) developing government property policies and procedures, and (3) overall management review of government property practices with the intent of assuring adequate awareness of and compliance with company policy and procedures and of FAR Part 45 requirements, has been delegated by the President of Parsons to the Manager of Procurement.
The Manager of Procurement will directly assist the PM in implementing these procedures, and in providing training, advice and conducting periodic compliance reviews. In this task, the Manager of Procurement will provide overall guidance, support and assistance to those carrying out government property activities, keeping program management aware of compliance.
The Manager of Procurement provides government property accounting record templates to allow for local electronic record keeping using Parsons’ standard software. To assure an ability to consolidate, merge, and share data in the electronic property accounting records, the templates will not be modified by projects unless the corporate procurement organization concurs.
9.3.2 Program Manager
The PM maintains overall responsibility for ensuring that property and equipment requirements are anticipated in sufficient time for Parsons and/or the Government to process and
9-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
ship the required materials. The PM is also responsible for maintaining accountability of issued equipment and ensuring that this equipment is maintained in an operationally ready state.
9.3.3 Logistician
The Logistician will be the government property focal point and will be assigned responsibility for supporting the project by maintaining government property records and being a property reporting interface with the project client and corporate headquarters. In addition, he is responsible for maintaining a running inventory of supplies/equipment, procuring additional supplies/equipment and scheduling/performing routine maintenance.
9.3.4 Supervisors
Personnel assigned to supervisory positions are responsible for the proper use, storage, and accountability of property and equipment issued to and used by their teams. This responsibility includes performing daily checks to ensure that equipment is present, clean, and serviceable, and ensuring that equipment used during operations is returned and properly secured.
9.3.5 Individuals
All site personnel are responsible for operating and maintaining equipment in a reasonable and prudent manner. This includes using the appropriate tool for the job, daily cleaning of equipment, properly storing and securing equipment at the end of the day, and promptly reporting any equipment failure, breakage or disappearance.
9.4 PROPERTY TYPES AND CLASSIFICATION
The Government classifies property into five main categories. The following is a list of the five categories and the typical types of property that fall within the categories. It is important to refer to the definitions included in this procedure, FAR Part 45 (e.g., 45.505-14), DFARS 245 (245.301), and other government publications and forms (DD Form 1662, DOD 4161.2-M) in order to properly classify government property.
1. Facilities – Includes ‘Contractor Acquired Property’ (FAR 45.101) and ‘Other Plant Equipment’ (ref. DFARS 245.301 & Block #12 of DD 1662). It also includes Industrial Plant Equipment
• Property used for production, maintenance, research, development, or testing
• Real Property (land)
• Other Plant Equipment (are items of a capital nature per FAR 45.101, and do not need to be reports)
• Equipment/Parts
• Machine Tools
• Test Equipment
9-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Furniture
• Vehicles
• Accessory and Auxiliary Items
2. Material
• Incorporated into or attached to a deliverable or a consumable involving:
- Assemblies
- Components
- Parts
- Raw and Processed Materials
- Small Tools
- Supplies
3. Special Tooling (Government title only)
• Manufacturing Equipment and Aids
• Jigs
• Dies
• Fixtures
• Molds
• Patterns
• Taps
• Gauges
4. Special Test Equipment
5. Agency Peculiar Property (e.g., military property)
A basic requirement of effective government property administration is determining the correct property type and understanding what property administration and control requirements apply to specific property.
9-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
9.5 EQUIPMENT RENTAL OR PURCHASE
Parsons must document a rent/purchase analysis for all property acquisitions that will become government property. The minimum requirements for rent/purchase analysis are listed at FAR 7.401 'Acquisition considerations'. The following considerations apply to rent/purchase analysis:
• Rent/purchase analysis is a case-by-case evaluation of comparative costs and other factors;
• If rental is appropriate, then the PM will be notified if the rental is over two months in duration and/or over $1,000 in value;
• Rental/purchase analysis applies even when the equipment is rented from Parsons;
• Purchase is generally appropriate if the equipment will be used beyond the point in time when cumulative renting costs exceed the purchase cost;
• Rental is appropriate if it is to the Government's advantage under the circumstances; and
• If rental is justified, rental with option to purchase may be preferable.
9.6 PROPERTY MANAGEMENT
Parsons is responsible and liable for government property in its possession to the extent provided for by the contract. Parsons may also be liable for loss or damage of government property or when the use or consumption of government property exceeds reasonable levels. The Logistician is responsible for maintaining up-to-date government property records, and taking appropriate measures to protect and preserve government property to prevent loss, damage, excessive use or consumption, theft, and deterioration. Furthermore, government property will be clearly identified and should not be intermingled with Parsons’ owned or personal property or that from other parties.
9.7 LOSS, DAMAGE AND DESTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY
The Logistician will investigate and report any loss, damage to, or destruction of government property to the PM and FOM as the loss is known. This reporting includes any variances resulting from annual physical inventories. At a minimum, the Loss, Damage, Destruction Report, in letter format, will contain the following:
• Company name and contract number;
• Description of item lost, damaged, destroyed, or unreasonably consumed;
• Condition at time of loss or damage;
• Date of last inventory;
• Projected cost of repair/replacement;
9-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Date, time (if pertinent), and cause of origin of the loss, damage, destruction, or consumption;
• When last seen, who saw it, who had access, who reported or noted the problem;
• Actions taken to locate;
• Remedial actions taken to prevent further loss, damage, destruction, or unreasonable consumption, and to prevent repetition of similar incidents;
• Other relevant information (e.g., cite pertinent contract Government property clauses); and
• Insurance, if any, covering the Government property or any part or interest in any commingled property.
The Logistician shall ensure that program subcontractors possessing or controlling government property accountable under the contract investigate and report all instances of loss, damage, or destruction of such property.
9.8 INTERNAL AUDIT AND COMPLIANCE REVIEW
The Parsons Corporation's Internal Audit organization will also check for auditing compliance with this policy on a periodic basis. These internal audits will be conducted throughout the life of the project and can involve discussions with outside subcontractors and vendors.
The Logistician will conduct periodic spot inspections, validation inventories, and review of implementation of these procedures.
9.9 ACQUISITION
Government property may be acquired directly from the Government (Government furnished Property or "GFP") or through purchase order, subcontract, or fabrication (Contractor Acquired Property or "CAP"). In most cases, Parsons will be administering Contractor Acquired Property. The following requirements must be met for CAP:
• Item is contractually authorized;
• Quantity ordered is reasonably required;
• Purchase orders are issued in accordance with the Parsons Procurement Manual;
• Item description, contract number, and price are reflected in the purchase order; and
• Consent or approval is obtained, if required, and documented in the PO file.
9-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
9.10 RECEIVING
Receiving is the process of initially entering Government property into Parsons’ custody. Record must be maintained for accountability and shall include, as a minimum, the date of receipt, name of receiver, item description, quantity received, and contract number.
Upon receipt of the property, it will be inspected for damage, quantity, and quality by the Logistician.
Where quantity, condition, and description differs from that shown on the shipping document, proper adjustment documentation is prepared by the Logistician detailing the receiving discrepancy (SF 364, Report of Discrepancy) and forwards it to the PM for resolution. Only the quantity of property actually received in acceptable condition will be inducted and recorded in Parsons Government property records.
9.11 IDENTIFICATION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY
Upon receipt of government property by Parsons, the following will be accomplished for each piece of property:
• Property will be properly classified (e.g., special test equipment, special tooling, material, other plant equipment, Contractor Acquired Property, etc.);
• Property will be identified with a Parsons Government Property Identification Number 1 (GPIN or tag number; see footnote below). The GPINs are unique, within Parsons, to the particular piece of government property. Property will be marked (with a property tag or otherwise) to indicate the GPIN and identification that the property is government property. Nameplates or ID tags should specify the Parsons CAGE code; government's prime contract number and/or that contract no. of the higher-tier contractor; a part no. and serial no. (if applicable); nomenclature (description), etc.;
• If appropriate, high value or sensitive property (hazardous material, precious metals, etc.) will be tagged for better control;
• Returnable/reusable containers will be controlled and accounted for.
In some cases, government agency or higher tier contractor procedures require that property be identified with agency or higher tier contractor GPINs. In such cases, the Project Property Manager will request that the agency or higher tier contractor provide the GPIN and tag. Furthermore, in such cases, only the agency or higher tier contractor GPINs and tags will be used to identify and record such Government property.
1 GPIN numbers will be in the format of GP000000-00001 (GP for Government Property, the next six numbers is the project Parsons Job Number, and the four digit suffix is a sequential series of numbers indicating the sequence in which the item was tagged.
9-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
9.12 TAGGING
All government property shall be tagged or marked and recorded promptly upon receipt or fabrication (unless exempted per FAR 45.506 "Identification"). Tagging will be by means of a decal, bar coding, stamping, steel die, etching, tag, or other method determined by the program/project to be appropriate.
9.13 RECORDS
Once the property is accepted by Parsons and tagged, it will be entered into the appropriate property control record (Property Register – Form GP-005) (Appendix D) or immediately issued for consumption.
Parsons will maintain property records that identify all government property and provide a complete, current, auditable record of all property transactions. Forms for government property record keeping provided in this procedure provide for adequate control of government property as required by FAR Part 45.
FAR Part 45 requires specific data for each type of government property (FAR 45.505). Accurate preparation and maintenance of the standard Parsons Government property forms must be practiced to assure the required data is recorded.
To simplify record keeping, the following codes will be used to record data in the government property records (use as may be practical and supplement with additional codes as ma be needed):
Property Type refers to how Parsons acquired the Government property use:
GFP -Government furnished property and
CAP -Contractor (Parsons) acquired Government property
Property Classification refers to the following classes of Government property:
MTL Material
PE - Plant Equipment
OPE Other Plant Equipment
ST- Special Tooling
STE Special Test Equipment
Condition Code refers to the condition of the government property at disposition (also see FAR 45.606-5 for condition codes).
Discrepancy Codes and Action Codes are shown on the SF 364 "report of discrepancy."
9-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
9.13.1 Records for Material
All government furnished material and material for which title has passed to the Government by reason of allocation from Parsons owned stores or by purchase for direct charge to a Government contract, shall be recorded as government property (material). Parsons form GP-003, (Appendix D), Stock Record Card, will be used for this purpose. Property records for material must provide a complete record of receipt, stockage, issuance, and consumption/disposition. Additionally, property records for material must be sufficient to allow for effective material use or consumption analysis.
9.14 STORAGE
Government property acquired by virtue of a cost-reimbursement type contract, or received as GFP are to be stored separately unless prior approval is received from CESPK to commingle with capital assets. All government property, whether commingled or not (FAR 45.507) will be identified as set forth in this procedure. If commingling occurs, the government property must not lose its identity as government property and there should be a method in place for equitable apportionment of inventory loss [refer to 45.507 & DOD 4161.2-M (p. 3-10)].
Care will be taken to provide protection of all government property so as to be protected from pilferage, corrosion, weather, etc.
9.15 MOVEMENT
During movement, attention will be given to proper packing, covering and proper handling techniques. Safety precautions will be enforced. Shipment of government property whether delivery of an end item or return of government property will be documented on the appropriate Agency forms (e.g., for DOD programs/projects, DD Form 1149). Movement of government property is tracked so that property records can be updated to show changes in quantities and location.
9.16 MAINTENANCE OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY
Preventative maintenance will be conducted on a regularly scheduled basis according to sound industrial practices. Necessary precautions will be taken to prevent deterioration caused by contamination, corrosion, weather and other substances. Normal repair and parts replacement, including calibration, will be performed on applicable government property per FAR 45.509.1. Records will be maintained on all equipment on all equipment determine to require preventive or corrective maintenance. The equipment will be scheduled for periodic maintenance according to schedule.
9.17 CONSUMPTION
Consumption is the process of incorporating government owned property into an end item, or otherwise consuming it in the performance of a contract (testing, for example). Care will be taken that all materials charged to a contract will be used only on the contract authorized. Parsons government property control and management of government property will maximize conservation of government property to the maximum practical extent. The following will be the practice of the program/government property activities:
9-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Excess material will be returned to stores and recorded;
• Where appropriate, use is made of repaired and salvaged, rather than new items; and
• For dated items, a first in first out (FIFO) inventory system is utilized.
9.18 UTILIZATION & SCRAP
Utilization is the process of using government property only for the purpose for which it was furnished or acquired. Government property must be used only in support of the contract or task order under which it was acquired and only for purposes authorized by the contract, unless the cognizant Government Contracting Officers provide written approval to the contrary.
When excess government property can be used in the performance of another contract/task order, the transfer of accountability must be authorized by the giving and receiving contracting officer. The PM may request, and receive Government approval for, use or transfer of government property to another Parsons Government contract or task order.
Residual material (extra parts, components, screws, bulk wire, etc.) on fixed –price type contracts will usually belong to Parsons or our subcontractors at the project completion, and cost- reimbursement residual material will usually belong to the government. However, a thorough review of the contract terms (including FAR clauses) and possible discussion with CESPK would be prudent in order to avoid misunderstandings.
Parsons will follow the FAR 45.505-8 and DFARS 245.607 procedures relative to recording, controlling, and disposing of scrap (inventory without value) and recovery of precious metals.
9.19 PHYSICAL INVENTORIES
It is Parsons' policy to conduct physical inventories on an annual basis (more or less frequently, depending on contractual considerations relative to type, amount, value, usage, etc. of the project government property involved). It is suggested that the 30th of September of each year (i.e., end of government fiscal year) will be used as a baseline date and that a physical inventory of all government property will be performed. Inventory will also be performed upon completion, or termination of contract. The Logistician will ensure that the physical inventories are accomplished in a timely manner (e.g., within 30 days) so that he can provide a completed DD Form 1662 to its cognizant DCMA (property administrator) and the project offices to their clients (property administrator) by October 31st.
The PM will commence inventory planning and scheduling at least 30 days prior to physical inventory commencement date. The inventory must be conducted by a person who is not directly responsible for control or custody of the government property being inventoried. In performing the annual inventory, the Logistician will compare the actual inventory counts against the Parsons Government property records and provide the PM with the results of the review. The Logistician will take the appropriate action to resolve any inventory shortages, overages, discrepancies, or deficiencies. Upon approval of the inventory physical findings and reconciliation by the PM, the Project Administrator will update the Property Records with inventory results and an inventory date. All property records must include a current inventory posting.
9-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Parsons and its subcontractors will perform reconciliation for items where there exists a discrepancy between the actual physical count and the "balance on hand" last posted to the property records.
During the inventory process, all government property in Parsons’ possession will be screened to determine if the property is still required for the performance of the contract. If government property is no longer required, it will be classified as surplus and be dispositioned in accordance with Disposition of Government Property of this procedure.
A listing will be provided to the CESPK listing all discrepancies disclosed by the physical inventory, with a signed statement that physical inventory of all government property was completed on a given date and that the official property records were found to be in agreement, except as noted.
9.20 REPORTS
By 31 October of each year (based upon a 30 September baseline date for conducting a physical inventory), or on contract completion or termination, or as required by the contract, the Logistician will prepare and submit the contract government property inventory reports on form DD Form 1662 to CESPK. Copies of submitted inventory reports will be forwarded to the Parsons' Manager of Procurement and contract administrator. A zero balance DD Form 1662 will be forwarded at contract completion.
9.21 SUBCONTRACTOR CONTROL
All subcontractors are required to adequately care for, maintain and utilize all government property associated with the subcontract, report any loss, damage or destruction, and conduct physical inventory of government property annually and upon termination/completion of the subcontract.
The PM must assure that all program subcontractors maintain, control, and administer government property in substantially the same manner as set forth in this procedure. Subcontracts will contain appropriate FAR flow-down clauses to require compliance with the FAR Government Property requirements of Parsons’ prime contract. A subcontractor cannot be given relief from liability (e.g., risk-of-loss of government property) except after Parsons receives written relief from CESPK.
Parsons shall require subcontractors to comply with government property accountability and control [FAR 45.502(d)] which will be accomplished by including government property flowdown requirements (e.g., FAR clauses) in the subcontract or purchase order and periodic monitoring for government property statusing through project completion. Subcontractor shall investigate and report to Parsons all instances of loss, damage, shortages, discrepancies, or destruction of government property in its possession or control [FAR 45.504(c)]; perform physical inventories on a periodic basis (FAR 45.508); and adequately care for and maintain the property and assure that it is used only as authorized by the contract (FAR 45.510).
9-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
9.22 DISPOSITION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY
Upon completion or termination of the contract, or when items are determined to be excess or obsolete and no longer required in the performance of a contract/task order or other ongoing contract performance requirements, action will be taken to properly account for and dispose of the Government property. If the property is no longer required, the PM shall request disposition instructions from CESPK.
9.22.1 Screening for Excess/Internal Transfer
As a first step in disposition of government property, the PM will determine if excess government property can be used on other Parsons’ contracts or task orders. If required on another program or project, the releasing PM will request transfer of accountability from CESPK. Upon authorization of an internal transfer of government property, the PM will ensure that:
• The government property is relocated to the other contract/task order;
• A signed property transfer record (DD 1149) for the government property is obtained from the receiving contract’s Property Manager; and
• A final entry in the Government Property Register is made.
9.22.2 Transfer to Government
If the government property is no longer needed by Parsons, the PM will submit a written disposition request to CESPK
For government property to be transferred outside of Parsons, the Logistician will ensure that:
• The property is shipped to the designated depot or other requested location;
• A signed property transfer record (DD 1149) is obtained;
• After receiving the receipt or other evidence of safe deliver, a final entry into the property records is made;
• Parsons government property identification tags will be removed from the items prior to disposal when appropriate;
• Disposal will be in a reasonable amount of time after disposal instructions are received and where appropriate, proceeds credited to the Government; and
• Generally, the Government will usually reimburse contractor in some manner for handling disposition and shipping activities. However, review the contract terms to avoid misunderstandings.
9.23 CONTRACT PROPERTY CLOSE-OUT
Upon contract completion or termination, the Logistician will ensure that:
9-11 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• A final inventory of government property is accomplished and all inventory adjustments, liability determinations, and other property issues are resolved;
• Property is screened for possible use on other contracts;
• A close-out disposition request is submitted to the KO;
• KO’s disposition instructions are accomplished and documented using the appropriate forms;
• Entries are made to the Parsons government property records to reflect disposition and close-out;
• Documentation of the disposition and the KO’s disposition approval are filed with the contract property records;
• If applicable, submit a final DD Form 1662 reflecting zero inventory balance. An example of when this requirement would be applicable is when the DD Form 1662 for the previous reporting period reflected an inventory balance; and
• Property records are filed with the permanent contract file so they are available for possible future audit.
9.24 GOVERNMENT PROPERTY TRANSFERRED TO PARSONS
Government property currently on site at Fort Ord has been transferred to Parsons and will be inspected for serviceability, compatibility, and need.
9-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 10 ORDNANCE AND EXPLOSIVES SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS PLAN
The Ordnance and Explosives Sampling and Analysis Plan (OESAP) was issued January 2002
10-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2001
CHAPTER 11 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
11.1 INTRODUCTION
This Quality Control Plan (QCP) establishes and describes the quality requirements for the contractor services contract for the Fort Ord MMRP as directed by the government. The QCP applies to all work performed by Parsons and its Subcontractors. This QCP shall adhere to the requirements specified in CESPK, Sacramento District’s Quality Management Plan (QMP) and Data Item Description (DID) OT-FTO-11, Quality Control Plan.
The Senior Vice President and Manager of Parsons’ Federal Division have assigned a QCM to the project. The QCM shall develop this QCP to provide an independent capability to ensure and verify that the quality objectives comply with prescribed criteria through surveillance, audits, and various document reviews. Parsons’ corporate policy on quality is as follows:
“We are committed to providing quality services and products. We will meet the requirements of our clients and strive for continual improvement of our work processes.”
Above all, project quality is the responsibility of the entire project team. The team’s comprehension of this QCP is of primary significance for quality objectives to be accomplished; thus, the training and indoctrination of the key personnel in the quality objectives will be conducted. The authority and responsibility of the key personnel are provided in sub-section 11.3 of this QCP. All UXO QC personnel reporting directly to the QCM have the authority to identify deficiencies and propose and approve solutions. All UXO QC personnel have stop work authority for all QC issues.
The organization structure ensures that quality is achieved and maintained by those personnel responsible for performing the work and that verification of quality is performed by personnel other than those who performed the work.
The original issue and the subsequent revisions to the QCP require approval of the PM. The adequacy and effective implementation of this program will be assessed semi-annually by a management assessment team appointed by the PM.
11.2 ORGANIZATION
11.2.1 General
Organizational responsibilities of Parsons’ project personnel are described in this sub-section. Organization chart defining the lines of authority and responsibilities shall be per Data Item Description (DID) OT-FTO-02 (Technical Management Plan).
11-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.2.2 Authority and Responsibility
The project organization is headed by the PM who is the single focal point for successful accomplishment of all phases of the project. The PM reports directly to the Vice President and Manager, OE Sector of Parsons Infrastructure and Technology’s Government Division and is accountable to Parsons and the U.S. Army for successful project accomplishment. The PM is given full authority and responsibility for project execution and is authorized to negotiate work, sign contracts and permits, and obtain the resources necessary to assure effective project execution. The PM is supported by direct line managers with functions and responsibilities outlined below.
The PM approves the QCP, implements procedures and has direct responsibility for day-to- day operations of the project. His responsibilities related to QC include, but are not limited to:
• Implementation of all applicable Parsons policies and procedures;
• Timely submission of all contract deliverables; and
• Analyzing QC failures with the QCM and FOM and ensuring that corrective actions have been appropriately implemented.
The QCM reports to the Parsons Corporate QA Manager, and interfaces with the PM. The QCM, as a management representative, has the following authorities and responsibilities: • Ensure that the QCP has been established, maintained and implemented for the Fort Ord project;
• Establishing guidelines to assist in the development of program, project, site and task specific QC policies and procedures;
• Initiate, recommend, approve, or provide solutions to the quality problems identified in QCP during system audits;
• Conducting periodic audits/inspections of the projects and sites and submitting reports to the Corporate QA Manager with copies to the Program Manager; and
• Reporting the adequacy, status, and effectiveness of ongoing projects to the Corporate QA Manager.
All UXO QC personnel report to the QCM on quality matters. On-site QC personnel have the responsibility for overall quality of work performed on site. Responsibilities include, but are not limited to:
• Develop QC procedures to implement the QC Plan;
• Verify implementation of corrective actions;
• Initiate actions to identify and prevent the occurrence of nonconformance relating to the services and QCP;
• Authority to stop nonconforming work;
11-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Coordinating with District’s QA representative for daily activities;
• Coordinating with the QCM to ensure that QC procedures are being followed and are appropriate in demonstrating data validity sufficient to meet data quality objectives (DQOs);
• Recommending actions to be taken in the event of QC failures, to the QCM;
• Reporting non-compliance with QC criteria to the PM and QCM;
• Any UXO QC person has the authority to suspend project activities when a condition adverse to quality is identified. The PM and senior personnel responsible for clearance activities will be notified when such action is required;
• Conduct inspections of MEC portions of the GIS database;
• Prepare and submit a daily QC report for CESPK review and records (this report is submitted by COB the following day)
• Conducting daily QC audits/inspection; and
The Geophysical Quality Control Specialist reports to the QCM and is responsible for the quality of geophysical data. Responsibilities include, but are not limited to:
• Reviewing and implementing the geophysical portion of the project QCP;
• Performing checks and reviews of all raw and processed digital data;
• Performing periodic audits of geophysical survey teams;
• Conducting inspections of digital geophysical portions of the GIS database;
• Monitoring transfer of raw and processed geophysical data deliverables;
• Monitoring geophysical prove-out tests and results;
• Managing geophysical data;
• Recommending actions to be taken in the event of geophysical data QC
• Authority to initiate, recommend, and provide solutions to quality problems; and
• Authority to recommend suspension of project activities when a condition adverse to quality is identified.
Additionally, UXO QC personnel are responsible for the following:
• Daily audit of GIS data and the respective databases;
11-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Review of procedures and GIS personnel qualifications; and
• In conjunction with the QCM, periodic review of the GIS system.
11.2.3 Personnel Selection, Indoctrination and Training
Key personnel designated by the PM and those requiring licenses, certification, or other forms of qualifications necessary to perform their work, shall be selected and evaluated periodically or on each change of task assignment by program management to ensure that their credentials are current to perform the pre-established job description, meeting the contract requirements referenced in DID OT-FTO-25.
Project personnel performing functions that affect quality will receive, prior to assuming duty, indoctrination and training conducted in accordance with sub-section 11.14 of the QCP.
The job description, indoctrination, training and certification shall be maintained in the project files in accordance with sub-section 11.12 of the QCP.
11.2.4 Evaluation of QCP Implementation
A Parsons corporate QA representative has the authority and responsibility to verify that the QCP has been implemented on the Fort Ord project. The Parsons corporate QA representative shall perform a scheduled, semi-annual audit of the program activities and periodic surveillance in the manner described in sub-section 11.13 of the QCP. The results of these audits and surveillances are reported to the PM and the Parsons corporate QA Manager of the Government Division, to provide a formal assessment of the QC program implementation.
11.3 QUALITY PROGRAM
11.3.1 Preparation, Review, and Acceptance of QCP
The QCP is prepared by the QCM and is reviewed and approved by the PM. After completion of the management review, the QCP shall be submitted to the government for review and acceptance prior to starting any operational activity. Revisions to the QCP shall be reviewed and approved in the same manner as the original issue.
11.3.2 Preparation, Review and Approval of Project Procedures
The Project Procedures shall be reviewed by the QCM, relevant individuals and departments, and the PM, and shall be approved by the PM. Periodic changes to the procedures can be issued Field Variance Forms (FVFs). The FVF changes shall be incorporated into the operating procedures. Each relevant supervisor/manager receiving the FVF shall review the requirements with his/her staff on a weekly basis. At each update of the procedure manual, the PM shall initiate a training program to indoctrinate the Fort Ord staff to the requirements of the procedure update. The structure of project procedures is shown in Table 11-1.
11-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 11-1: The structure of project procedures Procedure Number Type of Procedures 1.X Scope of Work 2.X Administrative Procedures, includes Document Control, Personnel Proficiency, Records Control, Data Control 3.X Cost Engineering, Scheduling, Estimating 4.X Quality Control, Inspection and Testing, Supplier Quality, Training 5.XX Design Control, Configuration Control 6.XX Procurement Control, Subcontractor Control 7.XX Operational Procedures E-XX Environmental Compliance Procedure
11.3.3 Control of QCP and Project Procedures
Controlled copies of the QCP and the Project Procedures shall be distributed to key project personnel. An electronic copy of the PWP and SSWPs are available on the shared project drive.
11.3.4 Geophysical Survey QC
QC is an appropriate evaluation performed by Parsons of contractually defined products, to assure those products fully meet the prescribed requirements and comply with applicable laws, regulations, and sound technical practices.
The QC Geophysicist will be fully responsible for overseeing and documenting all QC performed with respect to the Fort Ord digital geophysical surveys.
The basic QC steps for all digital and analog geophysical survey work at Fort Ord, along with the parties responsible for performing the QC, are presented in Table 11-2.
11-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 11-2 Geophysical QC Steps Activity QC Actions Performed By Overseen By
Digital Geophysical Surveys Equipment Maintenance Geophysical Field Team QC Geophysicist/ UXO QC Coordinator
Weekly Instrument Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist Checks (Instrument Standardization)
Daily Instrument Checks Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist/ UXO QC (Instrument Standardization)
Positioning Control Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist/ UXO QC Checks
Static Checks Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist/ UXO QC
Battery Strength Checks Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist/ UXO QC
Audio Response Checks Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist/ UXO QC
Field Data Quality Checks Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist/ UXO QC
Cable Shake Test Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist
Metal-free Operator check Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist
11-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 11-2 Continued
Activity QC Actions Performed By Overseen By
Download Checks Digital Geophysical QC Geophysicist Teams/ Processing Geophysicists
Field Records Check QC Geophysicist/ QC Geophysicist/ Database Database Manager Manager
Digital Geophysical Data Data Quality Checks Processing Geophysicists QC Geophysicist Processing
Office Review of Field Processing Geophysicists QC Geophysicist Forms
Instrument Processing Geophysicists QC Geophysicist Standardization Checks
Data Sample Spacing Processing Geophysicists QC Geophysicist Checks
Data Line Spacing Checks Processing Geophysicists QC Geophysicist
Instrument Drift Checks Processing Geophysicists QC Geophysicist
11-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 11-2 Continued Activity QC Actions Performed By Overseen By
Processed Data Checks Processing Geophysicists/ QC Geophysicist QC Geophysicist/ Project Geophysicist
Data Deliverable Checks Processing Geophysicists/ QC Geophysicist QC Geophysicist/ Project Geophysicist
Database Checks Database Manager/ QC Database Manager Geophysicist/ UXO QC Specialist
Dig Sheet Checks Prior to Processing Geophysicists/ QC Geophysicist Delivery to UXO QC Geophysicist Subcontractor
UXO Intrusive Operations Field Verification of UXO Intrusive Teams/ QC Geophysicist/ UXOQC Geophysical Data vs Processing Geophysicists/ Specialist Intrusive Results QC Geophysicist
11-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Table 11-2 Continued Activity QC Actions Performed By Overseen By
Digital QC Surveys Verification of Anomaly Geophysical Teams QC Geophysicist Removal During Intrusive Actions and after Completion of Initial Survey
Analog QC Surveys Field Analog QC Surveys UXO QC UXO QC
Field QA Surveys Field QA Surveys CESPK, USACE MM Safety Specialist All Operations Impromptu Field Team QC Geophysicist QC Geophysicist Checks for Adherence to Project Geophysicist Field/QC Procedures UXO QC Specialist
Daily Quality Control QCM Reporting UXO QC
Document Preparation Check document for QCM appropriate and full UXO QC description of QC activities.
11-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
QC of the field data will be performed by Parsons before it is delivered to CESPK and will include checks and reviews of the digital data deliverable. Specific checks will include data completeness, quality, and format checks. Parsons will sign off that the data have been QC’d by Parsons’ personnel. Data that have not undergone quality control checks shall not be delivered to the government unless by mutual agreement.
If at any point during this process the data are found to be deficient, Parsons will take corrective action regarding the data in question.
Geophysical instrumentation utilized for QC of geophysical surveys will be similar in detection/discrimination ability to that used for the main data acquisition. Thus, if an EM61 is used in the main survey, an EM61 will be used for QC.
11.3.5 Geophysical Survey QA
QA is an appropriate management review by CESPK of the overall effectiveness of the QC program, processes, and compliance of Parsons. The QA procedures are the process by which CESPK fulfills its responsibility to be certain that QC is functioning and that the desired specific product (job result) is realized.
11.4 CONTRACT REVIEW
11.4.1 Contract Administration
The PM shall assign the role of the Contracts Administrator for the project. The Parsons Manager of Contracts ensures that contractual obligations are appropriately reviewed for legal, business, and financial detail in accordance with the Corporate Matrix of Authority. The Contracts Administrator shall facilitate such review, coordinate the contract review across the project organizations (engineering, quality assurance, and the project staff), integrate the information necessary for the PM to monitor the project status, verify availability of resources to implement the contract requirements, and manage it accordingly. Upon completion of the review, any area requiring clarification shall be referred back to the government. The minutes of the negotiations and the final agreement shall be documented.
Any contract changes shall require the same level of review by the appropriate organizations. Changes to the contract are conducted through proposal negotiations (by work task) with the government.
Records of all reviews, submittals, clarifications received, and government approvals shall be retained on file in the manner described in sub-section 11.13 of the QCP.
11.4.2 Subcontract/Supplier Administration
The subcontract administrator/buyer shall specify the project requirements in the Request for Proposal (RFP) or Request for Quotation (RFQ). The QC, Design, and Procurement staff shall conduct the supplier evaluation in a manner specified in sub-section 11.7 of the QCP to ensure that potential bidders have the capability to meet the requirements of the proposed subcontract or purchase order. During the award of a subcontract or purchase order the project requirements are reviewed and agreed upon with the subcontractor or the supplier.
11-10 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.5 DESIGN CONTROL
11.5.1 General
Design Control is not within the Parsons Scope of Work under this contract.
This sub-section of the QCP shall be implemented in order to meet the requirements specified in CESPK Report ER 1110-12, Engineering and Design, Quality Management. Table 11-3 lists the Parsons engineering procedures that implement requirements for controlling, verifying and validating design activities:
Table 11-3: Parsons Design Validation Engineering Procedures Procedure Title PRO-XX-90 Intra-discipline Check (XX-Discipline specific) PRO-GE-14 Inter-discipline Review PRO-GE-30 Verification and Validation of Software Computer programs
11.5.2 Design and/or Technical Documentation Verification
The verification of design and/or technical documentation shall be performed by qualified personnel other than those who prepared the design output being verified, and possessing appropriate experience and educational credentials. The results shall be documented as intra- discipline check and inter-discipline review. Records of design verification shall be maintained.
Verification shall be completed prior to release of design output for procurement, manufacture, construction, or release to another organization. Verification shall be completed prior to relying on the item to perform its intended function.
11.5.3 Technical Baseline Control
Technical baseline management shall be maintained in accordance with Chapter 8, the Work, Data and Cost Management Plan, which is in compliance with DID OT-FT-08.
11.5.4 Review of Subcontractor Submittals
The Task PM will administer and control the review of design documents submitted by the subcontractors and suppliers. When required, these submittals shall be submitted to the government for review and approval. The documents shall be transmitted to the project disciplines for review and verification for compliance with the approved design criteria, design basis, and specified requirements in a manner specified by project procedure.
11-11 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.6 DOCUMENT CONTROL
11.6.1 General
A Document Control Log shall be implemented for all the documents generated in accordance with the Data Item Descriptions (DIDs) listed in Table 11-4 (see Appendix H for DIDs).
Table 11-4: List of Document types for the Document Control Log DESCRIPTION DID Site Specific Removal Report OT-FTO-30 Report/Minutes, Record of Meeting OT-FTO-40 Telephone Conversations/Correspondence Records OT-FTO-55 Conventional Explosives Safety Submission (ESS) OT-FTO-60 Monthly Status Report OT-FTO-80 Weekly Status Report OT-FTO-85
11.6.2 Document Distribution and Retrieval
The most current revisions of documents that prescribe technical, management, and quality requirements are internally and externally distributed to personnel identified in the procedures. These personnel are responsible for the document's implementation and its verification for implementation.
The obsolete documents that prescribe obsolete technical and quality requirements are clearly marked as obsolete and returned to the Parsons Fort Ord Document Control upon receipt of any revised document. The recipient must also immediately conduct a page change for all affected documents by inserting the revised document in place of the obsolete.
Fort Ord Document Control must track all changes and ensure that all obsolete documents have been received from the appropriate personnel. Additionally, UXOQC will conduct random surveillance of documents in the field and for field office use to validate that the most current documents are in place and being implemented.
11.6.3 Field Records Management
Records (field data forms, field note copies, personal digital assistant (PDA files) will be maintained in the on-site project office. All records will be stored such that they can be found using the date they were created, the team who created them and a grid identification number. Field forms prior to the implementation of the PDA system will also be scanned for digital delivery.
11-12 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.6.4 Field Data Storage
All data collected in the field will be stored electronically in PDAs and synchronized daily. Data from the surveys will be downloaded from data loggers at regular intervals to ensure that the work performed will not be interrupted by a lack of storage capacity in the loggers.
Data deliverables will be transferred to CESPK in accordance with Chapter 5, section 11.
See Chapter 5, section 10 and Chapter 7, section 16, for more details on Data Management Quality Control.
11.7 PROCUREMENT CONTROL
11.7.1 Preparation of a Subcontract or a Purchase Order
Parsons will prepare a contract or a purchase order to procure the item(s) and/or service(s) in compliance with Parsons’ Procurement Manual using the Parsons’ requisition forms as modified for the Fort Ord project and contained at Appendix D. Details of procurement requirements are also specified in Chapter 3 of the Work Plan for Explosives Management. Each subcontract/purchase order will include applicable technical requirements describing the items to be furnished, including:
1. References to applicable drawings, specifications, process requirements, and other relevant technical data.
2. Specific types of controls to be exercised, including requirements for source inspection at the supplier’s location during manufacturing, inspection, testing, and release for shipment.
The Contract Manager shall be responsible for issuing the RFP or RFQ to the potential bidders.
All subcontract or purchase order amendments shall be controlled, reviewed, and issued in the same manner as the original subcontract or purchase order.
11.7.2 Reviews
The QCM shall review each subcontract or purchase order for compliance with the project requirements (including the QCP requirements). Review by the PM and the Subcontracts Manager shall depend on significance, value and complexity of the subcontract or purchase order.
11.7.3 Subcontractor/Supplier Evaluation
The Contract Administrator shall perform potential subcontractor/supplier qualification assessment and bidder selection.
The evaluation and selection of the subcontractor/supplier shall be based on the ability to meet specific requirements, including quality requirements. Evidence of the subcontractor/supplier evaluation shall be maintained on file. The government’s representative shall have the privilege of verifying at the subcontractor/supplier’s location that the item or process complies with the
11-13 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
specified requirements (verification by the government shall not relieve Parsons of the responsibility to provide acceptable items or to limit subsequent rejection by the government). Access by the government representative(s) to the subcontractor/supplier facilities shall be specified in purchase order/subcontract.
11.7.4 Verification of Supplier Products and Services
UXOQC shall review and approve source inspection plans as appropriate and included in designated purchase requisitions to monitor supplier activities. The inspector performing the inspections shall be responsible for issuing an inspection report to the project management. The supplier’s management will be advised to provide corrective action to correct the deficiencies. The inspector shall be responsible for reporting the status of the open noncompliance to the project management and the QCM. Verification by Parsons shall not relieve the supplier of the responsibility to provide an acceptable item, process, or to limit a subsequent rejection by Parsons.
11.8 GOVERNMENT/CONTRACTOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
11.8. General
This sub-section of the QCP shall comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 9 of Work Plan (Property Management) and also Parsons Procurement Manual, Section 7 for the GFE.
11.8.2 Government Furnished Equipment
At the time of issuance of GFE to Parsons, the Contracting Officer shall require that Parsons be responsible and accountable and that Parsons shall keep the government’s official records of the GFE, as specified in the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR), Part 45.5. Material, as defined by FAR, means the property that can be incorporated into or attached to a deliverable end item or that can be consumed or expended in performing a contract. All GFE shall be controlled in the manner specified in procedure for GFE. Any GFE lost, damaged or rendered incapable of use shall be reported to the government within 30 days of such determination by Parsons’ government property administrator.
11.8.3 Contractor Furnished Equipment
CFE shall be inspected upon receipt and also periodically to ensure adequate maintenance and storage per manufacturer’s instructions.
11.9 INSPECTION AND TEST CONTROL
11.9.1 Engineering Review
The engineering review requirements are established in sub-section 11.15 of this QCP.
11.9.2 Inspection and Test Plan
The I & T plan shall be developed for each definable feature of work (e.g. mapping, geophysical investigation, explosive siting, etc) to be performed.
11-14 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Parsons will not release for use any item or system until all the activities specified in I & T plan has been satisfactorily completed and the associated documentation is completed.
The I & T Plan shall include a listing of items and the frequency and type of inspections and tests to be performed. Where an item or activity fails to pass any inspection or test, it shall be identified as a nonconforming item (see sub-section 11.11 of the QCP) and corrective actions shall be taken. The I & T plan shall identify all inspections and tests necessary to assure compliance with the design document requirements. The four phases of inspection are as follows:
1. Preparatory 2. Initial 3. Follow-up 4. Final
11.9.3 Qualification of Test Laboratory
All tests on the project will be performed by an Independent Test Laboratory (ITL). Parsons shall employ an independent test laboratory acceptable to the government for the performance of QC testing at the work site. As a minimum the laboratory shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329, "Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction,” and shall be authorized to operate for onsite testing. Parsons shall, prior to performance of QC testing, submit to the government for approval the name, address and qualifications (QC Plans, procedures, equipment, etc.) of the proposed testing laboratory along with evidence of authority to operate and qualifications of key laboratory personnel who will be responsible for the testing services.
Government approved test laboratory shall be used for analysis of Hazardous and Toxic Waste (HTW). Chemical Waste Contamination test laboratory must be certified DOD Surety Material lab.
11.9.4 Final Inspection and Tests
Parsons QC shall ensure that all final inspection and tests have been conducted in accordance with the I & T plan. Product(s) shall not be released for service prior to completion of all activities specified in the I & T plan and the associated documentation is available and authorized. If an unverified product must be released for immediate use prior to acceptance, the product shall be identified in a place where it can be recalled and replaced in the event a nonconformance is identified. If a nonconforming product is uncovered, it shall be controlled in a manner specified in sub-section 11.11 of the QCP.
11.9.5 Records
Parsons QC shall document results of inspections and tests to include the following information:
1. The identity of the item or activity 2. Date of inspection 3. Identification of measuring and testing equipment used 4. Acceptance criteria 5. Results and indication of acceptability
11-15 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
6. Identity of the Quality Inspector
The inspection and test records providing evidence that the work has been inspected and/or tested shall be maintained as a QC record in a manner specified in sub-section 10.14 of the QCP.
11.9.6 Equipment Maintenance and Tests
Parsons and its subcontractor perform the following activities in the order listed unless directed otherwise or operational necessity dictates otherwise. These processes and activities are controlled in accordance with the noted reference documents in the PWP:
1. Preparatory Inspection of the project site to determine the presence of environmental sensitive areas as detailed in DID OT-FTO-12, (see Appendix H), degree and type of vegetation cover, MEC and scrap contamination, the best geophysical instrument to be used and where, construction support and restoration.
2. Conduct site border survey marker installation, (Chapter 7)
3. Removing vegetation by a combination of manual and mechanical cutting or controlled burning to gain access into the site, which may include fence removal and MEC construction support. (Chapter 2)
4. Survey in the 100’ X 100’ grids. (Chapter 7)
5. Conduct MEC surface sweep, which may include demolition operations and QA/QC seeding. (Chapter 2)
6. Conduct a digital geophysical survey. This may also be performed as an analog survey. (Chapter 5)
7. Process geophysical data and create a pick and/or dig list. (Chapter 5)
8. Geographic reacquire or GPS relocation of anomalies. (Chapter 5)
9. Conduct MEC treatment and demolition. (Chapter 2)
10. Analog and digital QC and. Re-excavate, if necessary.
11. Analog and digital QA and, re-excavate, if necessary.
12. Site Restoration, which may include fence replacement and MEC removal boundary survey. (Chapter 2)
13. Preparation on an After Action Report. (Chapter 2)
11-16 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.10 MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT
11.10.1 Control of Measuring and Test Equipment
A procedure shall be implemented to control, calibrate, and maintain measuring and test equipment (including test software) used to indicate or record critical parameters or to demonstrate compliance to specified permits and requirements. The procedures shall implement the following requirements:
1. Measuring and test equipment (M&TE) shall be used in a manner that ensures that the measurement uncertainty is known and is consistent with the required measurement capability.
2. M&TE shall be selected to provide the proper range and accuracy for its intended use. The participant shall identify and document precision and accuracy tolerances.
3. Calibration checks shall be conducted and records shall be maintained to ensure that the M&TE remains accurate for its intended purposes.
11.10.2 Equipment Control
The procedure will identify the following requirements to control equipment in use:
1. Determine the measurements to be made and the precision and accuracy required.
2. Identify and document all M&TE to be included in the controlled inventory.
3. Calibrate each item at prescribed intervals, or prior to use, using certified equipment having a known relationship to nationally recognized standards. Where no such standards exist, the basis for calibration shall be documented.
4. Define the process used for the calibration of M&TE, including equipment type, unique identification, location, frequency of checks, and the calibration method to include individual components and system (loop) checks, acceptance criteria, and actions to be taken if results are determined to be unsatisfactory.
5. Identify M&TE with a label or identification record to show the calibration status.
6. Maintain calibration records for M&TE.
7. Assess and document the validity of previous test results or plant operation history when M&TE is found to be out of calibration by a prescribed and approved percentage.
8. Ensure that environmental conditions are suitable for the calibrations, measurements, and tests being performed.
9. Ensure that the handling and storage of M&TE ensures that accuracy and usefulness of M&TE are maintained.
10. Safeguard M&TE from adjustments that could invalidate the calibration setting.
11-17 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11. Provide for government or its representative to verify that measuring and test equipment is functionally adequate.
11.10.3 Instrument Calibration
The quality of geophysical data sets is dependent on the operational capabilities of the equipment used. By manufacturer’s design, these instruments are calibrated at the time of manufacture and do not require field calibration. To ensure that equipment is fully capable and will perform in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications, pre-operational and post- operational checks will be performed. Following these checks, any equipment that is found unsuitable will be immediately removed from service. These checks will provide QC data indicating the proper functionality of the instruments.
Positioning equipment will be checked for proper operation by placing the system’s antenna over a known point and recording the calculated location. For GPS units using real time corrections from a dedicated base station, the position repeatability standard will be ± 0.5 ft for RTK DGPS systems and ± 1.0 ft for ultrasonic positioning systems.
11.10.4 UXOQC Inspections/Surveys
An inspection/survey is an activity that involves measuring, examining, testing or gauging one or more characteristics of an entity and comparing the results with specified requirements in order to establish whether conformance is achieved for each characteristic. QC inspections/surveys will be performed with the instrument type that was used initially for the activity being inspected/surveyed.
SSWPs contain specific information regarding final acceptance, sampling inspection acceptance criteria, the inspection process, and the requirements for maintenance of inspection records. MEC removal operations that fail final acceptance will be controlled as a nonconforming condition and documented on a Nonconformance Report (NCR) (QCF-02 form). Grids and data/database information that fail final acceptance will be controlled by QC until verification of corrective action, final inspection, and acceptance has been completed.
11.10.5 QC Seeded Items
QC seeded items will be used as one of several quality control measures to ensure that personnel operating geophysical instruments (analog or digital) in the field for the purpose of locating buried ordnance items have performed their function in a quality manner. The method involves planting inert ordnance items in known locations where geophysical surveys will be performed and determining whether the items were found as a result of these surveys. The items will be placed at depths and orientations that, when surveyed effectively, will cause instrument responses that indicate the presence of a buried metallic item. This QC action will be performed in accordance with the SOPs for Seeding Quality Control Items for Quality Control Monitoring of Analog and Digital Geophysical Operations presented in Appendix G.
11.10.6 Equipment Maintenance and Tests
Measurement equipment utilized on-site, i.e., magnetometers, monitors, geophysical mapping equipment, etc., are checked for operational reliability.
11-18 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
In as much as possible equipment used at Fort Ord is dedicated solely to the project until the project is completed. At times, it will be necessary to rent equipment to meet surges. Equipment such as vehicles, backhoe and chipping/grubbing equipment have before, during and after operation maintenance performed in accordance with the equipment’s operating manual. The UXO QC staff is specifically responsible for inspecting the equipment and its maintenance records. If equipment field checks indicate that any piece of equipment is not operating correctly, and field repair cannot be made, the equipment is tagged and removed from service. The PM is notified and a request for replacement equipment is placed immediately. Replacement equipment must meet the same specifications for accuracy and precision as the equipment removed from service.
Parsons has reviewed the equipment requirements of this delivery order and identified the following equipment as requiring daily maintenance or tests: geophysical survey instruments (e.g. Schonstedt magnetometers, Geonics EM61, Geometrics G-858) and Global Positioning System (GPS) Receivers. Instrument standardization checks are described in section 5.12 of the PWP.
11.10.7 Preventive Maintenance
Equipment, instruments, tools, gauges, and other items requiring preventive maintenance will be serviced in accordance with the manufacturer’s specified recommendations.
Maintenance Procedures. The manufacturer’s written maintenance schedule shall be followed to minimize the downtime of the measurement system. It will be the operator’s responsibility to adhere to this maintenance schedule and to arrange any necessary and prompt service as required. At a minimum, equipment used daily will be kept in good operating condition. Qualified personnel shall perform Service to the equipment instruments, tools, etc.
11.10.8 Equipment Spare Parts
An extra battery pack for each type of geophysical instrument shall be on-site at all times. A back-up geophysical instrument will be kept on site or arrangements shall be made with an equipment vendor so replacement equipment or any spare parts needed can be delivered to the site by overnight delivery.
11.11 NONCONFORMING ITEMS OR ACTIVITIES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
11.11.1 Identification
Circumstances that prevent a work process to control the output from conforming to the contract requirements will be promptly identified, documented, investigated, and corrected appropriately. All project personnel have the responsibility, as part of their normal work duties, to promptly identify and report conditions adverse to quality. The methodology for the nonconformance report (NCR) process is described in Appendix G, Nonconforming Items or Activities and Corrective action SOP. The status of NCRs will be maintained in a log and progress of their resolutions shall be documented and reviewed monthly to ensure prompt attention to their conclusion.
11.11.2 Resolution, Corrective Action, and Verification
The appropriate level of management is responsible for evaluating the cause of a NCR and will recommend solutions for correcting the deficiency identified. Actions and technical
11-19 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
justifications for an action proposed to resolve the corrective action shall be reviewed and approved by personnel responsible for the technical aspect of the work. The QC organization will be responsible for verifying implementation of corrective action, monitoring the effectiveness of preventive action, and report any findings to the QCM.
UXOQC shall maintain the NCR log that identifies the nature, location, and status of all nonconformance reports. The NCR log status will be briefed to CESPK weekly in addition to copies of all closed-out NCRs.
11.11.3 Material and Item Nonconformance
The QCM ensures that the following requirements are implemented:
1. Items that do not conform to prescribed technical and/or quality requirements are tagged or otherwise identified, documented, and reported as nonconforming. The documentation shall include the following information:
a. Identification of the nonconforming activity, material, or item.
b. Identification of the technical and quality requirement(s) with which the activity, material, or item is not in compliance.
c. Identification of the current status of the activity, material or item (i.e. whether the item is on hold or whether its use is conditional).
d. Names and dates of the individuals identifying the nonconformance.
e. Identification of the individual(s) or organization(s) responsible for resolution.
f. Indication of the severity of the nonconformance(s).
g. Indication regarding the continuance or stoppage of work associated with each nonconforming activity, material, or item.
2. Nonconforming materials and items are segregated, when possible, from conforming materials and/or items to the extent necessary to preclude their inadvertent use.
3. The status of nonconforming activities, materials, and items and the progress of their resolution are documented and routinely reviewed to ensure prompt attention to conclusion.
11.11.4 Review and Disposition of Nonconformance
The review is conducted by the PM, QCM, and UXO QC personnel to ensure that:
1. The responsibility for review and disposition of nonconformance is defined.
2. Nonconforming materials and items are reviewed in accordance with procedures. Nonconformance can be evaluated according to four criteria:
11-20 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
a. Reworked to meet the original requirements. b. Accepted with or without repair by the designer. c. Re-graded for alternative applications. d. Rejected or scrapped. 3. Repaired or reworked materials items are re-inspected.
4. Each document used to identify and correct nonconforming conditions allows for the evaluation and approval of proposed actions by the appropriate authority.
11.11.5 Trend and Root Cause Analysis
The trend analysis of QA audits, subcontractor/supplier surveillance reports and nonconformance will include the following information: 1. Total number of audit findings and observations, surveillance reports, and NCRs for each area of the QCP.
2. A summary of the root causes for the nonconformance consolidated for each area of the QCP.
3. Trends that are developing or that have developed.
The PM, as a part of the semi-annual assessment, shall perform the trend analysis once every year. QC shall verify the implementation of any preventive actions resulting from the trend analysis. The method for conducting root cause analysis of nonconformities identified by NCRs, customer complaints and how to evaluate the need for action to ensure that the nonconformities do not recur, is presented in Appendix G, Corrective and Preventive Action SOP. This procedure also establishes the methodology to conduct trend analysis of nonconformities identified through NCRs, corrective actions, quality surveillance reports and internal audit results.
The QCM is responsible for evaluating on a semiannual basis all NCRs affecting quality and will recommend solutions as well as steps for verifying their implementation.
The management assessment shall propose and initiate measures necessary to deal with any problems requiring preventive action. When preventive action necessitates a revision to the project procedures, the PM shall issue an administrative FVF describing the necessary change. The QCM shall verify implementation of the preventive action during the audit.
11.11.6 Lessons Learned
Parsons will capture lessons learned in each individual site After Action Report, which will be forwarded to the Parsons OE Sector. Lessons learned will be reviewed and distributed to other applicable Parsons’ Projects locations by the OE Sector.
11-21 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.12 HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PRESERVATION
11.12.1 General
Requirements of this sub-section of the QCP will apply to handling, storage, and preservation of explosives as specified in Chapter 3, Explosive Management Plan, and Chapter 4, Explosive Siting Plan, of Work Plan.
11.12.2 Handling of Design Documents
All design documents prepared for contractual submittal to the government shall be submitted to Document Controls after all specified internal reviews are completed. The original design documents shall be logged and retained on file as specified in sub-section 11.13 of the QCP.
11.12.3 Handling of Materials and Items
The following requirements specified in sub-sections 11.12.4 through 11.12.6 for handling, storage, and preservation materials and items will be implemented.
11.12.4 Handling
Proper handling ensures that the following requirements are met:
1. The selection of equipment to be employed in handling items is reviewed to ensure adequacy with respect to capacity, range and method(s) of contact with the item.
2. Techniques to be used in handling items are documented and reviewed to ensure adequacy.
3. Equipment used in the handling of items is inspected and/or tested at routine intervals to ensure its fitness for service.
4. Operators of handling equipment are qualified and, when required by code, regulation, or procedure, certified to operate the equipment.
5. Control of lifting and moving heavy equipment in the plant.
11.12.5 Storage
A detailed requirement for storage of materials and items ensures:
1. Materials and items are protected in storage to the extent necessary to preserve their usefulness, including the maintenance of protective environments and conditions established by or recommended by the manufacturer or supplier.
2. Identification markings, tags or labels are maintained.
3. Measures are established and implemented to ensure that special storage conditions are routinely identified and reviewed, including identification of shelf-life, temperature conditions and moisture levels.
11-22 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
4. The authorities necessary for transactions to and from storage areas are defined.
5. Items in stock are assessed upon arrival and at defined intervals during storage in order to detect deterioration.
11.12.6 Preservation
Parsons shall implement appropriate methods for preservation and segregation of items when the items are under Parsons control to include preventive maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer or supplier.
11.13 RECORDS AND PUBLICATIONS
11.13.1 Identification
Records are documents or other media that prescribe technical or quality requirements or that provide evidence of quality achievement for materials or items. These records are identified as documents prepared, reviewed, or approved in this QCP and implementing project procedures. Records are uniquely identified for ready access and retrieval.
Records that are required to be retained are identified in project procedures. These records and documents shall, at a minimum, apply to inspection, audits, and surveillances of: MEC records, hazardous waste management, environmental restoration, and training.
11.13.2 Authentication
The validity of documents submitted for use as a record is ensured through management review of correspondence, a lead discipline engineer's review, and QCM review for compliance with project procedures.
All correspondence to the government is signed by the PM (or designee) after completion of satisfactory management review.
The authorizing signatures appear on the documents where provision has been made; e.g., the signature or initials of the authenticating person will appear for correspondence, drawings, and calculations.
11.13.3 Storage
The records will be retained in a record facility providing protection from deterioration, theft, and damage, including implementation of measures in consideration of wind, flood, fire, temperature, moisture, pressure, erasure, exposure to light, or injurious insects, mold, and rodents. Electronic storage shall be considered dual storage. Dual storage facilities shall be sufficiently remote from each other to reduce the chance of a simultaneous hazard.
11.13.4 Logs and Records
For all site work performed field personnel use personal digital assistants (PDAs). The PDAs are used to record the daily activities of field teams and locations of MEC and other pertinent items, and to note any observations that might affect the quality of data.
11-23 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Anomaly Excavation Records: The UXO Supervisors prepare individual records for each operating grid at Fort Ord. This record consists of fields that are used to record data on the excavation of anomalies and work conducted. This data is downloaded daily into the Project database through synchronization of the UXO Supervisor’s PDA. This data is reviewed by the SUXOS, FOM, UXO QC and the GIS Manager for completeness, accuracy and overall quality the following work day.
• Safety Log Book: The UXOSO maintains these logs. The logs are used to records all safety matters associated with the specific project such as: safety briefings/meetings (including items covered and attendees), safety training, safety audits, near- misses/accidents/incidents with cause and corrective action taken, weather conditions and any other matters relating to safety.
• Training Records: The UXOSO maintains training records for all site personnel. These records contain training certificates, licenses and other qualifying data for an individual’s duty position.
• Visitor’s Log Book: The UXOSO maintains this log. All personnel who are not directly involved in the project site activities are identified in this log by name, company, date, time in/out and a contact phone number. Safety briefings and training for visiting personnel are also recorded in this log.
• Photographic Log: Photographic logs are maintained by various functional departments and will be retained until the end of the project. These logs are used to record all video recording and photographs taken to document work and/or site conditions.
• Correspondence Log: The Office Administrator generates individual correspondence numbers for all outgoing correspondence and maintains a log of all outgoing and incoming correspondence.
• Phone Log: Long Distance calls are monitored by Project Controls and if there are any out of the ordinary, it/they are brought to the attention of the Office Administrator who will in turn research/determine if the calls are business related. Calls that are found to not be business related will be reimbursed by the person who made the call. If it/they cannot be determined then it/they will be charged to non-reimbursable.
• Site Maps: The PM and GIS Manager maintain current working maps of the operating areas in the field office throughout execution of this project. These maps are used to document MEC encountered and the locations of soil sampling, auguring, drilling and other soil disturbing activities.
UXO QC inspects all grid operations records on a daily basis. These inspections focus on the completeness, accuracy and logic of the records. The results of these inspections are entered directly into the project database.
11.13.5 Publications
Parsons conducted a technical review of the scope of work and all pertinent data and compiled a list of required publications to be maintained at the site. In addition to this list Parsons will make
11-24 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
available, in a timely manner, any additional manuals the SUXOS may require. Prior to the start of operations and periodically throughout the project UXOQC checks to ensure that site publications are present and in good repair. Results of these inspections are recorded and reported. Currently identified publications include:
• Copy of all Task Orders • Parsons Safety and Health Program (SHP) • OSHA, 29 CFR 1910, General Industry Standards • 27 CFR Part 55, Commerce in Explosives • OSHA, 29 CFR 1926, Construction Standards • ATFP 5400.7, Alcohol Tobacco and Firearms Explosives Laws and Regulations • NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities • American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs) • Applicable sections of EPA, 40 CFR Parts 260 to 299, Protection of Environment • Applicable sections of DOT, 49 CFR Parts 100 to 199, Transportation • CESPK EM 385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manual • CESPK ER 385-1-92, Safety and Occupational Health Document Requirements for Hazardous Waste Remedial Actions • DOD 4145.26-M, Contractors' Safety Manual for Ammunition and Explosives • DOD 6055.9-STD, DOD Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards • DOD 4160.21-M, Defense Reutilization and Marketing Manual • DA PAM 385-64, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards • AR 385-64, Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards; • AR 200-1, Environmental Protection and Enhancement • AR 385-10, The Army Safety Program • AR 385-16, System Safety Engineering and Management • AR 385-40 w/CESPK supplement, Accident Reporting and Records • TM 9-1300-200, Ammunition General • TM 9-1300-214, Military Explosives • TM 60 Series Publications • EM 1110-1-4009, Ordnance and Explosives Response
Note The CESPK Safety Specialist has access to the TM 60-Series publications for this project.
11-25 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004 Note Documents of external origin are available electronically on the project shared drive and will be updated and/or replaced as new versions become available. Hard copes will be controlled.
11.14 AUDITS AND SURVEILLANCES
11.14.1 Audit Planning
A Parsons Corporate QA representative shall perform semi-annual audits of the program activities, and audits of subcontractors/suppliers and of the environmental compliance program, as required in a manner specified below:
1. All areas of the activities being performed (where audits are not planned for certain areas, the audit schedule shall include an appropriate justification for the course of action).
2. The audit schedule shall identify office(s), including those in the subcontractor’s organization, to be audited.
3. The audit schedule shall identify the sequence and dates of audits for a fiscal year.
Before each government fiscal year, the PM shall approve the audit schedule for the government’s fiscal year. The lead auditor shall prepare the audit plans. The plan shall be reviewed and approved by the Parsons Corporate QA Manager before execution.
The audit plan shall include the following information:
1. Identification of the organization and work areas to be audited.
2. Identification of location, times, and dates of duration of the audit.
3. Identification of the documents that specify the criteria against which the work will be measured.
4. Checklists prepared as a guide during the audit.
5. Identification of auditing personnel.
6. Signatures and dates approving the audit.
The organization to be audited will be notified of the impending audits at least 15 days in advance.
11.14.2 Audit Personnel
The lead auditor shall be qualified and certified. The lead auditor shall be responsible for the organization and coordination of the planning, execution, and reporting of the audit. Auditors shall not be responsible for the work being audited.
The QCM shall be qualified and certified as a lead auditor, and is responsible for reviewing the response to the audit report and for the verification phase of the audit.
11-26 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.14.3 Audit Execution
A pre-audit briefing and a post-audit briefing shall be conducted, to inform the management of the organization being audited or to confirm the results of the audit, including concerns, and findings. Daily briefings may be conducted, as needed, to inform the audited organizations of the progress of the audit and potential findings or concerns.
11.14.4 Audit Reporting
The audit results approved by the lead auditor shall include the following information:
1. Reference to audit plan.
2. Identification of and justification for any differences that occurred between the audit plan and the actual conduct of the audit.
3. Synopsis of the audit results.
4. Description of nonconformity (identified as findings and observations).
5. Completed audit checklist and documentation (objective evidence) supporting the discovery of the nonconformity.
Note: Conditions determined to be in nonconformance with the contract, procedure, or other specified requirements, are identified as findings. Conditions that are not in nonconformance when first identified, but could lead to nonconformance if left uncorrected, are identified as observations. Formal responses are required for findings only. Corrective action is required for both findings and observations.
The lead auditor shall issue the audit report to the QCM. The QCM shall distribute the report to project management and the Vice President of Parsons OE Sector. The PM shall issue the audit report to the subcontractors and suppliers audited.
11.14.5 Review and Approval of Recommended Action Response
The recommended corrective action proposed by the management of the organization audited in response to the nonconformity shall be reviewed and approved by the QCM. Justification for rejection of the response shall be documented by the QCM and transmitted to the organization providing the response.
11.14.6 Verification of Closeout Action
The management of the organization that is being audited shall report the implementation of corrective action to close out the audit nonconformity. The lead auditor or the QCM shall verify a closeout action at the time of the next scheduled audit.
Verification of closeout action shall be documented to ensure the satisfactory closure of the audit nonconformity and shall be reported to PM and to the management of the organization audited, when applicable.
11-27 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.14.7 Surveillances/QC Audits
UXOQC personnel shall perform scheduled (daily) and unscheduled surveillances/QC audits of the program activities to supplement the audit process so that confidence in the quality of items is maintained without duplication of effort. These QC audits will include, but not limited to:
• Equipment Calibration audits
• Property accountability audit
• MEC-related task audits
• Search Effectiveness audits
• Equipment operator maintenance audit
• PPE audits
The surveillance shall be conducted by personnel who do not report to management or to the supervisors immediately responsible for the work being evaluated. The surveillance report shall document the objectives, scope, and basis of the surveillance conducted, along with the description of nonconformance(s). The surveillance report shall be discussed and coordinated with the individual or group responsible for the document or activity evaluated and shall be reported to the PM. The PM (or designee) shall provide corrective action to the surveillance within 4 weeks from the date of issue of the surveillance report. The QCM is responsible for verifying the corrective action as soon as practical following the implementation of the corrective action.
11.14.8 Stop Work
When the QC audit, surveillance, or inspection nonconformance remain open past the recommended period for corrective action, the PM will first be notified that a stop-work order will be issued if the corrective action has not been taken. When activities stemming from such nonconformance continue to compromise safety or produce unsatisfactory work on critical and essential significant items, the QCM shall issue a stop-work order until the nonconformance is corrected.
11.14.9 Records
The surveillance and audit reports shall be maintained as records in the manner established in sub-section 11.13 of this QCP.
11.15 TRAINING
11.15.1 General
Qualifications and training of all project personnel shall comply with the requirements specified in DID OT-FTO-25, Personnel/Work Standards.
11-28 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.15.2 Qualification Requirements
Key personnel, as defined in DID OT-FTO-25, shall be qualified in compliance with the DID.
Personnel whose job requires the use of detector or use of innovative detection techniques/equipment will be tested for proficiency IAW Appendix G, The UXO Technicians Analog Locator Quality Control Qualification SOP.
11.15.3 Training for UXO Personnel
For all UXO personnel assigned to this project, training includes the following courses:
Training Course Personnel Attending
40-Hour Hazardous Materials Workers All personnel who have not previously received this Training training or who do not qualify for certification through documented experience or training (HAZWOPER) equivalent to that in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of 29 CFR 1910.120. (Reference: Paragraph (e)(9) 29 CFR 1910.120
8-Hour Supervisor Course All management and supervisory personnel. This includes the PM, FOM, UXOSO, SUXOS, UXOQCS, and all UXO Supervisors.
8-Hour Refresher Course All site personnel, except those that have completed their initial 40-Hour HAZWOPER training within the past year.
UXO Refresher Course All UXO-qualified personnel will be given refresher training on the ordnance known and suspected to be present.
Equipment Operation and certification All UXO personnel will be trained and qualified on equipment such as magnetometers (Schonstedt GA- 52Cx), navigational equipment and Husky Fex 21.
Prior to the start of any intrusive on-site operations, Parsons will submit copies of the OSHA Training Certificates for the above training to CESPK for review and approval. Under no circumstances will any person be allowed to engage in intrusive activities until the requisite training is verified by CESPK.
• All site-personnel will be trained to a clearly identifiable and consistent standard, because all personnel will receive the same training.
• The training provided can be tailored to not only meet the regulatory requirements, but to address specific safety and health issues associated with this particular site and operational conditions.
11-29 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Tracking, scheduling and performing annual refresher training will be made easier by establishing a standardized start time for each individual’s qualifications.
In addition to the OSHA required training, UXO qualified personnel receive the comparable training as provided to non-UXO personnel.
11.15.4 Training for Non-UXO Personnel
Prior to commencing site activities of the non-UXO personnel, Parsons conducts required training for all personnel assigned to this project. This training includes the following training courses: • MEC Recognition Training;
• Familiarization with the current Work Plan;
• Site-Specific Safety And Health Plan orientation and PPE training, hearing protection donning and doffing of PPE;
• Instruction applicable to equipment operation and maintenance with emphasis on safety procedures to be implemented, which will require operator qualification;
• A discussion of environmental considerations specific to the MMRP;
• Employees must meet the standards of OSHA (29 CFR 1910.120). The employee will complete the OSHA training as described in paragraph 6.4.2.1;
• Daily Safety and Tailgate Training: Briefings outlining the day’s activities, unique hazards and safety precautions and other operational issues related to the project.
The UXOSO and others conduct training as applicable. Records of attendance (and student performance when applicable) are recorded. Upon completion of Safety and Equipment Operator's Training the employee is issued a certificate of training and a copy of this certificate is placed in the site personnel record. Prior to assignment to a duty position or change in duty position the UXO QC performs a check of the individual's site personnel record to ensure that the employee is qualified to fill the position.
Personnel involved in activities affecting the quality of operations and QC personnel assigned the responsibility for verifying the adequacy of MEC removal activities, clearance activity, environmental sampling, and related testing will be trained and certified as specified in DID OT- FTO-25.
11.15.5 Training Requirements
Personnel and subcontractors assigned on Fort Ord to perform activities affecting quality and safety shall be trained to the project requirements and to the requirements of the QCP, as well as to the project and safety procedures. The project procedure shall establish a formal training and qualification program.
The training program will ensure that project personnel:
11-30 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Possess adequate knowledge of the processes and procedures needed to conduct assigned tasks;
• Has working knowledge of the tools to be used;
• Possess an understanding of acceptance and rejection criteria for the work process;
• Understand the safety conditions/requirements of the work task. Safety training for all onsite personnel will consist of daily tailgate safety meetings and weekly Safety Manager meetings;
• Knows the consequences of inadequate quality levels;
• Is provided training for continued maintenance of job proficiency;
• Aware of the quality improvement and empowerment responsibilities;
Quality Control staff including subcontractors at the site shall be required to complete the Corps of Engineers “Construction Quality Management for Contractors” training course.
The training program shall describe the initial, refresher, and replacement training to be conducted.
All visitors shall be required to go through a safety training and orientation to the general and specific hazard requirements.
Training records including qualifications and certifications will be maintained as project records in Document Controls files in accordance with requirements in sub-section 11.13.
11.16 STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES
11.16.1 General
Statistical Sampling and Analysis: Characterization of sites using traditional or innovative sampling methods as approved by the Government shall be performed.
Sampling and Analysis: Chemical sampling and analysis (both on-site and off-site) for explosives, CWM, and other Target Compound List chemicals (as required) shall be performed.
This sub-section of the QCP shall comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 5 (Geophysical Investigation), and Chapter 10 (Sampling and Analysis) of Work Plan.
Parsons will verify implementation of the statistical techniques used during the surveillance and audit of the subcontractor/supplier.
11-31 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
11.17 QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
11.17.1 General
Measurable objectives and goals shall be implemented to solicit customer feedback in order to improve the quality management process continually.
11.17.2 Goal and Objectives
The PM shall establish measurable quality goals and objectives at relevant functions and levels within the project organization. The PM shall measure these goals and objectives periodically and shall identify any improvements needed from the measurements.
11.17.3 Customer Feedback
Management assessments, NCRs and trend analyses, and client feedback received during the course of the project execution shall be considered as customer feedback by project management. All client concerns shall be addressed by the PM in correspondence to the client.
11.17.4 Improvements
The measurements and feedback received by project management shall be analyzed to identify improvement opportunities in the quality management system, processes, items, products, or services. Implemented improvement should be monitored by the PM to verify their effectiveness.
11.17.5 Servicing
Servicing is not within the Parsons Scope of Work under this contract.
11-32 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 12 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
12.1 INTRODUCTION
This Environmental Protection Plan (EPP) has been developed for the management and protection of the environment to be implemented by Parsons during the performance of MEC characterization and clearance at MEC-impacted sites at Fort Ord. The EPP provides guidance, methods, and procedures for the following environmental considerations.
• Protection and conservation of natural, cultural, and archaeological resources • Pollution prevention and waste minimization • Protection and restoration of work areas
12.2 GOALS
MEC characterization and clearance at Fort Ord are being performed with the following goals:
• To enhance the usability of MEC-impacted sites by detecting and removing the hazards associated with MEC;
• To perform MEC-related operations in a manner that avoids or minimizes impacts to the natural environment, including populations and habitats of rare, threatened and endangered species, leaving the environment in as near natural condition as operationally possible; and
• To restore sites cleared of MEC to as close to their original condition as possible, including measures to facilitate reestablishment of native flora and fauna.
12.3 ENVIRONMENTAL COORDINATION
To ensure compliance with all applicable environmental regulations and agreements, implementation of this EPP will require close coordination with the onsite CESPK representative and DENR. The PM will be responsible for coordinating all environmental actions with the CESPK and DENR.
12.4 PROTECTION AND CONSERVATION OF NATURAL RESOURCES
Fort Ord supports a variety of wildlife, plant species and habitats. The conservation and management of these natural resources are detailed in the Installation-Wide Multispecies Habitat Management Plan for Former Fort Ord, California (HMP), the Wetland Restoration Plan for Unexploded Ordnance Removal Activities at Former Fort Ord, and other documents provided by DENR regarding guidelines for natural resource protection. Chapter 3 of the HMP, “Habitat Management for Predisposal Actions – Ordnance and Explosives Removal”, is incorporated into this EPP by reference for specific mitigation measures for avoiding impacts on plant and animal resources, and direction for mitigation monitoring. General considerations for rare, threatened and
12-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
endangered species and sensitive habitats such as wetlands are provided in this EPP. Map 5 (Appendix B) provides the Habitat Management Areas designated by the HMP.
12.4.1 Threatened and Endangered Species
Table 12-1 presents a list of rare, threatened and endangered (T&E) flora and fauna found on Fort Ord and their corresponding Federal/State protection status.
Table 12-1 List of Rare, Threatened and Endangered Species Known or Suspected at Fort Ord
Common Name Scientific Name Protection Status Federal California Western snowy plover Charadrius alexandrinus nivosus Threatened Species of concern Smith’s blue butterfly Euphilotes enoptes smithi Endangered California red-legged Rana aurora draytoni Threatened Species of concern frog California tiger Ambystoma tigrinum californiense Candidate Species of concern salamander California black legless Anniella pulchra var.nigra Species of concern lizard Monterey ornate shrew Sorex ornatus salarius Species of concern Salinas harvest mouse Reithrodontomys megalotis distchlis Sensitive species Sand gilia Gilia tenuiflora ssp. Arenaria Endangered Threatened Monterey spineflower Chorizanthe pungens var. pungens Threatened Coast wallflower Erysimum ammophilum Species of concern Seaside birds-beak Cordylanthus rigidus var. littoralis Species of concern Endangered Monterey ceanothus Ceanothus cuneatus var. rigidus Species of concern Sandmat manzanita Arctostaphylos pumila Species of concern Toro manzanita Arctostaphylos montereyensis Species of concern Hooker’s manzanita Arctostaphylos hookeri CNPS 1B List Eastwood’s ericameria Ericameria fasciculata Species of concern Contra Costa goldfields Lasthenia conjugens Endangered Yadon’s piperia Piperia yadonii Proposed endangered
12-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
12.4.2 Protection and Conservation of Rare, T & E Species
12.4.2.1 Training
To ensure compliance with the HMP, a qualified biologist will provide training to all Parsons’ field personnel and subcontractors in the following:
• The Endangered Species Act and its implementing federal and state regulations; • Recognition of above listed flora and fauna, including seasonal considerations; • Notification procedures when rare, T & E species are encountered; and • Impact avoidance and reduction measures as listed in Chapter 3 of the HMP for OE removal.
Training will be provided by qualified individuals. New employees will be trained prior to their deployment in the field and only trained personnel will be deployed. The training will be provided semi-annually as a refresher.
12.4.2.2 Impact Avoidance/Reduction
• Prior to any MEC-related activities on a work site, the Parsons’ field biologist will coordinate an environmental survey of the site to identify presence and locations of sensitive habitats and species prior to working on each site, in order to avoid impacts during MEC work. The survey will also include, but not be limited to, photographic and descriptive documentation of the work site and the general area, and measures to minimize impacts.
• The Parsons’ field biologist will be responsible for completing the habitat checklist detailing the following: (1) location of rare, T & E species (2) procedures, equipment, and training required to eliminate or mitigate the impact and (3) presence of wetlands and other sensitive habitats.
• Field personnel, when encountering flora and fauna listed in Table 12-1, will avoid impacting them as much as possible. When avoidance is not possible, site-specific impact reduction measures previously approved by the DENR and as detailed in the HMP will be implemented.
12.4.3 Protection of Rare, T&E Species
To protect and avoid disturbance of the protected species, Parsons will:
• Limit off-road access to habitat of the listed species as identified in environmental surveys, • Replace top soil as necessary to preserve existing seed banks of protected species, and • Apply rice straw or other biodegradable weed-free material approved by DENR to restore MEC-cleared areas to prevent exotic weed infestations and erosion.
12-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
12.5 VEGETATION CLEARANCE
Dense vegetation composed of maritime chaparral shrubs and oak woodlands cover most of the MRS-impacted sites at Fort Ord. Controlled burning is the preferred method to remove vegetation from the work area and will be closely coordinated with the DENR at all times. Where chaparral vegetation cover is thick, mechanical or manual brush cutting methods may be employed as appropriate, leaving the roots intact as much as possible. During manual clearance, designated rare shrubs may be limbed up as much as possible while allowing MEC removal activities to proceed. These shrubs will be marked using flags so they can be recognized during vegetation clearance activity. Cut vegetation will be chipped and spread in designated areas. In oak woodland areas, oak trees will be limbed up as needed to allow access to the ground for MEC removal activities.
12.6 SENSITIVE COMMUNITIES
Sensitive communities recognized by the US Fish and Wildlife Service and the California Department of Fish and Game on Fort Ord include the following:
• Central maritime chaparral • Valley needlegrass grassland • Coastal Freshwater Marsh • Central dune scrub To protect or minimize damage to sensitive communities in MES work-sites, Parsons will identify areas where these communities are present on work sites and implement the appropriate protection measures as detailed in the HMP and other documents during MEC removal. These areas are identified in the USA Final Work Plan, dated 27 April 2000.
12.7 WETLANDS
Wetlands are areas known to (1) support predominantly hydrophytic plant species, at least periodically, (2) have undrained hydric soil as the substrate, and (3) be saturated or inundated at some time during the growing season, typically for a period greater than 2 weeks. Vernal pools, ponds, and other wetland areas exist at Fort Ord. They serve as breeding habitat for the California tiger salamander and many other rare, T, & E aquatic species, in addition to providing flood control, natural water purification through sediment trapping, and maintenance and recharge of groundwater resources. To protect or minimize impact to MEC-impacted wetlands and associated flora and fauna, Parsons will implement the DENR-approved MEC removal protocol for wetlands, including the Wetland Restoration Plan for Unexploded Ordnance Removal Activities at Former Fort Ord.
MEC removal activities in wetlands will be coordinated with the DENR for approval prior to beginning any work activity.
12-4 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
12.8 PROTECTION AND CONSERVATION OF CULTURAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES
The Final Environmental Impact Statement (FEIS) for the disposal and reuse of Fort Ord identified historical, cultural, and archaeological sites within Fort Ord. Although it is unlikely that any of these sites will be impacted during MEC characterization and removal activities, any MEC related activities that will affect these sites will be coordinated with the CESPK and the DENR. All historical, cultural, and archaeological finds will be reported immediately by the PM to CESPK for notification of cognizant agencies. All site work will cease and will only be resumed upon approval of CESPK and DENR. Only a qualified archaeologist will be authorized to inventory, move, and preserve the find.
12.9 POLLUTION PREVENTION AND WASTE MINIMIZATION
12.9.1 Hazardous Materials Management
Parsons operations at Fort Ord during MEC characterization and clearance involve minimal quantities of fuel, paints, and solvents. These hazardous materials are transported in Department of Transportation (DOT)-approved containers and stored in HAZMAT lockers at the field office. These HAZMAT lockers serve as secondary containers, which preclude off-site migration of the materials during a spill.
12.9.1.1 Spill Prevention and Control
When a spill occurs, if necessary, the PM will notify CESPK for notification of the appropriate agencies. Based on the types of materials and quantities stored on site (maximum of 5 gallon pails), and secondary containment provisions, notification of cognizant agencies may not be necessary.
All on-site Parsons’ personnel will be trained in spill prevention and control. When a spill occurs the employee discovering the spill will notify the PM and/or the FOM who will immediately secure the area. When the area is secure, the PM and/or the FOM will initiate and direct spill control measures and elimination of the source of the spill. The area of the spill will be isolated and cleaned up using absorbent material such as granular cellulose, absorbent mats, pillows, and socks. All contaminated materials (e.g. contaminated soil) and used absorbent will be containerized in plastic bags for off-site disposal.
12.9.2 Hazardous Waste Management
12.9.2.1 Operational Hazardous Wastes
Hazardous waste streams generated from MEC characterization and clearance activities at Fort Ord consist of small amounts of waste oil, solvents, paints, and spent absorbents. These wastes will be collected in satellite accumulation points and will be transferred later to DENR for proper manifesting and disposal.
12-5 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
12.9.2.2 Ordnance and UXO-Related Wastes
The potential for encountering ordnance related waste exists. Ordnance scrap, which does not contain explosive, pyrotechnic, or chemical agent, will be handled, transported and disposed by FACT International, a commercial scrap metal dealer.
If chemical warfare munitions (CWM) are encountered, Parsons will terminate all operations within 500 meters of the CWM and the CWM site will be secured by at least two UXO technicians who will remain at least 50 meters upwind of the CWM. The CESPK Safety Specialist will be notified immediately, who will subsequently contact the local EOD for handling and disposal of the CWM. Parsons will stand by and render assistance to the CESPK and the EOD when requested.
12.9.2.3 Hazardous and Toxic Waste (HTW)
Under this contract, Parsons may be tasked to manage incidental HTW. Incidental HTWs are wastes encountered by Parsons during MEC characterization and clearance and will be managed by Parsons in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. They will be collected, labeled, and stored in accordance with federal, state, and Army requirements, following standard operating procedures for manifesting and record keeping (including laboratory analyses, exception reporting, land ban certification, accumulation, and transportation).
12.9.2.4 Manifesting and Transporting of Wastes
Incidental HTW will be shipped to an authorized offsite disposal facility and will be properly manifested using the EPA Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest (EPA Form 8700-22). The authorized transporter will also be responsible for confirming that the waste is manifested correctly. Parsons will provide the California Department of Toxic Substances Control a legible copy of the completed manifest within 30 days of a shipment.
The incidental HTW will be transported in DOT-approved containers by an approved transporter. Each hazardous waste container will have a hazardous waste label and the appropriate DOT warning labels. The hazardous waste label will contain the following:
• DOT shipping name and identification number;
• The words “HAZARDOUS WASTE – State and Federal law prohibit improper disposal. If found, contact the nearest police or public safety authority, the US EPA or the California Department of Health Services”;
• Generator’s name and address (Parsons OE Sector, Fort Ord, California);
• EPA Identification Number (or generator number);
• Manifest Document Number;
• EPA/CA Waste Numbers;
• Accumulation start date; and
12-6 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
• Waste content, composition, physical state, and hazardous characteristics.
12.9.2.5 Decontamination and Disposal of Equipment
Equipment used in hazardous waste activities (operational or incidental) will be decontaminated using a detergent wash followed by several tap water rinses and finally a distilled water rinse. If required, the final distilled water rinse will be analyzed to confirm cleanliness of the equipment. Methods to minimize decontamination solution waste and decontamination rinse water generated during equipment cleaning will be implemented at all times. Decontamination rinsate will be collected, tested, and disposed as hazardous waste if necessary. Equipment that cannot be decontaminated will be properly packaged, labeled, manifested and transported offsite as hazardous waste.
12.9.3 Wastewater Generation
Parsons will generate minimal amounts of wastewater from sinks, showers, and toilet facilities in the field office. Parsons will implement a water conservation program to reduce water consumption and wastewater generation to a minimum at these fixed indoor facilities.
12.9.4 Air Emissions
Emission sources from Parsons MEC operations at Fort Ord will include mobile equipment such as project vehicles, earth moving equipment, UXO disposal by detonation, vegetation burning or clearing, and dust from access roads and work areas.
12.9.4.1 Mobile Sources
Parsons will maintain its vehicle fleet and earth moving equipment in good working order (properly tuned) to reduce exhaust emissions from incomplete fuel combustion. In addition, Parsons will coordinate and schedule activities to reduce vehicle trips to the work site and field office.
12.9.4.2 Prescribed Burning
Prescribed burning is the preferred method for reducing vegetation in operating areas. Parsons will coordinate with DENR prior to conducting any vegetation burning activities. To preclude excessive smoke from burning, only low-moisture content vegetation will be burned. Discrimination of vegetation suitable for burning will be made by the contracted burn specialists, with the concurrence of CESPK and USACE. In addition, burning will be conducted only during conditions of low wind velocities to control the burn area to the prescribed size. Wind and weather conditions will be further defined in site specific burn plans.
12.9.4.3 Sources of Airborne Dust
Dust is generated from vehicular traffic on unpaved access roads, MEC disposal by detonation, and site clearing for MEC characterization and clearance. Dust generation will be kept to a minimum over unpaved access roads. To reduce personnel exposure to dust, detonation personnel will be positioned upwind of the disposal site and personnel will wear dust masks during high wind conditions. In addition, water application may also be employed to mitigate dust
12-7 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
generation. The UXOSO will be responsible for obtaining daily weather forecasts for consideration in planning daily operations.
12.9.5 Solid Waste
Municipal solid waste, such as domestic trash and general debris, will be collected and placed in dumpsters for disposal by an authorized contractor. To reduce generation of solid waste, Parsons will implement a recycling program to include a collection, storage, and transportation plan for removal of recyclable materials. Aluminum, glass, paper, plastic, and cardboard products related to day-to-day consumption will be collected in separate receptacles. Transporting the recyclable materials to commercial recycling operators will be conducted on a regular basis depending on the volumes generated.
12.10 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF UXO WORK AREAS
MEC work areas need to be secured because of the inherent safety hazards associated with them and to ensure that all MEC related activities proceed as planned. In addition, following MEC clearance, site restoration will be conducted as needed.
12.10.1 Protection of Personnel and Work Areas
Parsons will provide adequate protection of its personnel from exposure to hazardous conditions while conducting MEC-related activities. Additionally, Parsons will also secure all work areas to protect the public from exposure to work area hazards.
12.10.1.1 Personnel Protection
Parsons will provide both field and field office personnel a general briefing regarding the MEC removal project at Fort Ord, with special emphasis on the hazards associated with MEC. Field personnel will be provided the initial 40-hour HAZWOPER training and the annual 8-hour refresher training. Prior to deployment at a specific site, field personnel will also be provided with site-specific orientation. Field personnel training will continue during the daily safety briefings. Specifics related to personnel training are detailed in the Site Safety and Health Plan.
Parsons will provide its field personnel with adequate personal protective equipment such as field radios, dust masks, earplugs, first aid kits, and work boots specific for use in uneven and rough terrain.
12.10.1.2 Site Security
Parsons will limit access to the field office and the work areas. Access to the work areas will be limited to CESPK representatives and authorized personnel of Parsons and its subcontractors. Authorized visitors will log in at the field office, receive a safety briefing, and will be provided with UXO Escorts at all times.
12.10.1.3 Equipment Security
Parsons uses a variety of instruments and light and heavy-duty equipment in conducting its MEC work. To prevent theft and/or vandalism to this equipment, Parsons will store the equipment when not in use in locked storage facilities either at the field office or at the work sites. All heavy-
12-8 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
duty equipment will be parked and the operator’s cab will be locked to prevent entry and unauthorized operation of the machinery.
12.10.2 Restoration of Work Areas
12.10.2.1 Post Activity Cleanup and Site Closure
Parsons will prepare a Post Activity Cleanup and Site Closure Plan, which will be submitted to the CESPK for review and approval, and will implement the plan following completion of all MEC characterization and clearance and removal of incidental HTW. The plan will detail activities and schedules for site closure as well as informal post-cleanup monitoring of the sites, if required. The plan will cover the removal of all temporary construction and operations facilities and restoration of disturbed areas from the MEC characterization and clearance activities.
12.10.2.2 Staging Facilities
Staging areas may be required near UXO work areas. All staging areas will be coordinated with DENR prior to use. The SSWP will define the staging areas if required.
12.10.2.3 Temporary Facilities
To support its MEC work, Parsons will set up temporary facilities such as security fences, power poles, storage sheds, storage yards, berms, etc. Following completion of all MEC work contracted to Parsons, all temporary facilities including all signs of activity will be removed and the areas cleaned up. Trash and debris will be removed and disposed off accordingly.
12.10.2.4 Areas of Disturbance
Excavation sites, drill holes and all areas of soil disturbance will be restored to as close to their pre-activity condition. Topsoil previously removed and stockpiled in bermed and lined storage areas, will be returned following completion of MEC clearance at a specific work area.
12.10.2.5 Access Routes
Parsons will use existing roads and easements to the maximum extent possible for accessing work areas. For interior work sites that are not directly or readily accessible from existing roads and easements, Parsons will coordinate with CESPK to define an off-road access route prior to initiating off road travel or MEC operations. The use of off road access routes will be monitored as necessary to ensure that ruts, which can develop from excessive use, do not channel water run-off and sediment to wetlands and other sensitive areas within Fort Ord. Following completion of MEC clearance, the installed off road access routes will be re-graded, covered with topsoil (like the rest of the work area) and seeded, if required.
12-9 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
CHAPTER 13 INVESTIGATION DERIVED WASTE PLAN
13.1 INTRODUCTION
This Investigation Derived Waste (IDW) Plan has been developed for the management of IDW by Parsons during MEC characterization and clearance activities at Fort Ord. The sampling, management and disposal of IDW will follow Army guidance. IDW that could be generated can include, but not be limited, to the following:
• Used personal protective equipment (PPE) • Decontamination fluids • Contaminated lumber • Asbestos containing materials (ACM) • Metal waste • Hazardous materials packaging • Contaminated soil
Procedures outlined in the IDW Plan will be coordinated with the Fort Ord HazMat Team. The HazMat Team will be the primary responsible party for manifesting, shipping, and disposing of IDW. Operations will be conducted in accordance with this IWD Plan.
13.2 WASTE SEGREGATION AND CONTAINERIZATION
The management of IDW will depend on whether the IDW is hazardous or non-hazardous. To make this determination, Parsons will initially segregate the wastes according to the type of material and according to the activity conducted to prevent cross contamination.
Used PPE and hazardous materials packaging will be containerized in DOT-approved 55- gallon drums. Drums containing PPE determined to have been used in hazardous waste activities and hazardous materials packaging will be labeled as hazardous waste and managed, transported, and disposed as hazardous waste as described in the Environmental Protection Plan.
Decontamination fluids will be containerized in DOT-approved 55-gallon drums or in temporary polyethylene storage tanks. The decontamination fluid containers will be labeled “Potentially Hazardous Waste Pending Further Investigation” until laboratory analysis results confirm hazardous or non-hazardous characteristics.
Lumber from building debris will be inspected for lead-based paint. It is assumed that buildings encountered at UXO sites were constructed prior to 1980, were painted with lead-based paint (LBP), and will not need to be sampled for analysis. Building debris where the paint is in relatively good condition (intact) will be accumulated and disposed in a permitted Class 2 or Class 3 landfill. Building debris with paint that is chipping will be packaged and disposed as hazardous waste in a permitted treatment, storage, and disposal facility (TSDF). It will be double wrapped with 6 mil (minimum) polyethylene or drummed for transport to the TSDF.
13-1 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Used lumber treated with pentachlorophenol or creosote such as electric poles, telephone poles, and railroad ties will be reprocessed as much as possible through a recycling facility. If recycling is not a viable option, it will be sent to a Class 2 or Class 3 landfill. A material safety data sheet (MSDS) for pentachlorophenol or creosote will be provided with the treated wood being landfilled. If a landfill cannot be located to accept the used treated lumber, it will be profiled for creosote and pentachlorophenol and then disposed properly at a permitted TSDF.
Non-friable asbestos-containing materials (ACM) such as roofing materials, floor tiles, transite panels, etc., that are intact will be disposed as non-hazardous waste at a permitted Class 3 landfill. Friable ACM such as fireproofing material and piping insulation will be treated as hazardous waste. It will be adequately wetted down and packaged in properly labeled, approved ACM waste bags, which will be disposed at a permitted landfill that accepts friable ACM. For suspect building materials, they will be profiled using the appropriate EPA standard method (polarized light microscopy) prior to disposition.
Metals waste such as barbed wire, concertina wire, and used pipes will be collected in a dumpster and picked up by a metal recycler.
Soils from excavations will be temporarily stockpiled in lined and bermed storage areas. The current Parsons’ contract requires return of the soil onto the work areas. If contamination is suspected, soil samples will be collected and analyzed to determine soil treatment or disposal options.
13.3 SAMPLING AND ANALYTICAL STRATEGY
If required, Parsons will evaluate the IDW for recognizable impacts (visual and olfactory) and will profile the IDW for chemical characteristics to determine disposal or reuse options. In general, IDW sampling and analytical protocols will follow EPA/DTSC accepted standard methods. Approved methods for specific analytes will depend on the contaminant of concern. Analysis will be performed only by Army approved laboratories. For IDW contaminated with chemical agent, analysis will be performed by a surety laboratory certified by the U.S. Army Edgewood Chemical and Biological Center.
13.4 STORAGE OF IDW
Parsons will store hazardous IDW in either satellite accumulation points (SAP) or less than 90-day storage areas. These areas will be coordinated with the Fort Ord HazMat Team.
SAPs are storage facilities where the IDW is accumulated and is located near the work site where the IDW is generated. A SAP may collect one type of waste or various types of waste in separate containers as long as the total quantity of waste does not exceed 55 gallons for a hazardous waste or one quart of an acutely or extremely hazardous waste per waste or type of stream. Incompatible waste streams are stored in separate SAPs. SAPs may collect or store hazardous IDW for no more than one year.
Less than 90-day storage areas are for the storage of hazardous IDW for less than 90 days without a hazardous waste storage permit. These areas are for the temporary storage of hazardous IDW containers received from SAPs prior to transport and disposal.
13-2 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004
Both SAPs and less than 90-day storage areas will be identified with signs and will be provided with spill kits. Less than 90-day storage will be secured with gates and fences and will be locked when unattended. In addition, less than 90-day storage areas will be equipped with approved eyewashes and fire extinguishers (if storing flammables) and internal communication devices or alarm systems for providing immediate emergency notification.
Non-hazardous IDW can be stored in general storage areas. Parsons will provide security fences and locks to discourage vandalism of non-hazardous IDW containers.
13.5 MANIFESTING AND TRANSPORTATION OF IDW
Hazardous IDW will be manifested and transported for disposal following procedures outlined for hazardous wastes in the EPP. Non-hazardous IDW will be shipped to the disposal facility using bills of lading.
13.6 DISPOSAL OF IDW
Hazardous IDW will be disposed only at approved Class 1 treatment, storage and disposal facilities. Non-hazardous IDW will be disposed only at approved Class 2 or Class 3 facilities.
13-3 Contract Number DACA05-00-D-0003 May 2004